WO2019087978A1 - Coding device, decoding device, coding method and decoding method - Google Patents
Coding device, decoding device, coding method and decoding method Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- WO2019087978A1 WO2019087978A1 PCT/JP2018/039942 JP2018039942W WO2019087978A1 WO 2019087978 A1 WO2019087978 A1 WO 2019087978A1 JP 2018039942 W JP2018039942 W JP 2018039942W WO 2019087978 A1 WO2019087978 A1 WO 2019087978A1
- Authority
- WO
- WIPO (PCT)
- Prior art keywords
- processing
- processing unit
- search
- search range
- picture
- Prior art date
Links
Images
Classifications
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N19/00—Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals
- H04N19/10—Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using adaptive coding
- H04N19/102—Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using adaptive coding characterised by the element, parameter or selection affected or controlled by the adaptive coding
- H04N19/103—Selection of coding mode or of prediction mode
- H04N19/109—Selection of coding mode or of prediction mode among a plurality of temporal predictive coding modes
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N19/00—Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals
- H04N19/10—Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using adaptive coding
- H04N19/134—Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using adaptive coding characterised by the element, parameter or criterion affecting or controlling the adaptive coding
- H04N19/157—Assigned coding mode, i.e. the coding mode being predefined or preselected to be further used for selection of another element or parameter
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N19/00—Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals
- H04N19/10—Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using adaptive coding
- H04N19/169—Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using adaptive coding characterised by the coding unit, i.e. the structural portion or semantic portion of the video signal being the object or the subject of the adaptive coding
- H04N19/17—Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using adaptive coding characterised by the coding unit, i.e. the structural portion or semantic portion of the video signal being the object or the subject of the adaptive coding the unit being an image region, e.g. an object
- H04N19/176—Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using adaptive coding characterised by the coding unit, i.e. the structural portion or semantic portion of the video signal being the object or the subject of the adaptive coding the unit being an image region, e.g. an object the region being a block, e.g. a macroblock
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N19/00—Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals
- H04N19/42—Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals characterised by implementation details or hardware specially adapted for video compression or decompression, e.g. dedicated software implementation
- H04N19/423—Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals characterised by implementation details or hardware specially adapted for video compression or decompression, e.g. dedicated software implementation characterised by memory arrangements
- H04N19/426—Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals characterised by implementation details or hardware specially adapted for video compression or decompression, e.g. dedicated software implementation characterised by memory arrangements using memory downsizing methods
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N19/00—Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals
- H04N19/42—Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals characterised by implementation details or hardware specially adapted for video compression or decompression, e.g. dedicated software implementation
- H04N19/436—Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals characterised by implementation details or hardware specially adapted for video compression or decompression, e.g. dedicated software implementation using parallelised computational arrangements
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N19/00—Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals
- H04N19/50—Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using predictive coding
- H04N19/503—Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using predictive coding involving temporal prediction
- H04N19/51—Motion estimation or motion compensation
- H04N19/57—Motion estimation characterised by a search window with variable size or shape
Definitions
- the present disclosure relates to an encoding device, a decoding device, an encoding method, and a decoding method.
- H.264 is used as a standard for coding a moving image.
- H. H.265 is also referred to as HEVC (High Efficiency Video Coding).
- the present disclosure aims to provide an encoding device, a decoding device, an encoding method, or a decoding method that can reduce processing time or processing amount.
- An encoding device includes a circuit and a memory, and the circuit uses the memory to set a search range to be commonly used in a first processing unit, and the first processing.
- the circuit uses the memory to set a search range to be commonly used in a first processing unit, and the first processing.
- For the second processing unit using inter prediction among one or more second processing units included in the unit reference to pixels outside the search range is restricted, and encoding is performed with reference to pixels in the search range Do the processing.
- a decoding device includes a circuit and a memory, and the circuit uses the memory to set a search range commonly used in the first processing unit, and the first processing unit. For the second processing unit using inter prediction among the plurality of second processing units included in, the reference of the pixels outside the search range is restricted, and the decoding process is performed using the pixels within the search range.
- the present disclosure can provide an encoding device, a decoding device, an encoding method, or a decoding method that can reduce processing time or processing amount.
- FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration of the coding apparatus according to the first embodiment.
- FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example of block division in the first embodiment.
- FIG. 3 is a table showing transform basis functions corresponding to each transform type.
- FIG. 4A is a view showing an example of the shape of a filter used in ALF.
- FIG. 4B is a view showing another example of the shape of a filter used in ALF.
- FIG. 4C is a view showing another example of the shape of a filter used in ALF.
- FIG. 5A is a diagram illustrating 67 intra prediction modes in intra prediction.
- FIG. 5B is a flowchart for describing an outline of predicted image correction processing by OBMC processing.
- FIG. 5A is a diagram illustrating 67 intra prediction modes in intra prediction.
- FIG. 5B is a flowchart for describing an outline of predicted image correction processing by OBMC processing.
- FIG. 5C is a conceptual diagram for describing an outline of predicted image correction processing by OBMC processing.
- FIG. 5D is a diagram illustrating an example of FRUC.
- FIG. 6 is a diagram for describing pattern matching (bilateral matching) between two blocks along a motion trajectory.
- FIG. 7 is a diagram for describing pattern matching (template matching) between a template in a current picture and a block in a reference picture.
- FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining a model assuming uniform linear motion.
- FIG. 9A is a diagram for describing derivation of a motion vector in units of sub blocks based on motion vectors of a plurality of adjacent blocks.
- FIG. 9B is a diagram for describing an overview of motion vector derivation processing in the merge mode.
- FIG. 9A is a diagram for describing derivation of a motion vector in units of sub blocks based on motion vectors of a plurality of adjacent blocks.
- FIG. 9B is a diagram for describing an
- FIG. 9C is a conceptual diagram for describing an overview of DMVR processing.
- FIG. 9D is a diagram for describing an outline of a predicted image generation method using luminance correction processing by LIC processing.
- FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration of the decoding apparatus according to the first embodiment.
- FIG. 11 is a flowchart of a first example of inter prediction processing according to the first embodiment.
- FIG. 12 is a diagram for describing a process of excluding candidate motion vectors from evaluation targets in the first example of the inter prediction process according to the first embodiment.
- FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the process of determining the search range according to the first embodiment.
- FIG. 14 is a diagram for describing a method of deriving the center position shift amount of the search area according to the first embodiment for each target CTU.
- FIG. 15 is a diagram for describing a method of deriving the center position shift amount of the search area according to Embodiment 1 as a value common to all CTUs in the target picture.
- FIG. 16A is a diagram for describing a data transfer method in the first example of the inter prediction process according to the first embodiment.
- 16B is a diagram for describing a data transfer method in the first example of the inter prediction process according to Embodiment 1.
- FIG. FIG. 17A is a diagram for explaining a pixel area which requires data transfer.
- FIG. 17B is a diagram for explaining a pixel area which requires data transfer.
- FIG. 17A is a diagram for explaining a pixel area which requires data transfer.
- FIG. 17C is a diagram for explaining a pixel area which requires data transfer.
- FIG. 18 is a flowchart of a second example of the inter prediction process according to the first embodiment.
- FIG. 19 is a diagram for describing a process of excluding candidate motion vectors from evaluation targets in the second example of the inter prediction process according to the first embodiment.
- FIG. 20A is a diagram for describing a data transfer method in the second example of the inter prediction process according to the first embodiment.
- FIG. 20B is a diagram for describing a data transfer method in the second example of the inter prediction process according to the first embodiment.
- FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing an implementation example of a coding apparatus.
- FIG. 22 is a block diagram showing an implementation example of the decoding device.
- FIG. 23 is an overall configuration diagram of a content supply system for realizing content distribution service.
- FIG. 24 is a diagram illustrating an example of a coding structure at the time of scalable coding.
- FIG. 25 is a diagram illustrating an example of a coding structure at the time of scalable coding.
- FIG. 26 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of a web page.
- FIG. 27 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of a web page.
- FIG. 28 is a diagram illustrating an example of a smartphone.
- FIG. 29 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a smartphone.
- An encoding device includes a circuit and a memory, and the circuit uses the memory to set a search range to be commonly used in a first processing unit, and the first processing.
- the circuit uses the memory to set a search range to be commonly used in a first processing unit, and the first processing.
- For the second processing unit using inter prediction among one or more second processing units included in the unit reference to pixels outside the search range is restricted, and encoding is performed with reference to pixels in the search range Do the processing.
- the amount of access to the memory storing the image of the processed area can be limited, the processing time related to data transfer can be suppressed, and the amount of processing can be reduced.
- the first processing unit may be a block unit configured of one or more second processing units, which is a basic division unit of a picture, or a predefined unit configured of one or more second processing units. It may be a block unit of another size.
- the search range An inter prediction mode that refers to an outer pixel may be excluded, one mode may be selected from the inter prediction mode after the exclusion and the intra prediction mode, and the encoding process may be performed using the selected mode.
- pixels outside the search range are further required in another process related to predicted image generation applied other than the motion compensation process in the inter prediction mode to be selected.
- Inter prediction mode may be excluded.
- the predicted image may be generated without performing the other processing.
- the search range using information including a processed processed picture, the size of a search area in the processed picture, and the center position shift amount of the search area in the processed picture May be set.
- the size of the search area may be switched according to the number of processed reference pictures.
- the size of the search area may be set such that the sum of the search areas in the referenceable processed picture is less than or equal to a specific value.
- the upper limit of the number of processable pictures that can be referred to and the size of the search area or the total sum of the search areas is defined in association with the profile value or the level value, and the profile assigned to the target stream
- the number of referable processed pictures and the size of the search area may be set according to the value or the level value so as to be a value equal to or less than the upper limit value.
- information indicating that the inter prediction mode requiring the pixels outside the search range is not selected in all the second processing units included in the first processing unit is a sequence header area, a picture header area, It may be encoded in the slice header area or the side information area.
- the decoding device may be switched whether to exclude the inter prediction mode that refers to the pixels outside the search range.
- whether to exclude an inter prediction mode that refers to a pixel outside the search range may be switched according to a profile value or a level value assigned to a target stream.
- whether to exclude an inter prediction mode that refers to a pixel outside the search range may be switched according to the size of the target picture.
- the center position shift amount of the search area may be a shift amount between the position of the target first processing unit in the target picture and the position of the search area in the processed picture to be referred to.
- the center position shift amount of the search area may be derived for each first processing unit.
- the center position shift amount of the search area is derived using the motion vector assigned to the second processing unit included in the processed first processing unit located in the spatial or temporal periphery of the target first processing unit. You may
- the processed first processing unit may be a processed first processing unit other than the first processing unit in which the processing order is immediately before the target first processing unit.
- a value common to all the first processing units included in the target picture or target slice is set, and the information for specifying the common value is a picture. It may be encoded in the header area or slice header area.
- the common value may be set to a value at which the shift of the center position is zero.
- the common value may be derived using statistics of a plurality of motion vectors derived in a plurality of second processing units included in the processed picture.
- transfer of reference pixel data of the search range set for the target first processing unit is started from the memory storing image data of a processed picture.
- the processing of the target first processing unit may be started after the transfer is completed.
- reference pixel data of the search range set for the target first processing unit reference pixel data of an area overlapping the search range set for the already processed first processing unit
- the reference pixel data may be transferred from the memory.
- reference to pixels outside the search range is restricted with respect to the second processing unit using the FRUC mode, and pixels within the search range
- the encoding process may be performed with reference to FIG.
- candidate motion vectors with reference to pixels outside the search range are excluded from evaluation targets from a plurality of candidate motion vectors derived from motion vectors of processed blocks, and candidate motion vectors after exclusion are excluded. Cost evaluation.
- a candidate motion vector requiring a pixel outside the search range is further excluded from the evaluation target in another process related to prediction image generation applied after performing the FRUC process.
- the FRUC mode there is another process related to predicted image generation applied after performing the FRUC process and there is the other process requiring a pixel outside the search range.
- the predicted image may be generated without processing.
- the setting of the search range includes a reference index for specifying a processed picture that can be referred to, the size of a search area in the reference index, and the shift amount of the center position of the search area in the reference index. Information may be used to set the search range.
- the size of the search area may be switched according to the total number of reference indexes.
- the size of the search area may be set such that the sum of the search areas in the reference index is less than or equal to a specific value.
- the upper limit value of the total number of reference indexes and the size of the search area or the total sum of the search areas is defined in association with the profile value or the level value, and is defined as the profile value or the level value assigned to the target stream Accordingly, the total number of reference indexes and the size of the search area may be set so as to be a value equal to or less than the upper limit value.
- a plurality of reference indexes may be associated with one referenceable processed picture.
- the reference index for specifying the referenceable processed picture and the information for specifying the size of the search area are encoded in the sequence header area, the picture header area, the slice header area or the auxiliary information area Good.
- the total number of reference indexes and the size of the search area may be switched according to the processing capability of the decoding device.
- the total number of reference indexes and the size of the search area may be switched according to a profile value or a level value assigned to a target stream.
- the total number of reference indexes and the size of the search area may be switched according to the size of the target picture.
- One method may be switched for each target picture.
- information for specifying which of the two methods is used may be encoded in the picture header area or slice header area.
- a decoding device includes a circuit and a memory, and the circuit uses the memory to set a search range commonly used in the first processing unit, and the first processing unit. For the second processing unit using inter prediction among the plurality of second processing units included in, the reference of the pixels outside the search range is restricted, and the decoding process is performed using the pixels within the search range.
- the processing time related to data transfer can be suppressed and the amount of processing can be reduced.
- the first processing unit may be a block unit configured of one or more second processing units, which is a basic division unit of a picture, or a predefined unit configured of one or more second processing units. It may be a block unit of another size.
- the search range using information including a processed processed picture, the size of a search area in the processed picture, and the center position shift amount of the search area in the processed picture May be set.
- the size of the search area may be switched according to the number of processed reference pictures.
- the size of the search area may be set such that the sum of the search areas in the referenceable processed picture is less than or equal to a specific value.
- the upper limit of the number of processable pictures that can be referred to and the size of the search area or the total sum of the search areas is defined in association with the profile value or the level value, and the profile assigned to the target stream
- the number of referable processed pictures and the size of the search area may be set according to the value or the level value so as to be a value equal to or less than the upper limit value.
- information indicating that the inter prediction mode requiring the pixels outside the search range is not selected in all the second processing units included in the first processing unit is a sequence header area, a picture header area, It may be decoded from the slice header area or the side information area.
- the center position shift amount of the search area may be a shift amount between the position of the target first processing unit in the target picture and the position of the search area in the processed picture to be referred to.
- the center position shift amount of the search area may be derived for each first processing unit.
- the center position shift amount of the search area is derived using the motion vector assigned to the second processing unit included in the processed first processing unit located in the spatial or temporal periphery of the target first processing unit. You may
- the processed first processing unit may be a processed first processing unit other than the first processing unit in which the processing order is immediately before the target first processing unit.
- a common value is set to all the first processing units included in the target picture or the target slice, and the information for specifying the common value is a picture
- the common value may be identified by decoding from the header area or slice header area.
- transfer of reference pixel data of the search range set for the target first processing unit is started from the memory storing image data of a processed picture.
- the processing of the target first processing unit may be started after the transfer is completed.
- reference pixel data of the search range set for the target first processing unit reference pixel data of an area overlapping the search range set for the already processed first processing unit
- the reference pixel data may be transferred from the memory.
- reference to pixels outside the search range is restricted with respect to the second processing unit using the FRUC mode, and Decoding processing may be performed using pixels.
- candidate motion vectors with reference to pixels outside the search range are excluded from evaluation targets from a plurality of candidate motion vectors derived from motion vectors of processed blocks, and candidate motion vectors after exclusion are excluded. Cost evaluation.
- a candidate motion vector requiring a pixel outside the search range is further excluded from the evaluation target in another process related to prediction image generation applied after performing the FRUC process.
- the FRUC mode there is another process related to predicted image generation applied after performing the FRUC process and there is the other process requiring a pixel outside the search range.
- the predicted image may be generated without processing.
- the setting of the search range includes a reference index for specifying a processed picture that can be referred to, the size of a search area in the reference index, and the shift amount of the center position of the search area in the reference index. Information may be used to set the search range.
- the size of the search area may be switched according to the total number of reference indexes.
- the size of the search area may be set such that the sum of the search areas in the reference index is less than or equal to a specific value.
- the upper limit value of the total number of reference indexes and the size of the search area or the total sum of the search areas is defined in association with the profile value or the level value, and is defined as the profile value or the level value assigned to the target stream Accordingly, the total number of reference indexes and the size of the search area may be set so as to be a value equal to or less than the upper limit value.
- the reference index for specifying the referenceable processed picture and the information for specifying the size of the search area are decoded from the sequence header area, the picture header area, the slice header area or the auxiliary information area, A reference index and the size of the search area may be specified.
- One method may be switched for each target picture.
- information for specifying which of the two methods is to be used may be decoded from the picture header area or the slice header area, and it may be specified which of the two methods is to be used.
- the encoding method sets a search range to be commonly used in the first processing unit, and uses inter prediction among the one or more second processing units included in the first processing unit. For two processing units, reference to pixels outside the search range is restricted, and coding processing is performed with reference to pixels in the search range.
- the processing time related to data transfer can be suppressed and the amount of processing can be reduced.
- the decoding method sets a search range to be commonly used in the first processing unit, and a second processing unit using inter prediction among the plurality of second processing units included in the first processing unit.
- the reference of pixels outside the search range is restricted, and the decoding process is performed using the pixels within the search range.
- the processing time related to data transfer can be suppressed and the amount of processing can be reduced.
- these general or specific aspects may be realized by a system, an apparatus, a method, an integrated circuit, a computer program, or a non-transitory recording medium such as a computer readable CD-ROM, and the system
- the present invention may be realized as any combination of an apparatus, a method, an integrated circuit, a computer program, and a storage medium.
- Embodiment 1 First, an outline of the first embodiment will be described as an example of an encoding apparatus and a decoding apparatus to which the process and / or the configuration described in each aspect of the present disclosure described later can be applied.
- Embodiment 1 is merely an example of an encoding apparatus and a decoding apparatus to which the process and / or the configuration described in each aspect of the present disclosure can be applied, and the processing and / or the process described in each aspect of the present disclosure
- the configuration can also be implemented in a coding apparatus and a decoding apparatus that are different from the first embodiment.
- the encoding apparatus or the decoding apparatus according to the first embodiment corresponds to the constituent elements described in each aspect of the present disclosure among a plurality of constituent elements that configure the encoding apparatus or the decoding apparatus.
- Replacing a component with a component described in each aspect of the present disclosure (2) A plurality of configurations constituting the encoding device or the decoding device with respect to the encoding device or the decoding device of the first embodiment
- Addition of processing to the method performed by the encoding apparatus or the decoding apparatus of the first embodiment, and / or a plurality of processes included in the method home Replacing a process corresponding to the process described in each aspect of the present disclosure with the process described in each aspect of the present disclosure after replacing some of the processes and arbitrary changes such as deletion.
- the component described in each aspect of the present disclosure is a component of a part of the plurality of components constituting the encoding apparatus or the decoding apparatus of the first aspect Implementing in combination with a component having a part of the functions to be provided or a component performing a part of the process performed by the component described in each aspect of the present disclosure (5)
- the encoding apparatus according to the first embodiment Or a component having a part of functions provided by a part of a plurality of components constituting the decoding apparatus, or a plurality of components constituting the coding apparatus or the decoding apparatus of the first embodiment
- Part of A component performing a part of the process performed by the component is a component described in each aspect of the present disclosure, a component provided with a part of the function of the component described in each aspect of the present disclosure, or the present Implementing in combination with a component that performs part of the processing performed by the components described in each aspect of the disclosure (6)
- the manner of implementation of the processing and / or configuration described in each aspect of the present disclosure is not limited to the above example.
- it may be implemented in an apparatus used for a purpose different from the moving picture / image coding apparatus or the moving picture / image decoding apparatus disclosed in the first embodiment, or the process and / or the process described in each aspect.
- the configuration may be implemented alone.
- the processes and / or configurations described in the different embodiments may be implemented in combination.
- FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration of coding apparatus 100 according to the first embodiment.
- the encoding device 100 is a moving image / image coding device that encodes a moving image / image in units of blocks.
- the encoding apparatus 100 is an apparatus for encoding an image in units of blocks, and includes a dividing unit 102, a subtracting unit 104, a converting unit 106, a quantizing unit 108, and entropy coding.
- Unit 110 inverse quantization unit 112, inverse transformation unit 114, addition unit 116, block memory 118, loop filter unit 120, frame memory 122, intra prediction unit 124, inter prediction unit 126, And a prediction control unit 128.
- the encoding device 100 is realized by, for example, a general-purpose processor and a memory.
- the processor controls the division unit 102, the subtraction unit 104, the conversion unit 106, the quantization unit 108, the entropy coding unit 110, and the dequantization unit 112.
- the inverse transform unit 114, the addition unit 116, the loop filter unit 120, the intra prediction unit 124, the inter prediction unit 126, and the prediction control unit 128 function.
- coding apparatus 100 includes division section 102, subtraction section 104, conversion section 106, quantization section 108, entropy coding section 110, inverse quantization section 112, inverse conversion section 114, addition section 116, and loop filter section 120. , And may be realized as one or more dedicated electronic circuits corresponding to the intra prediction unit 124, the inter prediction unit 126, and the prediction control unit 128.
- the dividing unit 102 divides each picture included in the input moving image into a plurality of blocks, and outputs each block to the subtracting unit 104.
- the division unit 102 first divides a picture into blocks of a fixed size (for example, 128 ⁇ 128).
- This fixed size block may be referred to as a coding tree unit (CTU).
- the dividing unit 102 divides each of fixed size blocks into blocks of variable size (for example, 64 ⁇ 64 or less) based on recursive quadtree and / or binary tree block division.
- This variable sized block may be referred to as a coding unit (CU), a prediction unit (PU) or a transform unit (TU).
- CUs, PUs, and TUs need not be distinguished, and some or all of the blocks in a picture may be processing units of CUs, PUs, and TUs.
- FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example of block division in the first embodiment.
- solid lines represent block boundaries by quadtree block division
- broken lines represent block boundaries by binary tree block division.
- the block 10 is a square block (128 ⁇ 128 block) of 128 ⁇ 128 pixels.
- the 128x128 block 10 is first divided into four square 64x64 blocks (quadtree block division).
- the upper left 64x64 block is further vertically divided into two rectangular 32x64 blocks, and the left 32x64 block is further vertically divided into two rectangular 16x64 blocks (binary block division). As a result, the upper left 64x64 block is divided into two 16x64 blocks 11, 12 and a 32x64 block 13.
- the upper right 64x64 block is divided horizontally into two rectangular 64x32 blocks 14 and 15 (binary block division).
- the lower left 64x64 block is divided into four square 32x32 blocks (quadtree block division). Of the four 32x32 blocks, the upper left block and the lower right block are further divided.
- the upper left 32x32 block is vertically divided into two rectangular 16x32 blocks, and the right 16x32 block is further horizontally split into two 16x16 blocks (binary block division).
- the lower right 32x32 block is divided horizontally into two 32x16 blocks (binary block division).
- the lower left 64x64 block is divided into a 16x32 block 16, two 16x16 blocks 17, 18, two 32x32 blocks 19, 20, and two 32x16 blocks 21, 22.
- the lower right 64x64 block 23 is not divided.
- the block 10 is divided into thirteen variable sized blocks 11 to 23 based on recursive quadtree and binary tree block division. Such division is sometimes called quad-tree plus binary tree (QTBT) division.
- QTBT quad-tree plus binary tree
- one block is divided into four or two blocks (quadtree or binary tree block division) in FIG. 2, the division is not limited to this.
- one block may be divided into three blocks (tri-tree block division).
- a partition including such a ternary tree block partition may be referred to as a multi type tree (MBT) partition.
- MBT multi type tree
- the subtracting unit 104 subtracts a prediction signal (prediction sample) from an original signal (original sample) in block units divided by the dividing unit 102. That is, the subtraction unit 104 calculates a prediction error (also referred to as a residual) of the encoding target block (hereinafter, referred to as a current block). Then, the subtracting unit 104 outputs the calculated prediction error to the converting unit 106.
- the original signal is an input signal of the coding apparatus 100, and is a signal (for example, a luminance (luma) signal and two color difference (chroma) signals) representing an image of each picture constituting a moving image.
- a signal representing an image may also be referred to as a sample.
- Transform section 106 transforms the prediction error in the spatial domain into a transform coefficient in the frequency domain, and outputs the transform coefficient to quantization section 108.
- the transform unit 106 performs, for example, discrete cosine transform (DCT) or discrete sine transform (DST) determined in advance on the prediction error in the spatial domain.
- DCT discrete cosine transform
- DST discrete sine transform
- Transform section 106 adaptively selects a transform type from among a plurality of transform types, and transforms the prediction error into transform coefficients using a transform basis function corresponding to the selected transform type. You may Such transformation may be referred to as explicit multiple core transform (EMT) or adaptive multiple transform (AMT).
- EMT explicit multiple core transform
- AMT adaptive multiple transform
- the plurality of transformation types include, for example, DCT-II, DCT-V, DCT-VIII, DST-I and DST-VII.
- FIG. 3 is a table showing transform basis functions corresponding to each transform type. In FIG. 3, N indicates the number of input pixels. The choice of transform type from among these multiple transform types may depend, for example, on the type of prediction (intra-prediction and inter-prediction) or depending on the intra-prediction mode.
- Information indicating whether to apply such EMT or AMT (for example, called an AMT flag) and information indicating the selected conversion type are signaled at CU level. Note that the signaling of these pieces of information need not be limited to the CU level, but may be at other levels (eg, sequence level, picture level, slice level, tile level or CTU level).
- the conversion unit 106 may re-convert the conversion coefficient (conversion result). Such reconversion may be referred to as adaptive secondary transform (AST) or non-separable secondary transform (NSST).
- AST adaptive secondary transform
- NSST non-separable secondary transform
- the transform unit 106 performs retransformation for each sub block (for example, 4 ⁇ 4 sub blocks) included in the block of transform coefficients corresponding to the intra prediction error.
- the information indicating whether to apply the NSST and the information on the transformation matrix used for the NSST are signaled at the CU level. Note that the signaling of these pieces of information need not be limited to the CU level, but may be at other levels (eg, sequence level, picture level, slice level, tile level or CTU level).
- Separable conversion is a method in which conversion is performed multiple times by separating in each direction as many as the number of dimensions of the input, and Non-Separable conversion is two or more when the input is multidimensional. This is a method of collectively converting the dimensions of 1 and 2 into one dimension.
- Non-Separable conversion if the input is a 4 ⁇ 4 block, it is regarded as one array having 16 elements, and 16 ⁇ 16 conversion is performed on the array There is one that performs transformation processing with a matrix.
- the quantization unit 108 quantizes the transform coefficient output from the transform unit 106. Specifically, the quantization unit 108 scans the transform coefficient of the current block in a predetermined scan order, and quantizes the transform coefficient based on the quantization parameter (QP) corresponding to the scanned transform coefficient. Then, the quantization unit 108 outputs the quantized transform coefficient of the current block (hereinafter, referred to as a quantization coefficient) to the entropy coding unit 110 and the inverse quantization unit 112.
- QP quantization parameter
- the predetermined order is an order for quantization / inverse quantization of transform coefficients.
- the predetermined scan order is defined in ascending order (low frequency to high frequency) or descending order (high frequency to low frequency) of the frequency.
- the quantization parameter is a parameter that defines a quantization step (quantization width). For example, if the value of the quantization parameter increases, the quantization step also increases. That is, as the value of the quantization parameter increases, the quantization error increases.
- the entropy coding unit 110 generates a coded signal (coded bit stream) by subjecting the quantization coefficient input from the quantization unit 108 to variable-length coding. Specifically, for example, the entropy coding unit 110 binarizes the quantization coefficient and performs arithmetic coding on the binary signal.
- the inverse quantization unit 112 inversely quantizes the quantization coefficient which is the input from the quantization unit 108. Specifically, the inverse quantization unit 112 inversely quantizes the quantization coefficient of the current block in a predetermined scan order. Then, the inverse quantization unit 112 outputs the inverse quantized transform coefficient of the current block to the inverse transform unit 114.
- the inverse transform unit 114 restores the prediction error by inversely transforming the transform coefficient which is the input from the inverse quantization unit 112. Specifically, the inverse transform unit 114 restores the prediction error of the current block by performing inverse transform corresponding to the transform by the transform unit 106 on the transform coefficient. Then, the inverse conversion unit 114 outputs the restored prediction error to the addition unit 116.
- the restored prediction error does not match the prediction error calculated by the subtracting unit 104 because the information is lost due to quantization. That is, the restored prediction error includes the quantization error.
- the addition unit 116 reconstructs the current block by adding the prediction error, which is the input from the inverse conversion unit 114, and the prediction sample, which is the input from the prediction control unit 128. Then, the addition unit 116 outputs the reconstructed block to the block memory 118 and the loop filter unit 120. Reconstruction blocks may also be referred to as local decoding blocks.
- the block memory 118 is a storage unit for storing a block in an encoding target picture (hereinafter referred to as a current picture) which is a block referred to in intra prediction. Specifically, the block memory 118 stores the reconstructed block output from the adding unit 116.
- the loop filter unit 120 applies a loop filter to the block reconstructed by the adding unit 116, and outputs the filtered reconstructed block to the frame memory 122.
- the loop filter is a filter (in-loop filter) used in the coding loop, and includes, for example, a deblocking filter (DF), a sample adaptive offset (SAO), an adaptive loop filter (ALF) and the like.
- a least squares error filter is applied to remove coding distortion, for example, multiple 2x2 subblocks in the current block, based on local gradient direction and activity.
- One filter selected from the filters is applied.
- subblocks for example, 2x2 subblocks
- a plurality of classes for example, 15 or 25 classes.
- the direction value D of the gradient is derived, for example, by comparing gradients in a plurality of directions (for example, horizontal, vertical and two diagonal directions).
- the gradient activation value A is derived, for example, by adding gradients in a plurality of directions and quantizing the addition result.
- a filter for the subblock is determined among the plurality of filters.
- FIGS. 4A to 4C are diagrams showing a plurality of examples of filter shapes used in ALF.
- FIG. 4A shows a 5 ⁇ 5 diamond shaped filter
- FIG. 4B shows a 7 ⁇ 7 diamond shaped filter
- FIG. 4C shows a 9 ⁇ 9 diamond shaped filter.
- Information indicating the shape of the filter is signaled at the picture level. Note that the signaling of the information indicating the shape of the filter does not have to be limited to the picture level, and may be another level (for example, sequence level, slice level, tile level, CTU level or CU level).
- the on / off of the ALF is determined, for example, at the picture level or the CU level. For example, as to luminance, it is determined whether to apply ALF at the CU level, and as to color difference, it is determined whether to apply ALF at the picture level.
- Information indicating on / off of ALF is signaled at picture level or CU level. Note that the signaling of the information indicating ALF on / off need not be limited to the picture level or CU level, and may be other levels (eg, sequence level, slice level, tile level or CTU level) Good.
- the set of coefficients of the plurality of selectable filters (eg, up to 15 or 25 filters) is signaled at the picture level.
- the signaling of the coefficient set need not be limited to the picture level, but may be other levels (eg, sequence level, slice level, tile level, CTU level, CU level or sub-block level).
- the frame memory 122 is a storage unit for storing a reference picture used for inter prediction, and may be referred to as a frame buffer. Specifically, the frame memory 122 stores the reconstructed block filtered by the loop filter unit 120.
- the intra prediction unit 124 generates a prediction signal (intra prediction signal) by performing intra prediction (also referred to as in-screen prediction) of the current block with reference to a block in the current picture stored in the block memory 118. Specifically, the intra prediction unit 124 generates an intra prediction signal by performing intra prediction with reference to samples (for example, luminance value, color difference value) of a block adjacent to the current block, and performs prediction control on the intra prediction signal. Output to the part 128.
- intra prediction signal intra prediction signal
- intra prediction also referred to as in-screen prediction
- the intra prediction unit 124 performs intra prediction using one of a plurality of predefined intra prediction modes.
- the plurality of intra prediction modes include one or more non-directional prediction modes and a plurality of directional prediction modes.
- Non-directional prediction modes are described in, for example, H.264. It includes Planar prediction mode and DC prediction mode defined in H.265 / High-Efficiency Video Coding (HEVC) standard (Non-Patent Document 1).
- Planar prediction mode and DC prediction mode defined in H.265 / High-Efficiency Video Coding (HEVC) standard (Non-Patent Document 1).
- HEVC High-Efficiency Video Coding
- the plurality of directionality prediction modes are, for example, H.264. It includes 33 directional prediction modes defined by the H.265 / HEVC standard. In addition to the 33 directions, the plurality of directionality prediction modes may further include 32 direction prediction modes (a total of 65 directionality prediction modes).
- FIG. 5A is a diagram showing 67 intra prediction modes (2 non-directional prediction modes and 65 directional prediction modes) in intra prediction. Solid arrows indicate H. A broken line arrow represents the added 32 directions, which represents the 33 directions defined in the H.265 / HEVC standard.
- a luminance block may be referred to in intra prediction of a chrominance block. That is, the chrominance component of the current block may be predicted based on the luminance component of the current block.
- Such intra prediction may be referred to as cross-component linear model (CCLM) prediction.
- the intra prediction mode (for example, referred to as a CCLM mode) of a chrominance block referencing such a luminance block may be added as one of the intra prediction modes of the chrominance block.
- the intra prediction unit 124 may correct the pixel value after intra prediction based on the gradient of the reference pixel in the horizontal / vertical directions. Intra prediction with such correction is sometimes called position dependent intra prediction combination (PDPC). Information indicating the presence or absence of application of PDPC (for example, called a PDPC flag) is signaled, for example, at CU level. Note that the signaling of this information need not be limited to the CU level, but may be at other levels (eg, sequence level, picture level, slice level, tile level or CTU level).
- the inter prediction unit 126 performs inter prediction (also referred to as inter-frame prediction) of a current block with reference to a reference picture that is a reference picture stored in the frame memory 122 and that is different from the current picture. Generate a prediction signal). Inter prediction is performed in units of a current block or sub blocks (for example, 4 ⁇ 4 blocks) in the current block. For example, the inter prediction unit 126 performs motion estimation on the current block or sub block in the reference picture. Then, the inter prediction unit 126 generates an inter prediction signal of the current block or sub block by performing motion compensation using motion information (for example, a motion vector) obtained by the motion search. Then, the inter prediction unit 126 outputs the generated inter prediction signal to the prediction control unit 128.
- inter prediction also referred to as inter-frame prediction
- a motion vector predictor may be used to signal the motion vector. That is, the difference between the motion vector and the predicted motion vector may be signaled.
- the inter prediction signal may be generated using not only the motion information of the current block obtained by the motion search but also the motion information of the adjacent block. Specifically, the inter prediction signal is generated in units of sub blocks in the current block by weighting and adding a prediction signal based on motion information obtained by motion search and a prediction signal based on motion information of an adjacent block. It may be done.
- Such inter prediction (motion compensation) may be called OBMC (overlapped block motion compensation).
- OBMC block size information indicating the size of sub-blocks for OBMC
- OBMC flag information indicating whether or not to apply the OBMC mode
- FIG. 5B and FIG. 5C are a flowchart and a conceptual diagram for explaining an outline of predicted image correction processing by OBMC processing.
- a predicted image (Pred) by normal motion compensation is acquired using the motion vector (MV) assigned to the encoding target block.
- the motion vector (MV_L) of the encoded left adjacent block is applied to the current block to obtain a predicted image (Pred_L), and the predicted image and Pred_L are weighted and superimposed. Perform the first correction of the image.
- the motion vector (MV_U) of the encoded upper adjacent block is applied to the coding target block to obtain a predicted image (Pred_U), and the predicted image subjected to the first correction and the Pred_U are weighted.
- a second correction of the predicted image is performed by adding and superposing, and this is made a final predicted image.
- the right adjacent block and the lower adjacent block may be used to perform correction more than two steps. It is possible.
- the area to be superimposed may not be the pixel area of the entire block, but only a partial area near the block boundary.
- the processing target block may be a prediction block unit or a sub block unit obtained by further dividing the prediction block.
- obmc_flag is a signal indicating whether to apply the OBMC process.
- the encoding apparatus it is determined whether the encoding target block belongs to a complex area of motion, and if it belongs to a complex area of motion, the value 1 is set as obmc_flag. The encoding is performed by applying the OBMC processing, and when not belonging to the complex region of motion, the value 0 is set as the obmc_flag and the encoding is performed without applying the OBMC processing.
- the decoding apparatus decodes the obmc_flag described in the stream, and switches whether to apply the OBMC process according to the value to perform decoding.
- the motion information may be derived on the decoding device side without being signalized.
- the merge mode defined in the H.265 / HEVC standard may be used.
- motion information may be derived by performing motion search on the decoding device side. In this case, motion search is performed without using the pixel value of the current block.
- the mode in which motion estimation is performed on the side of the decoding apparatus may be referred to as a pattern matched motion vector derivation (PMMVD) mode or a frame rate up-conversion (FRUC) mode.
- PMMVD pattern matched motion vector derivation
- FRUC frame rate up-conversion
- FIG. 5D An example of the FRUC process is shown in FIG. 5D.
- a plurality of candidate lists (which may be common to the merge list) each having a predicted motion vector are generated Be done.
- the best candidate MV is selected from among the plurality of candidate MVs registered in the candidate list. For example, an evaluation value of each candidate included in the candidate list is calculated, and one candidate is selected based on the evaluation value.
- a motion vector for the current block is derived based on the selected candidate motion vector.
- the selected candidate motion vector (best candidate MV) is derived as it is as the motion vector for the current block.
- a motion vector for the current block may be derived by performing pattern matching in a peripheral region of a position in the reference picture corresponding to the selected candidate motion vector. That is, the search is performed on the area around the best candidate MV by the same method, and if there is an MV for which the evaluation value is good, the best candidate MV is updated to the MV and the current block is updated. It may be used as the final MV. In addition, it is also possible to set it as the structure which does not implement the said process.
- first pattern matching or second pattern matching is used as pattern matching.
- the first pattern matching and the second pattern matching may be referred to as bilateral matching and template matching, respectively.
- pattern matching is performed between two blocks in two different reference pictures, which are along the motion trajectory of the current block. Therefore, in the first pattern matching, a region in another reference picture along the motion trajectory of the current block is used as the predetermined region for calculation of the evaluation value of the candidate described above.
- FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining an example of pattern matching (bilateral matching) between two blocks along a motion trajectory.
- First pattern matching among pairs of two blocks in two reference pictures (Ref0, Ref1) which are two blocks along the motion trajectory of the current block (Cur block), Two motion vectors (MV0, MV1) are derived by searching for the most matching pair. Specifically, for the current block, a reconstructed image at a designated position in the first encoded reference picture (Ref 0) designated by the candidate MV, and a symmetric MV obtained by scaling the candidate MV at a display time interval.
- the difference with the reconstructed image at the specified position in the second coded reference picture (Ref 1) specified in step is derived, and the evaluation value is calculated using the obtained difference value.
- the candidate MV with the best evaluation value among the plurality of candidate MVs may be selected as the final MV.
- motion vectors (MV0, MV1) pointing to two reference blocks are the temporal distance between the current picture (Cur Pic) and the two reference pictures (Ref0, Ref1) It is proportional to (TD0, TD1).
- the mirror symmetric bi-directional motion vector Is derived when the current picture is temporally located between two reference pictures, and the temporal distances from the current picture to the two reference pictures are equal, in the first pattern matching, the mirror symmetric bi-directional motion vector Is derived.
- pattern matching is performed between a template in the current picture (a block adjacent to the current block in the current picture (eg, upper and / or left adjacent blocks)) and a block in the reference picture. Therefore, in the second pattern matching, a block adjacent to the current block in the current picture is used as the predetermined area for calculating the evaluation value of the candidate described above.
- FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of pattern matching (template matching) between a template in a current picture and a block in a reference picture.
- the current block (Cur Pic) is searched for in the reference picture (Ref 0) for a block that most closely matches a block adjacent to the current block (Cur block).
- Motion vectors are derived.
- the reconstructed image of the left adjacent region and / or the upper adjacent encoded region and the encoded reference picture (Ref 0) specified by the candidate MV are equivalent to each other.
- the evaluation value is calculated using the obtained difference value, and the candidate MV having the best evaluation value among the plurality of candidate MVs is selected as the best candidate MV Good.
- a FRUC flag Information indicating whether to apply such a FRUC mode (for example, called a FRUC flag) is signaled at the CU level.
- a signal for example, called a FRUC mode flag
- a method of pattern matching for example, first pattern matching or second pattern matching
- the signaling of these pieces of information need not be limited to the CU level, but may be at other levels (eg, sequence level, picture level, slice level, tile level, CTU level or subblock level) .
- This mode is sometimes referred to as a bi-directional optical flow (BIO) mode.
- BIO bi-directional optical flow
- FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining a model assuming uniform linear motion.
- (v x , v y ) indicate velocity vectors
- ⁇ 0 and ⁇ 1 indicate the time between the current picture (Cur Pic) and two reference pictures (Ref 0 and Ref 1 ), respectively.
- (MVx 0 , MVy 0 ) indicates a motion vector corresponding to the reference picture Ref 0
- (MVx 1 , MVy 1 ) indicates a motion vector corresponding to the reference picture Ref 1 .
- the optical flow equation is: (i) the time derivative of the luminance value, (ii) the product of the horizontal velocity and the horizontal component of the spatial gradient of the reference image, and (iii) the vertical velocity and the spatial gradient of the reference image Indicates that the product of the vertical components of and the sum of is equal to zero.
- a motion vector in units of blocks obtained from a merge list or the like is corrected in units of pixels.
- This mode is sometimes referred to as affine motion compensation prediction mode.
- FIG. 9A is a diagram for describing derivation of a motion vector in units of sub blocks based on motion vectors of a plurality of adjacent blocks.
- the current block includes sixteen 4 ⁇ 4 subblocks.
- the motion vector v 0 of the upper left corner control point of the current block is derived based on the motion vector of the adjacent block
- the motion vector v 1 of the upper right corner control point of the current block is derived based on the motion vector of the adjacent subblock Be done.
- the motion vector (v x , v y ) of each sub block in the current block is derived according to the following equation (2).
- x and y indicate the horizontal position and the vertical position of the sub block, respectively, and w indicates a predetermined weighting factor.
- the derivation method of the motion vector of the upper left and upper right control points may include several different modes.
- Information indicating such an affine motion compensation prediction mode (for example, called an affine flag) is signaled at the CU level. Note that the signaling of the information indicating this affine motion compensation prediction mode need not be limited to the CU level, and other levels (eg, sequence level, picture level, slice level, tile level, CTU level or subblock level) ) May be.
- the prediction control unit 128 selects one of the intra prediction signal and the inter prediction signal, and outputs the selected signal as a prediction signal to the subtraction unit 104 and the addition unit 116.
- FIG. 9B is a diagram for describing an overview of motion vector derivation processing in the merge mode.
- a predicted MV list in which candidates for predicted MV are registered is generated.
- the prediction MV candidate the position of the coding target block in the coded reference picture, which is the MV of the plurality of coded blocks located in the spatial periphery of the coding target block, is projected
- Temporally adjacent prediction MV which is an MV possessed by a nearby block
- joint prediction MV which is an MV generated by combining spatially adjacent prediction MV and MVs of temporally adjacent prediction MV, and zero prediction MV whose value is MV, etc.
- one prediction MV is selected from among the plurality of prediction MVs registered in the prediction MV list, and it is determined as the MV of the current block.
- merge_idx which is a signal indicating which prediction MV has been selected, is described in the stream and encoded.
- the prediction MVs registered in the prediction MV list described in FIG. 9B are an example, and the number is different from the number in the drawing, or the configuration does not include some types of the prediction MV in the drawing, It may have a configuration in which prediction MVs other than the type of prediction MV in the drawing are added.
- the final MV may be determined by performing the DMVR process described later using the MV of the coding target block derived in the merge mode.
- FIG. 9C is a conceptual diagram for describing an overview of DMVR processing.
- a first reference picture which is a processed picture in the L0 direction and a second reference picture which is a processed picture in the L1 direction To generate a template by averaging each reference pixel.
- the regions around candidate MVs of the first reference picture and the second reference picture are respectively searched, and the MV with the lowest cost is determined as the final MV.
- the cost value is calculated using the difference value between each pixel value of the template and each pixel value of the search area, the MV value, and the like.
- the outline of the process described here is basically common to the encoding apparatus and the decoding apparatus.
- FIG. 9D is a diagram for describing an outline of a predicted image generation method using luminance correction processing by LIC processing.
- an MV for obtaining a reference image corresponding to a current block to be coded is derived from a reference picture which is a coded picture.
- a predicted image for a block to be encoded is generated.
- the shape of the peripheral reference area in FIG. 9D is an example, and other shapes may be used.
- a predicted image is generated from a plurality of reference pictures, and is similar to the reference image acquired from each reference picture. After performing luminance correction processing by a method, a predicted image is generated.
- lic_flag is a signal indicating whether to apply the LIC process.
- the encoding apparatus it is determined whether or not the encoding target block belongs to the area in which the luminance change occurs, and when it belongs to the area in which the luminance change occurs, as lic_flag A value of 1 is set and encoding is performed by applying LIC processing, and when not belonging to an area where a luminance change occurs, a value of 0 is set as lic_flag and encoding is performed without applying the LIC processing.
- the decoding apparatus decodes lic_flag described in the stream to switch whether to apply the LIC processing according to the value and performs decoding.
- determining whether to apply the LIC process for example, there is also a method of determining according to whether or not the LIC process is applied to the peripheral block.
- a method of determining according to whether or not the LIC process is applied to the peripheral block For example, when the encoding target block is in merge mode, whether or not the surrounding encoded blocks selected in the derivation of the MV in merge mode processing are encoded by applying LIC processing According to the result, whether to apply the LIC process is switched to perform encoding. In the case of this example, the processing in the decoding is completely the same.
- FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration of decoding apparatus 200 according to Embodiment 1.
- the decoding device 200 is a moving image / image decoding device that decodes a moving image / image in units of blocks.
- the decoding apparatus 200 includes an entropy decoding unit 202, an inverse quantization unit 204, an inverse conversion unit 206, an addition unit 208, a block memory 210, a loop filter unit 212, and a frame memory 214. , An intra prediction unit 216, an inter prediction unit 218, and a prediction control unit 220.
- the decoding device 200 is realized by, for example, a general-purpose processor and a memory. In this case, when the processor executes the software program stored in the memory, the processor determines whether the entropy decoding unit 202, the inverse quantization unit 204, the inverse conversion unit 206, the addition unit 208, the loop filter unit 212, the intra prediction unit 216 functions as an inter prediction unit 218 and a prediction control unit 220.
- the decoding apparatus 200 is a dedicated unit corresponding to the entropy decoding unit 202, the inverse quantization unit 204, the inverse conversion unit 206, the addition unit 208, the loop filter unit 212, the intra prediction unit 216, the inter prediction unit 218, and the prediction control unit 220. And one or more electronic circuits.
- the entropy decoding unit 202 entropy decodes the coded bit stream. Specifically, the entropy decoding unit 202 performs arithmetic decoding, for example, from a coded bit stream to a binary signal. Then, the entropy decoding unit 202 debinarizes the binary signal. Thereby, the entropy decoding unit 202 outputs the quantization coefficient to the dequantization unit 204 in block units.
- the inverse quantization unit 204 inversely quantizes the quantization coefficient of the block to be decoded (hereinafter referred to as a current block), which is an input from the entropy decoding unit 202. Specifically, the dequantization part 204 dequantizes the said quantization coefficient about each of the quantization coefficient of a current block based on the quantization parameter corresponding to the said quantization coefficient. Then, the dequantization unit 204 outputs the dequantized quantization coefficient (that is, transform coefficient) of the current block to the inverse transformation unit 206.
- a current block which is an input from the entropy decoding unit 202.
- the dequantization part 204 dequantizes the said quantization coefficient about each of the quantization coefficient of a current block based on the quantization parameter corresponding to the said quantization coefficient. Then, the dequantization unit 204 outputs the dequantized quantization coefficient (that is, transform coefficient) of the current block to the inverse transformation unit 206.
- the inverse transform unit 206 restores the prediction error by inversely transforming the transform coefficient that is the input from the inverse quantization unit 204.
- the inverse transform unit 206 determines the current block based on the deciphered transformation type information. Inverse transform coefficients of
- the inverse transform unit 206 applies inverse retransformation to the transform coefficients.
- the addition unit 208 adds the prediction error, which is the input from the inverse conversion unit 206, and the prediction sample, which is the input from the prediction control unit 220, to reconstruct the current block. Then, the adding unit 208 outputs the reconstructed block to the block memory 210 and the loop filter unit 212.
- the block memory 210 is a storage unit for storing a block within a picture to be decoded (hereinafter referred to as a current picture) which is a block referred to in intra prediction. Specifically, the block memory 210 stores the reconstructed block output from the adding unit 208.
- the loop filter unit 212 applies a loop filter to the block reconstructed by the adding unit 208, and outputs the filtered reconstructed block to the frame memory 214 and a display device or the like.
- one filter is selected from the plurality of filters based on the local gradient direction and activity, The selected filter is applied to the reconstruction block.
- the frame memory 214 is a storage unit for storing a reference picture used for inter prediction, and may be referred to as a frame buffer. Specifically, the frame memory 214 stores the reconstructed block filtered by the loop filter unit 212.
- the intra prediction unit 216 refers to a block in the current picture stored in the block memory 210 to perform intra prediction based on the intra prediction mode read from the coded bit stream, thereby generating a prediction signal (intra prediction Signal). Specifically, the intra prediction unit 216 generates an intra prediction signal by performing intra prediction with reference to samples (for example, luminance value, color difference value) of a block adjacent to the current block, and performs prediction control on the intra prediction signal. Output to unit 220.
- the intra prediction unit 216 may predict the chrominance component of the current block based on the luminance component of the current block. .
- the intra prediction unit 216 corrects the pixel value after intra prediction based on the gradient of reference pixels in the horizontal / vertical directions.
- the inter prediction unit 218 predicts the current block with reference to the reference picture stored in the frame memory 214.
- the prediction is performed in units of the current block or subblocks (for example, 4 ⁇ 4 blocks) in the current block.
- the inter prediction unit 218 generates an inter prediction signal of the current block or sub block by performing motion compensation using motion information (for example, a motion vector) read from the coded bit stream, and generates an inter prediction signal. It is output to the prediction control unit 220.
- the inter prediction unit 218 determines not only the motion information of the current block obtained by the motion search but also the motion information of the adjacent block. Use to generate an inter prediction signal.
- the inter prediction unit 218 is configured to follow the method of pattern matching deciphered from the coded stream (bilateral matching or template matching). Motion information is derived by performing motion search. Then, the inter prediction unit 218 performs motion compensation using the derived motion information.
- the inter prediction unit 218 derives a motion vector based on a model assuming uniform linear motion. Also, in the case where the information deciphered from the coded bit stream indicates that the affine motion compensation prediction mode is applied, the inter prediction unit 218 performs motion vectors in units of sub blocks based on motion vectors of a plurality of adjacent blocks. Derive
- the prediction control unit 220 selects one of the intra prediction signal and the inter prediction signal, and outputs the selected signal to the addition unit 208 as a prediction signal.
- FIG. 11 is a flowchart of a first example of inter prediction processing in the encoding device 100.
- the operation of the inter prediction unit 126 included in the coding apparatus 100 will be mainly described below, the operation of the inter prediction unit 218 included in the decoding apparatus 200 is also the same.
- the inter prediction unit 126 selects, from a plurality of modes (FRUC mode, normal mode, merge mode, etc.), an inter prediction mode to be used for a target block which is a block to be encoded or to be decoded.
- the inter prediction unit 126 derives a motion vector (MV) using the selected inter prediction mode.
- the inter prediction unit 126 When a mode other than FRUC is selected, the inter prediction unit 126 derives a motion vector, and encodes information on the derived motion vector into a stream. The inter prediction unit 126 generates a predicted image by performing motion compensation using the derived motion vector.
- the inter prediction unit 126 searches for the image of the processed area without encoding the information on the motion vector into the stream using the method described with reference to FIGS. 6 and 7. To derive motion vectors.
- the inter prediction unit 126 first determines, for each CTU that is a basic division unit of a picture, a search range for limiting the range of the processed region to be referred to in the derivation of the motion vector of FRUC processing. (S201).
- the inter prediction unit 126 performs inter prediction processing using the FRUC mode or another mode for each CU that is a processing basic unit belonging to the CTU.
- the inter prediction unit 126 When the FRUC mode is used (Yes in S202), the inter prediction unit 126 first refers to the motion vector of the processed CU around the target CU that is the CU to be encoded or decoded and refers to the candidate motion vector list. It generates (S203).
- the inter prediction unit 126 excludes, from among the plurality of candidate motion vectors registered in the candidate motion vector list, candidate motion vectors that reference the outside of the search range determined in step S201 (S204).
- the inter prediction unit 126 refers to the processed region using the template matching scheme or the bilateral matching scheme for each of the remaining candidate motion vectors excluded among the plurality of candidate motion vectors registered in the candidate motion vector list. And evaluate the cost. Then, the inter prediction unit 126 selects a candidate motion vector with the smallest cost (S205). Furthermore, the inter prediction unit 126 searches for a peripheral region of the selected candidate motion vector to derive a final motion vector (S206).
- the inter prediction unit 126 generates a predicted image by performing motion compensation using the derived motion vector (S207).
- the region necessary for the reference is limited to the region within the search range. Therefore, it is possible to limit the amount of access to the memory storing the image of the processed area. Furthermore, since the number of candidate motion vectors to be evaluated is reduced, the amount of processing can be suppressed.
- the inter prediction unit 126 derives a motion vector according to the inter prediction mode, and encodes information on the derived motion vector into a stream (S208). ). Next, the inter prediction unit 126 generates a prediction image by performing motion compensation using the derived motion vector (S209).
- the inter prediction unit 126 determines the search range in CTU units, but may not be in CTU units, and for example, determines the search range in units of collecting a plurality of CUs It is also good.
- process flow illustrated in FIG. 11 is an example, and a part of the processes described may be removed or a process not described may be added.
- inter prediction processing in the decoding device 200 is also basically the same as the processing flow described here, with the difference between encoding a signal necessary for processing into a stream or decoding from a stream.
- FIG. 12 is a diagram for describing a process of excluding a candidate motion vector that refers to the outside of the search range from the evaluation target in step S204 described with reference to FIG.
- the target CTU which is a CTU to be encoded or to be decoded is composed of three CUs CU0, CU1, and CU2.
- CU0 and CU2 are processed in FRUC mode, and CU1 is processed in modes other than FRUC.
- CU0 has CU0_MV0 and CU0_MV1 as candidate motion vectors in the FRUC mode.
- CU0_MV0 is set as an evaluation target in order to refer to the search range.
- CU0_MV1 is excluded from the evaluation targets because it refers to the outside of the search range.
- CU2 has CU2_MV0 and CU2_MV1 as candidate motion vectors in the FRUC mode.
- CU2_MV0 is set as an evaluation target to refer to the search range.
- CU2_MV1 is excluded from the evaluation targets because it refers to the outside of the search range.
- a mode other than FRUC is used for CU1
- a prediction image is generated using the reference area indicated by CU1_MV0 regardless of the above-described restriction processing. That is, when a mode other than FRUC is used, candidate motion vectors that reference the outside of the search range are used.
- the inter prediction unit 126 uses the pixels within the search range as the FRUC even if the number of candidate motion vectors is large. It can process. Therefore, it is possible to limit the amount of access to the memory storing the image of the processed area. Furthermore, since the number of candidate motion vectors to be evaluated is reduced, the amount of processing can be suppressed.
- the inter prediction unit 126 determines whether or not the block position itself indicated by each candidate motion vector falls within the search range, as a method of determining whether each candidate motion vector of FRUC is within the search range. Not only the block position indicated by the candidate motion vector but also one or more regions used in the inter prediction process (FRUC process) may be determined within the search range.
- the one or more regions used for inter prediction processing are the peripheral region necessary for template matching, the application region of filter taps necessary for pixel acquisition of motion vector positions of decimal pixels, and cost optimum It is an area or the like for a peripheral search to be performed after selecting candidate motion vectors that become.
- the one or more areas may include a reference area that is required in other processes (MC process, BIO process, OBMC process, etc.) related to the predicted image generation after performing the FRUC process.
- the inter prediction unit 126 may generate a prediction image without performing the other processing.
- processing described here is common to the inter prediction processing in the encoding device 100 and the inter prediction processing in the decoding device 200.
- FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the search range determined in step S201 described with reference to FIG.
- the inter prediction unit 126 determines the search range from information including the reference pictures that can be referred to, the size (vertical width ⁇ horizontal width) of the search area in each reference picture, and the center position of the search area in each reference picture. .
- referenceable reference pictures are reference picture 1 and reference picture 2
- the vertical width of the search area in reference picture 1 is height1
- horizontal width is width1
- the center position is center1.
- the vertical width of the search area in the reference picture 2 is height2
- the horizontal width is width2
- the center position is center2.
- the size of the search area may be designated for each reference picture.
- the search area of reference picture 2 that is temporally far from the target picture that is the picture to be encoded or decoded is made larger than the search area of reference picture 1 that is temporally close to the target picture. It is possible to improve the followability to a moving area in which the variation increases with the lapse of time.
- the size of the search area may be designated as a common size for all reference pictures. This eliminates the need to encode information on the size of the search area for each reference picture, thereby making it possible to suppress the code amount related to the search range information.
- the size of the search area may be switched and designated in accordance with the number of reference pictures that can be referred to.
- the number of reference pictures that can be referred to is small, it is possible to search a wider range by enlarging the search area.
- the number of reference pictures that can be referred to is large, the amount of access to the memory can be suppressed by reducing the search area.
- Information on the number of referable reference pictures and the upper limit of the size of the search area, or information on the upper limit of the sum of sizes of the search areas in all reference pictures is a stream to be encoded or decoded.
- the encoding apparatus 100 defines the number of reference pictures and the size of the search area or the sum of the sizes of the search areas to be less than or equal to the specified upper limit.
- the size of the search area may be set to For example, at a level assuming a decoding apparatus with low processing power, the upper limit of the sum of the sizes of the search areas is defined as a small value. This makes it possible to guarantee that the decoder can decode the stream even at a low memory transfer rate.
- the center position is indicated by how much the position of the search area in each reference picture is shifted with respect to the position of the target CTU in the target picture.
- the center position is specified based on the center position of the target CTU, but the center position may be specified based on, for example, the upper left position.
- FIG. 14 is a diagram for describing a method of deriving the center position shift amount of the search area described in FIG. 13 for each target CTU.
- the inter prediction unit 126 is configured such that a processed CTU (upper-CTU) adjacent to the upper side with respect to the target CTU, a processed CTU (left-CTU) adjacent to the left with respect to the target CTU, and a processed picture.
- a processed CTU Upper-CTU
- a processed CTU left-CTU
- a processed picture Referring to the processed CTU (Col-CTU) at the same position as the target CTU in, and using the motion vector values of the CUs belonging to each processed CTU, the center position shift amount of the search area of the target CTU is derived There is.
- the inter prediction unit 126 calculates an average value of motion vectors of all CUs belonging to the processed CTU to be referred to as a center position shift amount.
- the inter prediction unit 126 derives an average motion vector value for each processed CTU to be referenced, selects one of a plurality of derived average motion vector values, and uses the selected average motion vector value as a center position shift amount calculate.
- the inter prediction unit 126 determines a motion vector of a CU that refers to the target reference picture among the CUs belonging to the processed CTU.
- the center position shift amount may be derived using
- the inter prediction unit 126 locally moves the information without encoding the information on the center position in the stream by deriving the center position shift amount with reference to the processed CTUs in the periphery for each target CTU. It is possible to specify an optimal search area even for images of different types. This makes it possible to improve coding performance without increasing the code amount.
- FIG. 14 illustrates an example of deriving the center position shift amount with reference to three processed CTUs, Upper-CTU, Left-CTU, and Col-CTU
- the processed CTU to be referred is limited to this. Absent.
- the inter prediction unit 126 may use any one or two of the three processed CTUs described above, or may use a processed CTU other than the three processed CTUs.
- the inter prediction unit 126 may derive the center position shift amount without referring to the Left-CTU whose processing order is immediately before the target CTU. This enables the inter prediction unit 126 to start memory transfer of reference pixels in the search area for the target CTU without waiting for the completion of the process of deriving motion vectors of the respective CUs belonging to the Left-CTU. . This makes it possible to shorten the waiting time for the completion of memory transfer.
- processing described here is common to both the inter prediction processing in the encoding device 100 and the inter prediction processing in the decoding device 200.
- the encoding apparatus 100 may directly determine the center position shift amount of the target CTU without referring to the processed CTUs in the periphery, and encode information on the center position for each target CTU in the stream. As a result, although the code amount is increased, a more accurate search area can be specified, which makes it possible to improve the coding performance. In addition, since the decoding apparatus 200 can directly acquire information about the center position of each target CTU from the stream, the processing can be simplified.
- FIG. 15 is a diagram for describing a method of deriving the center position shift amount of the search area described in FIG. 13 as a value common to all CTUs in the target picture.
- the inter prediction unit 126 derives a common center position shift amount for all CTUs in the target picture, with reference to the motion vector of the entire processed picture.
- the inter prediction unit 126 aggregates statistics of motion vectors of a plurality of CUs of processed pictures, and estimates motion vectors of the entire target picture using the aggregated statistics. Then, the inter prediction unit 126 sets the estimated motion vector value to each CTU as the center position shift amount. For example, the inter prediction unit 126 uses, as a statistic, an average motion vector derived from motion vectors of all CUs in the processed picture. Thus, the inter prediction unit 126 can derive the center position shift amount using the average motion vector as it is as the estimated motion vector value of the entire target picture. Alternatively, the inter prediction unit 126 classifies motion vectors of the processed picture into a plurality of classes as statistics and uses an average motion vector derived for each class.
- the inter prediction unit 126 can select an optimal one from among the plurality of derived average motion vectors, and can use the selected average motion vector as an estimated motion vector value of the entire target picture. Therefore, the inter prediction unit 126 can derive an optimal center position shift amount.
- the inter prediction unit 126 scales the estimated motion vector value of the entire target picture according to the time distance to the reference picture.
- the center position shift amount may be derived using the above value.
- the inter prediction unit 126 may select an optimal average motion vector for each reference picture from a plurality of average motion vectors obtained for each class, and derive the center position shift amount using the selected average motion vector. .
- the inter prediction unit 126 may derive a central position shift amount common to all CTUs in the target picture, and encode information on the central position into a stream on a picture basis. Therefore, it becomes possible to specify the center position without increasing the code amount. In addition, since the process of deriving the center position on a CTU basis is unnecessary, the center position can be specified without increasing the amount of processing.
- FIG. 15 illustrates an example in which a motion position is estimated for the entire picture and a common center position shift amount is derived for all CTUs in the target picture
- the inter prediction unit 126 has a plurality of pictures.
- a motion vector may be estimated for each slice divided into regions, and a common center position shift amount may be derived for all CTUs in the target slice.
- FIG. 15 illustrates an example in which the center position shift amount is derived using the information of the motion vector of the processed picture
- the inter prediction unit 126 is not the object of the motion picture of the processed picture.
- the motion of the entire target picture may be directly estimated using the input image of the picture, and the center position shift amount may be derived using the estimated motion.
- it is possible to estimate the motion vector of the entire target picture more accurately although the amount of processing is increased.
- the value 0 (the same position as the target CTU) may always be used as the center position shift amount.
- the inter prediction unit 126 can derive the center position without performing any processing. Furthermore, the inter prediction unit 126 can perform processing without stream encoding information on the center position.
- the process described here is a process in the inter prediction process in the encoding apparatus 100, but the decoding apparatus 200 acquires information on the center position by decoding the stream generated by the described process.
- FIGS. 16A and 16B are diagrams for explaining the data transfer method from the memory storing the image of the processed area in the first example of the inter prediction processing in encoding apparatus 100.
- transfer of reference pixels in the search range for reference in the FRUC mode and transfer of reference pixels for reference in the modes other than FRUC are necessary.
- the transfer of the reference pixel in the search range for reference in the FRUC mode is completed before the processing of the target CTU starts, and the reference pixel for reference in a mode other than FRUC.
- the transfer is performed when the motion vector of each CU belonging to the target CTU is determined.
- the center position shift amount necessary to determine the search range for CTU1 is derived using the motion vector of CTU0 immediately before in processing order.
- the case of deriving the center position shift amount using the Left-CTU motion vector described in FIG. 14 corresponds to this.
- transfer of reference pixels in the search range for CTU1 is started when the motion vectors of all the CUs belonging to CTU0 are determined. As a result, the transfer process may not be completed before the CTU0 process is completed, and the CTU1 process may be kept waiting.
- the latency can be small, but otherwise the latency will be large and the There is a possibility that the processing of the target picture can not be completed within the required processing time.
- the center position shift amount necessary to determine the search range for CTU1 is derived without using the motion vector of CTU0 immediately before in the processing order.
- the center position shift amount is derived without using the motion vector of CTU0 immediately before in the processing order.
- the center position shift amount is derived without using the motion vector of CTU0 immediately before in the processing order.
- transfer processing can be started at an early point. As a result, the transfer process can be completed before the CTU 0 process is completed, so that the CTU 1 process can be started without waiting time.
- the data transfer method of the inter prediction process in the decoding device 200 is basically the same.
- FIGS. 17A to 17C are diagrams for describing a pixel region which requires data transfer in transfer of reference pixels in a search range for CTU 1 described in the example shown in FIG.
- FIG. 17A shows an example in the case of transferring all pixel areas of the search range of CTU1.
- all pixel areas in the search range of CTU1 indicated by oblique lines are always transferred regardless of the pixel area transferred by CTU processed prior to CTU1, the transfer amount increases.
- the required transfer amount is always constant, and control can be performed without considering pixel areas transferred by other CTUs, control related to data transfer can be simplified.
- FIG. 17B shows an example in the case of transferring only a part of pixel regions in the search range of CTU1.
- a pixel area indicated by hatching not transferred by the CTU processed earlier than CTU1 is transferred.
- the required transfer amount can be reduced as compared with the example of FIG. 17A.
- control related to data transfer may be complicated.
- FIG. 17C shows another example in the case of transferring only a part of pixel areas in the search range of CTU1.
- the transfer method assuming that the central position shift amount of the search range is different for each CTU has been described, but in the example of FIG. 17C, the central position shift amount of the search range of each CTU is common Is assumed.
- the case where the central position shift amount common to all the CTUs in the target picture described in FIG. 15 is derived corresponds to this.
- the center position shift amount of the search range of each CTU is the same, whenever the target CTU advances one direction to the right, the pixel region indicated by the diagonal line corresponding to the CTU width at the right end of the search range is transferred.
- the required transfer amount can be reduced as compared to the example of FIG. 17A.
- control related to data transfer can be simplified.
- the encoding apparatus 100 can refer to a reference header that can be referred to for determining the search range described in FIG. 13 and information on the size of the search area in each reference picture, the sequence header area of the target stream, the picture header area, The slice header area or the side information area may be encoded, and the decoding apparatus 200 may decode the above information from those areas.
- the encoding apparatus 100 may switch the number of reference pictures that can be referred to and the size of the search area according to the processing capability of the decoding apparatus 200 at the transmission destination of the stream. For example, when the processing capability of the decoding device 200 is high, the encoding device 100 sets a wide search range because the decoding device 200 can perform many processes in a fixed processing time, and the processing capability of the decoding device 200 If it is low, the decoding apparatus 200 may set a narrow search range because it can not perform many processes in a fixed processing time.
- the encoding apparatus 100 may switch the number of reference pictures that can be referred to and the size of the search area according to the profile or level information assigned to the target stream. For example, the encoding apparatus 100 sets a wide search range at a profile and a level assuming sufficient processing power of the decoding apparatus 200, and sets a narrow search range at a profile and a level assuming the processing capacity of the insufficient decoding apparatus 200. You may
- the encoding apparatus 100 may switch the number of reference pictures that can be referred to and the size of the search area according to the size of the target picture. For example, when the picture size is small, the encoding apparatus 100 sets a wide search range because the number of blocks to be processed is small and the processing time has a margin, and when the picture size is large, the number of blocks to be processed is large.
- a narrow search range may be set because there is no room for Or, conversely, if the picture size is small, the encoding apparatus 100 sets a narrow search range to suppress excessive variation of motion vectors, and if the picture size is large, it can search a wider range.
- a wide search range may be set.
- the referenceable reference pictures encoded in the stream and the information on the size of the search area in each reference picture may not be signals of information strictly indicating them, and may be coded as signals having other meanings. It may be For example, by directly associating the information with the profile and the level, the decoding device 200 can specify the information using a signal indicating the profile and the level.
- the search area is defined for each reference picture, but instead of the reference picture, the search area for each reference index
- the coding apparatus 100 uses the first method of deriving the center position shift amount of the search area described in FIG. 14 for each target CTU, and the center position shift amount of the search area described in FIG.
- a second method of deriving a value common to all CTUs may be switched on a picture basis.
- the encoding apparatus 100 uses the first method when there are mixed regions that perform different movements in the screen, and in the case of a picture that performs the same movement in all the regions in the screen. Use the second method. This makes it possible to specify an appropriate search area without reducing the coding efficiency.
- the encoding apparatus 100 encodes information indicating which of the first method and the second method is to be used in the picture header area, slice header area or auxiliary information area, and the decoding apparatus 200 The above information may be decoded and acquired from those areas.
- FIG. 18 is a flowchart of a second example of inter prediction processing in the encoding device 100. The process shown in FIG. 18 is different from the process of the first example shown in FIG. 11 in that step S210 is added.
- the coding apparatus 100 excludes candidate motion vectors of the FRUC process that refers to the outside of the search range determined in step S201 from the evaluation targets, in the FRUC mode (S204).
- the encoding apparatus 100 excludes a mode that refers to the outside of the search range determined in step S201 even in modes other than FRUC (S210).
- the inter prediction mode that refers to the pixels within the search range can be used.
- the references by all the CUs belonging to the target CTU are limited to the area within the search range, it is possible to further limit the access amount to the memory storing the image of the processed area.
- the encoding device 100 determines the search range in CTU units, it may not be in CTU units, and for example, the search range is determined in units of collecting a plurality of CUs It is also good.
- process flow illustrated in FIG. 18 is an example, and part of the processes described may be removed or processes not described may be added.
- the decoding device 200 decodes the stream generated by the above-described processing, whereby the decoding processing is performed without using the inter prediction mode that refers to the outside of the search range automatically. It will be.
- FIG. 19 is a diagram for describing a process of excluding a candidate motion vector of FRUC which refers to the outside of the search range and modes other than FRUC in steps S204 and S210 described in FIG. 18 from evaluation targets.
- the difference from the processing in the first example described in FIG. 12 is that in CU1 where modes other than FRUC are used, the use of the mode in CU1 is prohibited because the area indicated by CU1_MV0 is out of the search range It is. As a result, the encoding apparatus 100 processes CU1 using an inter prediction mode or an intra prediction mode other than the mode.
- the encoding apparatus 100 only determines whether the block position itself indicated by the motion vector is within the search range, as a method of determining whether the motion vector in any mode other than FRUC is within the search range.
- Search range for both the block position indicated by the motion vector and the reference area required for other processing related to predicted image generation (ME processing, MC processing, BIO processing, OBMC processing, LIC processing, DMVR processing, etc.) It may be determined whether or not it is stored inside.
- encoding is performed when the reference region required for processing is out of the search range
- the apparatus 100 may generate a prediction image without performing the other processing.
- the decoding device 200 decodes the stream generated by the above-described processing, whereby the decoding processing is performed without using the inter prediction mode that refers to the outside of the search range automatically. It will be.
- the coding apparatus 100 excludes a motion vector indicating an area outside the search range in the inter prediction mode from the evaluation target, and performs prediction processing in the inter prediction mode using the motion vector indicating the area within the search range. You may go.
- FIG. 20A and FIG. 20B are diagrams for explaining the data transfer method from the memory storing the image of the processed area in the second example of the inter prediction processing in encoding apparatus 100.
- the data transfer method shown in FIGS. 20A and 20B is different from the data transfer method in the first example described in FIGS. 16A and 16B in that the transfer of reference pixels for reference in modes other than FRUC is lost. Is different.
- the data transfer method of the inter prediction process in the decoding device 200 is basically the same.
- the encoding apparatus 100 may use information indicating whether the stream has been encoded excluding the inter prediction mode that refers to the outside of the search range.
- the decoding apparatus 200 may encode the sequence header area, the picture header area, the slice header area, or the auxiliary information area, and decode and acquire the information from those areas.
- the encoding apparatus 100 may switch whether to exclude the inter prediction mode according to the processing capability of the decoding apparatus 200 at the transmission destination of the stream. For example, when the processing capability of the decoding device 200 is high, the encoding device 100 performs encoding without excluding the inter prediction mode because the decoding device 200 can perform many processes in a fixed processing time, and performs decoding When the processing capability of the apparatus 200 is low, the decoding apparatus 200 may perform coding without the inter prediction mode because it can not perform many processes in a fixed processing time.
- the coding apparatus 100 may switch whether to exclude the inter prediction mode according to the profile or level information assigned to the target stream. For example, the encoding apparatus 100 performs encoding without excluding the inter prediction mode in profiles and levels assuming sufficient processing capacity of the decoding apparatus 200, and profiles and levels assuming insufficient processing capacity of the decoding apparatus 200. Then, coding may be performed excluding the inter prediction mode.
- the coding apparatus 100 may switch whether to exclude the inter prediction mode according to the size of the target picture. For example, when the picture size is small, the coding apparatus 100 performs coding without excluding the inter prediction mode because the number of blocks to be processed is small and the processing time has a margin, and performs processing when the picture size is large. Since the number of blocks is large and the processing time is not enough, coding may be performed excluding the inter prediction mode. Or conversely, if the picture size is small, the coding apparatus 100 performs coding by excluding the inter prediction mode in order to suppress excessive variation of motion vectors, and if the picture size is large, the coding is wider. The coding may be performed without excluding the inter prediction mode so that the range can be searched.
- the information indicating whether the stream is encoded by excluding the inter prediction mode that refers to the outside of the search range, which is encoded into the stream is not a signal of information that indicates the stream strictly. And may be encoded as signals having other meanings.
- the decoding device 200 can specify the information using a signal indicating the profile and the level.
- the encoding apparatus 100 sets a search range to be commonly used in the first processing unit (for example, CTU) (S201), and one or more included in the first processing unit.
- the second processing unit using inter prediction among the second processing units (for example, CU), restrict reference to pixels outside the search range and perform encoding processing with reference to the pixels within the search range (S 204 or S210).
- the amount of access to the memory storing the image of the processed area can be limited, so that the processing time related to data transfer can be suppressed and the amount of processing can be reduced.
- the first processing unit may be a block unit configured of one or more second processing units, which is a basic division unit of a picture, or a predefined unit configured of one or more second processing units. It is a block unit of size.
- the coding apparatus 100 performs motion compensation processing using a motion vector assigned to an inter prediction mode to be selected among a plurality of inter prediction modes with respect to a target second processing unit included in the first processing unit. Then, the inter prediction mode that refers to the pixel outside the search range is excluded, one mode is selected from the inter prediction mode after the exclusion and the intra prediction mode, and the encoding process is performed using the selected mode.
- the coding apparatus 100 is further out of the search range in another process related to predicted image generation applied to other than the motion compensation process in the inter prediction mode to be selected. Exclude inter prediction modes that require pixels.
- the encoding apparatus 100 is another process related to predicted image generation applied other than the motion compensation process, and there is another process requiring pixels outside the search range. In this case, the predicted image is generated without performing other processing.
- the encoding apparatus 100 includes information including a processed picture that can be referred to, the size of the search area in the processed picture, and the center position shift amount of the search area in the processed picture. Use to set the search range.
- the encoding apparatus 100 switches the size of the search area according to the number of referable processed pictures.
- the encoding apparatus 100 sets the size of the search area such that the sum of the search areas in the referenceable processed pictures is equal to or less than a specific value.
- the encoding apparatus 100 defines the upper limit value of the number of processable pictures that can be referred to and the size of the search area or the total sum of the search areas in association with the profile value or the level value.
- the encoding apparatus 100 sets the number of referable processed pictures and the size of the search area so as to be a value equal to or less than the upper limit value according to the profile value or the level value assigned to the target stream.
- the sequence header area information indicating that the encoding apparatus 100 has not selected the inter prediction mode requiring pixels outside the search range in all the second processing units included in the first processing unit, It is encoded into a picture header area, a slice header area or a side information area.
- the coding apparatus 100 switches whether to exclude the inter prediction mode that refers to the pixels outside the search range, according to the processing capability of the decoding apparatus 200.
- the encoding apparatus 100 switches whether to exclude an inter prediction mode that refers to a pixel outside the search range, according to the profile value or the level value assigned to the target stream.
- the coding apparatus 100 switches whether to exclude an inter prediction mode that refers to a pixel outside the search range, according to the size of the target picture.
- the center position shift amount of the search area is a shift amount between the position of the target first processing unit in the target picture and the position of the search area in the processed picture to be referenced.
- the encoding apparatus 100 derives the center position shift amount of the search area for each first processing unit.
- the encoding apparatus 100 is a motion assigned to the second processing unit included in the processed first processing unit located in the spatial or temporal periphery of the target first processing unit for the center position shift amount of the search region. Derivate using a vector.
- the processed first processing unit is a processed first processing unit other than the first processing unit whose processing order is immediately before the target first processing unit.
- the encoding apparatus 100 sets a common value to all first processing units included in the target picture or target slice as the center position shift amount of the search area.
- Encoding apparatus 100 encodes information for specifying a common value into a picture header area or a slice header area.
- the encoding apparatus 100 sets the common value to a value at which the shift of the center position is zero.
- the encoding apparatus 100 derives a common value using statistics of a plurality of motion vectors derived in a plurality of second processing units included in a processed picture.
- the encoding device 100 refers to the reference pixel data of the search range set for the target first processing unit from the memory storing the image data of the processed picture.
- the transfer of the target first processing unit is started after the transfer is completed.
- the encoding apparatus 100 is set for the target first processing unit from the memory storing the image data of the processed picture without waiting for the processing of the first processing unit whose processing order is immediately before. Transfer of reference pixel data in the search range is started.
- the encoding device 100 overlaps the search range set for the already processed first processing unit.
- the reference pixel data is transferred from the memory except for the reference pixel data.
- the encoding device 100 restricts reference to pixels outside the search range for the second processing unit using the FRUC mode among the plurality of second processing units included in the first processing unit, and The encoding process is performed with reference to the pixel (S204).
- the encoding apparatus 100 excludes candidate motion vectors having a pixel outside the search range as a reference from the plurality of candidate motion vectors derived from the motion vector of the processed block from the evaluation target (S204) Cost evaluation is performed on the subsequent candidate motion vector (S205).
- the coding apparatus 100 further performs candidate processing that requires pixels outside the search range in other processing related to predicted image generation applied after performing the FRUC processing. Exclude vectors from evaluation.
- the encoding apparatus 100 is another process related to predicted image generation applied after performing the FRUC process in the FRUC mode, there is another process requiring pixels outside the search range, A predicted image is generated without performing any other processing.
- the encoding apparatus 100 uses a reference index for specifying a processed picture that can be referred to, the size of the search area in the reference index, and the center position of the search area in the reference index.
- the search range is set using information including the shift amount.
- the encoding apparatus 100 switches the size of the search area according to the total number of reference indexes.
- the encoding apparatus 100 sets the size of the search area such that the sum of the search areas in the reference index is equal to or less than a specific value.
- the encoding apparatus 100 defines the upper limit value of the total number of reference indexes and the size of the search area or the total sum of the search areas in association with the profile value or the level value.
- the encoding apparatus 100 sets the total number of reference indexes and the size of the search area so as to be a value less than or equal to the upper limit value, according to the profile value or level value assigned to the target stream.
- the encoding device 100 associates a plurality of reference indices with one referenceable processed picture.
- the coding apparatus 100 may set a reference index for specifying a referenceable processed picture and information for specifying the size of a search area in a sequence header area, a picture header area, a slice header area, or an auxiliary information area. Encode.
- the encoding device 100 switches the total number of reference indexes and the size of the search region according to the processing capability of the decoding device 200.
- the encoding apparatus 100 switches the total number of reference indexes and the size of the search area according to the profile value or the level value assigned to the target stream.
- the encoding apparatus 100 switches the total number of reference indexes and the size of the search area according to the size of the target picture.
- the encoding apparatus 100 sets a common value for all first processing units belonging to the target picture or target slice, and a method of deriving the center position shift amount of the search area for each first processing unit. The two methods, method and method, are switched for each target picture.
- the encoding apparatus 100 encodes information for specifying which of the two methods is to be used, in a picture header area or a slice header area.
- the decoding apparatus 200 sets a search range to be commonly used in the first processing unit (for example, CTU) (S201), and the plurality of second processing units included in the first processing unit.
- the second processing unit using inter prediction reference to pixels outside the search range is restricted, and decoding processing is performed using pixels within the search range (S204 or S210).
- the amount of access to the memory storing the image of the processed area can be limited, so that the processing time related to data transfer can be suppressed and the amount of processing can be reduced.
- the first processing unit may be a block unit configured of one or more second processing units, which is a basic division unit of a picture, or a predefined unit configured of one or more second processing units. It is a block unit of size.
- the decoding device 200 includes information including a processable reference picture, the size of the search area in the processed picture, and the center position shift amount of the search area in the processed picture. Use to set the search range.
- the decoding apparatus 200 switches the size of the search area in accordance with the number of referable processed pictures.
- the decoding device 200 sets the size of the search area such that the sum of the search areas in the referenceable processed pictures is equal to or less than a specific value.
- the decoding device 200 specifies the upper limit value of the number of processable pictures that can be referred to and the size of the search area, or the total of the search areas in association with the profile value or the level value.
- the decoding apparatus 200 sets the number of referable processed pictures and the size of the search area so that the value becomes equal to or less than the upper limit value according to the profile value or the level value assigned to the target stream.
- the information indicating that the decoding apparatus 200 has not selected the inter prediction mode requiring pixels outside the search range in all the second processing units included in the first processing unit is a sequence header area, a picture Decode from the header area, slice header area or auxiliary information area.
- the center position shift amount of the search area is a shift amount between the position of the target first processing unit in the target picture and the position of the search area in the processed picture to be referenced.
- the decoding device 200 derives the center position shift amount of the search area for each first processing unit.
- the decoding device 200 is a motion vector assigned to the second processing unit included in the processed first processing unit located in the spatial or temporal periphery of the target first processing unit, as the center position shift amount of the search area. It derives using.
- the processed first processing unit is a processed first processing unit other than the first processing unit whose processing order is immediately before the target first processing unit.
- a common value is set to all the first processing units included in the target picture or the target slice, and the decoding apparatus 200 is information for specifying the common value. Are decoded from the picture header area or slice header area to identify a common value.
- the decoding device 200 uses the memory storing the image data of the processed picture to set the reference pixel data of the search range set for the target first processing unit. The transfer is started, and after the transfer is completed, processing of the target first processing unit is started.
- the decoding apparatus 200 does not wait for the processing of the first processing unit whose processing order is immediately before, but the search set for the target first processing unit from the memory storing the image data of the processed picture. Start transferring range reference pixel data.
- the decoding apparatus 200 refers to a region overlapping the search range set for the already processed first processing unit among the reference pixel data of the search range set for the target first processing unit.
- the reference pixel data is transferred from the memory except for the pixel data.
- the decoding device 200 restricts reference to pixels outside the search range for the second processing unit using the FRUC mode among the one or more second processing units included in the first processing unit, and the search range Decoding processing is performed using the pixels in (S204).
- the decoding apparatus 200 excludes candidate motion vectors having a pixel outside the search range as a reference from the plurality of candidate motion vectors derived from the motion vector of the processed block from the evaluation target (S204).
- the cost evaluation is performed on the candidate motion vector of (S205).
- the decoding apparatus 200 further requires a pixel outside the search range in another process related to predicted image generation applied after performing the FRUC process. Exclude from the evaluation.
- the decoding apparatus 200 is another process related to predicted image generation applied after performing the FRUC process in the FRUC mode, and there is another process that requires a pixel outside the search range.
- the predicted image is generated without performing the processing of
- the decoding device 200 refers to a reference index for specifying a processed picture that can be referred to, the size of the search area in the reference index, and the center position shift of the search area in the reference index
- the search range is set using information including:
- the decoding device 200 switches the size of the search area according to the total number of reference indexes.
- the decoding device 200 sets the size of the search area such that the sum of the search areas in the reference index is less than or equal to a specific value.
- the decoding device 200 specifies the upper limit value of the total number of reference indexes and the size of the search area or the total of the search areas in association with the profile value or the level value.
- the decoding apparatus 200 sets the total number of reference indexes and the size of the search area so as to be a value less than or equal to the upper limit value, according to the profile value or level value assigned to the target stream.
- the decoding apparatus 200 decodes a reference index for specifying a referenceable processed picture and information for specifying the size of a search area from a sequence header area, a picture header area, a slice header area, or an auxiliary information area. And specify the size of the reference index and the search area.
- the decoding device 200 derives the center position shift amount of the search area for each first processing unit, and sets the common value to all the first processing units belonging to the target picture or the target slice. And switch the two methods for each target picture.
- the decoding apparatus 200 decodes information for specifying which of the two methods is to be used from the picture header area or the slice header area, and specifies which of the two methods is to be used.
- encoding apparatus 100 divides image into a plurality of blocks, and intra prediction unit 124 that predicts a block included in the image using a reference picture included in the image.
- An inter prediction unit 126 that predicts a block included in the image using a reference block included in another image different from the image; a loop filter unit 120 that applies a filter to the block included in the image;
- a conversion unit 106 that converts a prediction error between the prediction signal generated by the intra prediction unit 124 or the inter prediction unit 126 and the original signal to generate a conversion coefficient, and quantizes the conversion coefficient to generate a quantization coefficient Quantization unit 108, and entropy that generates a coded bit stream by variable-length coding the quantization coefficient.
- the inter prediction unit 126 sets a search range to be commonly used in the first processing unit (for example, CTU) (S201), and the inter prediction unit among the one or more second processing units (for example, CU) included in the first processing unit
- first processing unit for example, CTU
- second processing units for example, CU
- the decoding apparatus 200 decodes a coded bit stream and outputs a quantization coefficient (entropy decoding unit 202), and inversely quantizes the quantization coefficient to output a transform coefficient.
- An inter prediction unit 218 that predicts a block included in the image using a reference block included in another image different from the image; and a loop filter unit 212 that applies a filter to the block included in the image Prepare.
- the inter prediction unit 218 sets a search range to be commonly used in the first processing unit (for example, CTU) (S201), and the inter prediction unit among the one or more second processing units (for example, CU) included in the first processing unit
- first processing unit for example, CTU
- second processing units for example, CU
- FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing an implementation example of the coding apparatus 100 according to Embodiment 1.
- the coding apparatus 100 includes a circuit 160 and a memory 162.
- the components of the coding apparatus 100 shown in FIG. 1 are implemented by the circuit 160 and the memory 162 shown in FIG.
- the circuit 160 is a circuit that performs information processing and can access the memory 162.
- the circuit 160 is a dedicated or general-purpose electronic circuit that encodes a moving image.
- the circuit 160 may be a processor such as a CPU.
- the circuit 160 may also be an assembly of a plurality of electronic circuits.
- the circuit 160 may play a role of a plurality of components excluding the component for storing information among the plurality of components of the encoding device 100 illustrated in FIG. 1 and the like.
- the memory 162 is a dedicated or general-purpose memory in which information for the circuit 160 to encode moving pictures is stored.
- the memory 162 may be an electronic circuit or may be connected to the circuit 160.
- the memory 162 may also be included in the circuit 160.
- the memory 162 may be a collection of a plurality of electronic circuits.
- the memory 162 may be a magnetic disk or an optical disk, or may be expressed as a storage or a recording medium.
- the memory 162 may be a non-volatile memory or a volatile memory.
- the moving image to be encoded may be stored in the memory 162, or a bit string corresponding to the encoded moving image may be stored.
- the memory 162 may also store a program for the circuit 160 to encode a moving image.
- the memory 162 may play a role of a component for storing information among the plurality of components of the encoding device 100 illustrated in FIG. 1 and the like. Specifically, the memory 162 may play the role of the block memory 118 and the frame memory 122 shown in FIG. More specifically, the memory 162 may store reconstructed blocks, reconstructed pictures, and the like.
- all of the plurality of components shown in FIG. 1 and the like may not be mounted, or all of the plurality of processes described above may not be performed. Some of the plurality of components shown in FIG. 1 and the like may be included in another device, and some of the plurality of processes described above may be performed by another device. Then, in the encoding apparatus 100, part of the plurality of components shown in FIG. 1 and the like is implemented, and part of the plurality of processes described above is performed, whereby motion compensation is efficiently performed. It will be.
- FIG. 22 is a block diagram showing an implementation example of the decoding device 200 according to Embodiment 1.
- the decoding device 200 includes a circuit 260 and a memory 262.
- the plurality of components of the decoding apparatus 200 shown in FIG. 10 are implemented by the circuit 260 and the memory 262 shown in FIG.
- the circuit 260 is a circuit that performs information processing and can access the memory 262.
- the circuit 260 is a dedicated or general-purpose electronic circuit that decodes a moving image.
- the circuit 260 may be a processor such as a CPU.
- the circuit 260 may be a collection of a plurality of electronic circuits.
- the circuit 260 may play the role of a plurality of components excluding the component for storing information among the plurality of components of the decoding device 200 illustrated in FIG. 10 and the like.
- the memory 262 is a dedicated or general-purpose memory in which information for the circuit 260 to decode a moving image is stored.
- the memory 262 may be an electronic circuit or may be connected to the circuit 260. Also, the memory 262 may be included in the circuit 260. Further, the memory 262 may be a collection of a plurality of electronic circuits. Also, the memory 262 may be a magnetic disk or an optical disk, or may be expressed as a storage or a recording medium.
- the memory 262 may be either a non-volatile memory or a volatile memory.
- a bit string corresponding to a coded moving image may be stored, or a moving image corresponding to a decoded bit string may be stored.
- the memory 262 may store a program for the circuit 260 to decode a moving image.
- the memory 262 may play the role of a component for storing information among the plurality of components of the decoding device 200 illustrated in FIG. 10 and the like. Specifically, the memory 262 may play the role of the block memory 210 and the frame memory 214 shown in FIG. More specifically, the memory 262 may store reconstructed blocks, reconstructed pictures, and the like.
- all of the plurality of components shown in FIG. 10 and the like may not be mounted, or all of the plurality of processes described above may not be performed. Some of the plurality of components shown in FIG. 10 and the like may be included in another device, and some of the plurality of processes described above may be performed by another device. Then, in the decoding device 200, part of the plurality of components shown in FIG. 10 and the like is implemented, and part of the plurality of processes described above is performed, whereby motion compensation is efficiently performed. .
- coding apparatus 100 and decoding apparatus 200 in the present embodiment may be used as an image coding apparatus and an image decoding apparatus, respectively, and may be used as a moving image coding apparatus and a moving image decoding apparatus. Good.
- the encoding device 100 and the decoding device 200 may each be used as an inter prediction device (inter-screen prediction device).
- encoding apparatus 100 and decoding apparatus 200 may correspond to only inter prediction unit (inter-screen prediction unit) 126 and inter prediction unit (inter-screen prediction unit) 218, respectively. Then, other components such as the conversion unit 106 and the inverse conversion unit 206 may be included in other devices.
- each component may be configured by dedicated hardware or implemented by executing a software program suitable for each component.
- Each component may be realized by a program execution unit such as a CPU or a processor reading and executing a software program recorded on a recording medium such as a hard disk or a semiconductor memory.
- each of the encoding device 100 and the decoding device 200 includes a processing circuit (Processing Circuitry) and a storage device (Storage) electrically connected to the processing circuit and accessible to the processing circuit. You may have.
- processing circuitry may correspond to circuitry 160 or 260 and storage may correspond to memory 162 or 262.
- the processing circuit includes at least one of dedicated hardware and a program execution unit, and executes processing using a storage device.
- the storage device stores a software program executed by the program execution unit.
- software for realizing the encoding apparatus 100 or the decoding apparatus 200 of the present embodiment is a program as follows.
- each component may be a circuit as described above. These circuits may constitute one circuit as a whole or may be separate circuits. Each component may be realized by a general purpose processor or a dedicated processor.
- another component may execute the processing that a particular component performs. Further, the order of executing the processing may be changed, or a plurality of processing may be executed in parallel. Further, the coding and decoding apparatus may include the coding apparatus 100 and the decoding apparatus 200.
- the aspect of the encoding apparatus 100 and the decoding apparatus 200 was demonstrated based on embodiment, the aspect of the encoding apparatus 100 and the decoding apparatus 200 is not limited to this embodiment.
- the encoding apparatus 100 and the decoding apparatus 200 may be configured by combining various modifications in the present embodiment that may occur to those skilled in the art without departing from the spirit of the present disclosure, or by combining components in different embodiments. It may be included within the scope of the aspect of.
- This aspect may be practiced in combination with at least some of the other aspects in the present disclosure.
- part of the processing described in the flowchart of this aspect part of the configuration of the apparatus, part of the syntax, and the like may be implemented in combination with other aspects.
- each of the functional blocks can usually be realized by an MPU, a memory, and the like. Further, the processing by each of the functional blocks is usually realized by a program execution unit such as a processor reading and executing software (program) recorded in a recording medium such as a ROM.
- the software may be distributed by downloading or the like, or may be distributed by being recorded in a recording medium such as a semiconductor memory.
- each embodiment may be realized by centralized processing using a single device (system), or may be realized by distributed processing using a plurality of devices. Good.
- the processor that executes the program may be singular or plural. That is, centralized processing may be performed, or distributed processing may be performed.
- the system is characterized by having an image coding apparatus using an image coding method, an image decoding apparatus using an image decoding method, and an image coding / decoding apparatus provided with both.
- Other configurations in the system can be suitably modified as the case may be.
- FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an overall configuration of a content supply system ex100 for realizing content distribution service.
- the area for providing communication service is divided into desired sizes, and base stations ex106, ex107, ex108, ex109 and ex110, which are fixed wireless stations, are installed in each cell.
- each device such as a computer ex111, a game machine ex112, a camera ex113, a home appliance ex114, and a smartphone ex115 via the Internet service provider ex102 or the communication network ex104 and the base stations ex106 to ex110 on the Internet ex101 Is connected.
- the content supply system ex100 may connect any of the above-described elements in combination.
- the respective devices may be connected to each other directly or indirectly via a telephone network, near-field radio, etc., not via the base stations ex106 to ex110 which are fixed wireless stations.
- the streaming server ex103 is connected to each device such as the computer ex111, the game machine ex112, the camera ex113, the home appliance ex114, and the smartphone ex115 via the Internet ex101 or the like.
- the streaming server ex103 is connected to a terminal or the like in a hotspot in the aircraft ex117 via the satellite ex116.
- a radio access point or a hotspot may be used instead of base stations ex106 to ex110.
- the streaming server ex103 may be directly connected to the communication network ex104 without the internet ex101 or the internet service provider ex102, or may be directly connected with the airplane ex117 without the satellite ex116.
- the camera ex113 is a device capable of shooting a still image such as a digital camera and shooting a moving image.
- the smartphone ex115 is a smartphone, a mobile phone, a PHS (Personal Handyphone System), or the like compatible with a mobile communication system generally called 2G, 3G, 3.9G, 4G, and 5G in the future.
- the home appliance ex118 is a refrigerator or a device included in a home fuel cell cogeneration system.
- a terminal having a photographing function when a terminal having a photographing function is connected to the streaming server ex103 through the base station ex106 or the like, live distribution and the like become possible.
- a terminal (a computer ex111, a game machine ex112, a camera ex113, a home appliance ex114, a smartphone ex115, a terminal in an airplane ex117, etc.) transmits the still image or moving image content captured by the user using the terminal.
- the encoding process described in each embodiment is performed, and video data obtained by the encoding and sound data obtained by encoding a sound corresponding to the video are multiplexed, and the obtained data is transmitted to the streaming server ex103. That is, each terminal functions as an image coding apparatus according to an aspect of the present disclosure.
- the streaming server ex 103 streams the content data transmitted to the requested client.
- the client is a computer ex111, a game machine ex112, a camera ex113, a home appliance ex114, a smartphone ex115, a terminal in the airplane ex117 or the like capable of decoding the above-mentioned encoded data.
- Each device that receives the distributed data decrypts and reproduces the received data. That is, each device functions as an image decoding device according to an aspect of the present disclosure.
- the streaming server ex103 may be a plurality of servers or a plurality of computers, and may process, record, or distribute data in a distributed manner.
- the streaming server ex103 may be realized by a CDN (Contents Delivery Network), and content delivery may be realized by a network connecting a large number of edge servers distributed around the world and the edge servers.
- CDN Content Delivery Network
- content delivery may be realized by a network connecting a large number of edge servers distributed around the world and the edge servers.
- physically close edge servers are dynamically assigned according to clients. The delay can be reduced by caching and distributing the content to the edge server.
- processing is distributed among multiple edge servers, or the distribution subject is switched to another edge server, or a portion of the network where a failure has occurred. Since the delivery can be continued bypassing, high-speed and stable delivery can be realized.
- each terminal may perform encoding processing of captured data, or may perform processing on the server side, or may share processing with each other.
- a processing loop is performed twice.
- the first loop the complexity or code amount of the image in frame or scene units is detected.
- the second loop processing is performed to maintain the image quality and improve the coding efficiency.
- the terminal performs a first encoding process
- the server receiving the content performs a second encoding process, thereby improving the quality and efficiency of the content while reducing the processing load on each terminal. it can.
- the first encoded data made by the terminal can also be received and reproduced by another terminal, enabling more flexible real time delivery Become.
- the camera ex 113 or the like extracts a feature amount from an image, compresses data relating to the feature amount as metadata, and transmits the data to the server.
- the server performs compression according to the meaning of the image, for example, determining the importance of the object from the feature amount and switching the quantization accuracy.
- Feature amount data is particularly effective in improving the accuracy and efficiency of motion vector prediction at the time of second compression in the server.
- the terminal may perform simple coding such as VLC (variable length coding) and the server may perform coding with a large processing load such as CABAC (context adaptive binary arithmetic coding method).
- a plurality of video data in which substantially the same scenes are shot by a plurality of terminals.
- a unit of GOP Group of Picture
- a unit of picture or a tile into which a picture is divided, using a plurality of terminals for which photographing was performed and other terminals and servers which are not photographing as necessary.
- the encoding process is allocated in units, etc., and distributed processing is performed. This reduces delay and can realize more real time performance.
- the server may manage and / or instruct the video data captured by each terminal to be mutually referred to.
- the server may receive the encoded data from each terminal and change the reference relationship among a plurality of data, or may correct or replace the picture itself and re-encode it. This makes it possible to generate streams with enhanced quality and efficiency of each piece of data.
- the server may deliver the video data after performing transcoding for changing the coding method of the video data.
- the server may convert the encoding system of the MPEG system into the VP system, or the H.264 system. H.264. It may be converted to 265.
- the encoding process can be performed by the terminal or one or more servers. Therefore, in the following, although the description such as “server” or “terminal” is used as the subject of processing, part or all of the processing performed by the server may be performed by the terminal, or the processing performed by the terminal Some or all may be performed on the server. In addition, with regard to these, the same applies to the decoding process.
- the server not only encodes a two-dimensional moving image, but also automatically encodes a still image based on scene analysis of the moving image or at a time designated by the user and transmits it to the receiving terminal. It is also good. Furthermore, if the server can acquire relative positional relationship between the imaging terminals, the three-dimensional shape of the scene is not only determined based on the two-dimensional moving image but also the video of the same scene captured from different angles. Can be generated. Note that the server may separately encode three-dimensional data generated by a point cloud or the like, or an image to be transmitted to the receiving terminal based on a result of recognizing or tracking a person or an object using the three-dimensional data. Alternatively, it may be generated by selecting or reconfiguring from videos taken by a plurality of terminals.
- the user can enjoy the scene by arbitrarily selecting each video corresponding to each photographing terminal, or from the three-dimensional data reconstructed using a plurality of images or videos, the video of the arbitrary viewpoint You can also enjoy the extracted content.
- the sound may be picked up from a plurality of different angles as well as the video, and the server may multiplex the sound from a specific angle or space with the video and transmit it according to the video.
- the server may create viewpoint images for the right eye and for the left eye, respectively, and may perform coding to allow reference between each viewpoint video using Multi-View Coding (MVC) or the like. It may be encoded as another stream without reference. At the time of decoding of another stream, reproduction may be performed in synchronization with each other so that a virtual three-dimensional space is reproduced according to the viewpoint of the user.
- MVC Multi-View Coding
- the server superimposes virtual object information in the virtual space on camera information in the real space based on the three-dimensional position or the movement of the user's viewpoint.
- the decoding apparatus may acquire or hold virtual object information and three-dimensional data, generate a two-dimensional image according to the movement of the user's viewpoint, and create superimposed data by smoothly connecting.
- the decoding device transmits the motion of the user's viewpoint to the server in addition to the request for virtual object information, and the server creates superimposed data in accordance with the motion of the viewpoint received from the three-dimensional data held in the server.
- the superimposed data may be encoded and distributed to the decoding device.
- the superimposed data has an ⁇ value indicating transparency as well as RGB
- the server sets the ⁇ value of a portion other than the object created from the three-dimensional data to 0 etc., and the portion is transparent , May be encoded.
- the server may set RGB values of predetermined values as a background, such as chroma key, and generate data in which the portion other than the object has a background color.
- the decryption processing of the distributed data may be performed by each terminal which is a client, may be performed by the server side, or may be performed sharing each other.
- one terminal may send a reception request to the server once, the content corresponding to the request may be received by another terminal and decoded, and the decoded signal may be transmitted to a device having a display. Data of high image quality can be reproduced by distributing processing and selecting appropriate content regardless of the performance of the communicable terminal itself.
- a viewer's personal terminal may decode and display a partial area such as a tile in which a picture is divided. Thereby, it is possible to confirm at hand the area in which the user is in charge or the area to be checked in more detail while sharing the whole image.
- encoded data over the network such as encoded data being cached on a server that can be accessed in a short time from a receiving terminal, or copied to an edge server in a content delivery service, etc. It is also possible to switch the bit rate of the received data based on ease.
- the server may have a plurality of streams with the same content but different qualities as individual streams, but is temporally / spatial scalable which is realized by coding into layers as shown in the figure.
- the configuration may be such that the content is switched using the feature of the stream. That is, the decoding side determines low-resolution content and high-resolution content by determining which layer to decode depending on the internal factor of performance and external factors such as the state of the communication band. It can be switched freely and decoded. For example, when it is desired to view the continuation of the video being watched by the smartphone ex115 while moving on a device such as the Internet TV after returning home, the device only has to decode the same stream to different layers, so the burden on the server side Can be reduced.
- the picture is encoded for each layer, and the enhancement layer includes meta information based on statistical information of the image, etc., in addition to the configuration for realizing the scalability in which the enhancement layer exists above the base layer.
- the decoding side may generate high-quality content by super-resolving a picture of the base layer based on the meta information.
- the super resolution may be either an improvement in the SN ratio at the same resolution or an expansion of the resolution.
- Meta information includes information for identifying linear or non-linear filter coefficients used for super-resolution processing, or information for identifying parameter values in filter processing used for super-resolution processing, machine learning or least squares operation, etc. .
- the picture may be divided into tiles or the like according to the meaning of an object or the like in the image, and the decoding side may be configured to decode only a part of the area by selecting the tile to be decoded.
- the decoding side can position the desired object based on the meta information And determine the tile that contains the object. For example, as shown in FIG. 25, meta-information is stored using a data storage structure different from pixel data, such as SEI message in HEVC. This meta information indicates, for example, the position, size, or color of the main object.
- meta information may be stored in units of a plurality of pictures, such as streams, sequences, or random access units.
- the decoding side can acquire the time when a specific person appears in the video and the like, and can identify the picture in which the object exists and the position of the object in the picture by combining the information with the picture unit.
- FIG. 26 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of a web page in the computer ex111 and the like.
- FIG. 27 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of a web page in the smartphone ex115 and the like.
- the web page may include a plurality of link images which are links to image content, and the appearance differs depending on the browsing device.
- the display device When multiple link images are visible on the screen, the display device until the user explicitly selects the link image, or until the link image approaches near the center of the screen or the entire link image falls within the screen
- the (decoding device) displays still images or I pictures of each content as link images, displays images such as gif animation with a plurality of still images or I pictures, etc., receives only the base layer Decode and display.
- the display device decodes the base layer with the highest priority.
- the display device may decode up to the enhancement layer if there is information indicating that the content is scalable in the HTML configuring the web page.
- the display device decodes only forward referenced pictures (I picture, P picture, forward referenced only B picture) before the selection or when the communication band is very strict. And, by displaying, it is possible to reduce the delay between the decoding time of the leading picture and the display time (delay from the start of decoding of the content to the start of display).
- the display device may roughly ignore the reference relationship of pictures and roughly decode all B pictures and P pictures with forward reference, and may perform normal decoding as time passes and the number of received pictures increases.
- the receiving terminal when transmitting or receiving still image or video data such as two-dimensional or three-dimensional map information for automatic traveling or driving assistance of a car, the receiving terminal is added as image information belonging to one or more layers as meta information Information on weather or construction may also be received, and these may be correlated and decoded.
- the meta information may belong to the layer or may be simply multiplexed with the image data.
- the receiving terminal since a car including a receiving terminal, a drone or an airplane moves, the receiving terminal transmits the position information of the receiving terminal at the time of reception request to seamlessly receive and decode while switching the base stations ex106 to ex110. Can be realized.
- the receiving terminal can dynamically switch how much meta information is received or how much map information is updated according to the user's selection, the user's situation or the state of the communication band. become.
- the client can receive, decode, and reproduce the encoded information transmitted by the user in real time.
- the server may perform the encoding process after performing the editing process. This can be realized, for example, with the following configuration.
- the server performs recognition processing such as shooting error, scene search, meaning analysis, and object detection from the original image or encoded data after shooting in real time or by accumulation. Then, the server manually or automatically corrects out-of-focus or camera shake, etc. based on the recognition result, or a scene with low importance such as a scene whose brightness is low or out of focus compared with other pictures. Make edits such as deleting, emphasizing the edge of an object, or changing the color. The server encodes the edited data based on the edited result. It is also known that the audience rating drops when the shooting time is too long, and the server works not only with scenes with low importance as described above, but also moves as content becomes within a specific time range according to the shooting time. Scenes with a small amount of motion may be clipped automatically based on the image processing result. Alternatively, the server may generate and encode a digest based on the result of semantic analysis of the scene.
- recognition processing such as shooting error, scene search, meaning analysis, and object detection from the original image or encoded data after shooting in real
- the server may change and encode the face of a person at the periphery of the screen, or the inside of a house, etc. into an image out of focus.
- the server recognizes whether or not the face of a person different from the person registered in advance appears in the image to be encoded, and if so, performs processing such as mosaicing the face portion. May be Alternatively, the user designates a person or background area desired to process an image from the viewpoint of copyright etc.
- preprocessing or post-processing of encoding replaces the designated area with another video or blurs the focus. It is also possible to perform such processing. If it is a person, it is possible to replace the image of the face part while tracking the person in the moving image.
- the decoding apparatus first receives the base layer with the highest priority, and performs decoding and reproduction, although it depends on the bandwidth.
- the decoding device may receive the enhancement layer during this period, and may play back high-quality video including the enhancement layer if it is played back more than once, such as when playback is looped.
- scalable coding it is possible to provide an experience in which the stream gradually becomes smart and the image becomes better although it is a rough moving image when it is not selected or when it starts watching.
- the same experience can be provided even if the coarse stream played back first and the second stream coded with reference to the first moving image are configured as one stream .
- these encoding or decoding processes are generally processed in an LSI ex 500 that each terminal has.
- the LSI ex 500 may be a single chip or a plurality of chips.
- Software for moving image encoding or decoding is incorporated in any recording medium (CD-ROM, flexible disk, hard disk, etc.) readable by computer ex111 or the like, and encoding or decoding is performed using the software. It is also good.
- moving image data acquired by the camera may be transmitted. The moving image data at this time is data encoded by the LSI ex 500 included in the smartphone ex 115.
- the LSI ex 500 may be configured to download and activate application software.
- the terminal first determines whether the terminal corresponds to the content coding scheme or has the ability to execute a specific service. If the terminal does not support the content encoding method or does not have the ability to execute a specific service, the terminal downloads the codec or application software, and then acquires and reproduces the content.
- the present invention is not limited to the content supply system ex100 via the Internet ex101, but also to a system for digital broadcasting at least a moving picture coding apparatus (image coding apparatus) or a moving picture decoding apparatus (image decoding apparatus) of the above embodiments. Can be incorporated. There is a difference in that it is multicast-oriented with respect to the configuration in which the content supply system ex100 can be easily unicasted, since multiplexed data in which video and sound are multiplexed is transmitted on broadcast radio waves using satellites etc. Similar applications are possible for the encoding process and the decoding process.
- FIG. 28 is a diagram showing the smartphone ex115.
- FIG. 29 is a diagram showing an example configuration of the smartphone ex115.
- the smartphone ex115 receives an antenna ex450 for transmitting and receiving radio waves to and from the base station ex110, a camera unit ex465 capable of taking video and still images, a video taken by the camera unit ex465, and the antenna ex450 And a display unit ex ⁇ b> 458 for displaying data obtained by decoding an image or the like.
- the smartphone ex115 further includes an operation unit ex466 that is a touch panel or the like, a voice output unit ex457 that is a speaker or the like for outputting voice or sound, a voice input unit ex456 that is a microphone or the like for inputting voice, Identify the user, the memory unit ex 467 capable of storing encoded video or still image, recorded voice, received video or still image, encoded data such as mail, or decoded data, and specify a network, etc. And a slot unit ex464 that is an interface unit with the SIM ex 468 for authenticating access to various data. Note that an external memory may be used instead of the memory unit ex467.
- a main control unit ex460 that integrally controls the display unit ex458 and the operation unit ex466, a power supply circuit unit ex461, an operation input control unit ex462, a video signal processing unit ex455, a camera interface unit ex463, a display control unit ex459, / Demodulation unit ex452, multiplexing / demultiplexing unit ex453, audio signal processing unit ex454, slot unit ex464, and memory unit ex467 are connected via a bus ex470.
- the power supply circuit unit ex461 activates the smartphone ex115 to an operable state by supplying power from the battery pack to each unit.
- the smartphone ex115 performs processing such as call and data communication based on control of the main control unit ex460 having a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, and the like.
- the audio signal collected by the audio input unit ex456 is converted to a digital audio signal by the audio signal processing unit ex454, spread spectrum processing is performed by the modulation / demodulation unit ex452, and digital analog conversion is performed by the transmission / reception unit ex451.
- transmission is performed via the antenna ex450.
- the received data is amplified and subjected to frequency conversion processing and analog-to-digital conversion processing, subjected to spectrum despreading processing by modulation / demodulation unit ex452, and converted to an analog sound signal by sound signal processing unit ex454.
- Output from In the data communication mode text, still images, or video data are sent to the main control unit ex460 via the operation input control unit ex462 by the operation of the operation unit ex466 or the like of the main unit, and transmission and reception processing is similarly performed.
- the video signal processing unit ex 455 executes the video signal stored in the memory unit ex 467 or the video signal input from the camera unit ex 465 as described above.
- the video data is compressed and encoded by the moving picture encoding method shown in the form, and the encoded video data is sent to the multiplexing / demultiplexing unit ex453.
- the audio signal processing unit ex454 encodes an audio signal collected by the audio input unit ex456 while capturing a video or a still image with the camera unit ex465, and sends the encoded audio data to the multiplexing / demultiplexing unit ex453.
- the multiplexing / demultiplexing unit ex453 multiplexes the encoded video data and the encoded audio data according to a predetermined method, and performs modulation processing and conversion by the modulation / demodulation unit (modulation / demodulation circuit unit) ex452 and the transmission / reception unit ex451. It processes and transmits via antenna ex450.
- the multiplexing / demultiplexing unit ex453 multiplexes in order to decode multiplexed data received via the antenna ex450.
- the multiplexed data is divided into a bit stream of video data and a bit stream of audio data, and the encoded video data is supplied to the video signal processing unit ex455 via the synchronization bus ex470, and The converted audio data is supplied to the audio signal processing unit ex 454.
- the video signal processing unit ex 455 decodes the video signal by the moving picture decoding method corresponding to the moving picture coding method described in each of the above embodiments, and is linked from the display unit ex 458 via the display control unit ex 459. An image or a still image included in the moving image file is displayed.
- the audio signal processing unit ex 454 decodes the audio signal, and the audio output unit ex 457 outputs the audio. Furthermore, since real-time streaming is widespread, depending on the user's situation, it may happen that sound reproduction is not socially appropriate. Therefore, as an initial value, it is preferable to have a configuration in which only the video data is reproduced without reproducing the audio signal. Audio may be synchronized and played back only when the user performs an operation such as clicking on video data.
- the smartphone ex115 has been described as an example, in addition to a transceiving terminal having both an encoder and a decoder as a terminal, a transmitting terminal having only the encoder and a receiver having only the decoder There are three possible implementation forms: terminals. Furthermore, in the digital broadcasting system, it has been described that multiplexed data in which audio data is multiplexed with video data is received or transmitted, but in multiplexed data, character data related to video other than audio data is also described. It may be multiplexed, or video data itself may be received or transmitted, not multiplexed data.
- the terminal often includes a GPU. Therefore, a configuration in which a large area is collectively processed using the performance of the GPU may be performed using a memory shared by the CPU and the GPU, or a memory whose address is managed so as to be commonly used. As a result, coding time can be shortened, real time property can be secured, and low delay can be realized. In particular, it is efficient to perform processing of motion search, deblock filter, sample adaptive offset (SAO), and transform / quantization collectively in units of pictures or the like on the GPU instead of the CPU.
- SAO sample adaptive offset
- This aspect may be practiced in combination with at least some of the other aspects in the present disclosure.
- part of the processing described in the flowchart of this aspect part of the configuration of the apparatus, part of the syntax, and the like may be implemented in combination with other aspects.
- the present disclosure is applicable to, for example, a television receiver, a digital video recorder, a car navigation system, a mobile phone, a digital camera, a digital video camera, a video conference system, an electronic mirror, and the like.
Landscapes
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Multimedia (AREA)
- Signal Processing (AREA)
- Computing Systems (AREA)
- Theoretical Computer Science (AREA)
- Compression Or Coding Systems Of Tv Signals (AREA)
Abstract
A coding device (100) is provided with a circuit (160) and a memory (162), wherein the circuit (160) sets a search range that is used in common by first processing units, using the memory (162) (S201), and performs coding processing with respect to a second processing unit that uses inter prediction, among one or more second processing units included in the first processing unit, with reference to pixels within the search range while restricting reference to pixels outside the search range (S204, S210). For example, the first processing unit may be a block unit being a basic division unit of a picture and composed of one or more second processing units, or a block unit of a predefined size composed of one or more second processing units.
Description
本開示は、符号化装置、復号装置、符号化方法及び復号方法に関する。
The present disclosure relates to an encoding device, a decoding device, an encoding method, and a decoding method.
従来、動画像を符号化するための規格として、H.265が存在する。H.265は、HEVC(High Efficiency Video Coding)とも呼ばれる。
Conventionally, as a standard for coding a moving image, H.264 is used. There are 265. H. H.265 is also referred to as HEVC (High Efficiency Video Coding).
このような、符号化方法及び復号方法では、処理時間又は処理量を低減できることが望まれている。
In such encoding method and decoding method, it is desired that processing time or processing amount can be reduced.
本開示は、処理時間又は処理量を低減できる符号化装置、復号装置、符号化方法又は復号方法を提供することを目的とする。
The present disclosure aims to provide an encoding device, a decoding device, an encoding method, or a decoding method that can reduce processing time or processing amount.
本開示の一態様に係る符号化装置は、回路と、メモリと、を備え、前記回路は、前記メモリを用いて、第1処理単位で共通に使用する探索範囲を設定し、前記第1処理単位に含まれる1又は複数の第2処理単位のうちインター予測を用いる第2処理単位に対して、前記探索範囲外の画素の参照を制限し、前記探索範囲内の画素を参照して符号化処理を行う。
An encoding device according to an aspect of the present disclosure includes a circuit and a memory, and the circuit uses the memory to set a search range to be commonly used in a first processing unit, and the first processing. For the second processing unit using inter prediction among one or more second processing units included in the unit, reference to pixels outside the search range is restricted, and encoding is performed with reference to pixels in the search range Do the processing.
本開示の一態様に係る復号装置は、回路と、メモリと、を備え、前記回路は、前記メモリを用いて、第1処理単位で共通に使用する探索範囲を設定し、前記第1処理単位に含まれる複数の第2処理単位のうちインター予測を用いる第2処理単位に対して、前記探索範囲外の画素の参照を制限し、前記探索範囲内の画素を用いて復号処理を行う。
A decoding device according to an aspect of the present disclosure includes a circuit and a memory, and the circuit uses the memory to set a search range commonly used in the first processing unit, and the first processing unit. For the second processing unit using inter prediction among the plurality of second processing units included in, the reference of the pixels outside the search range is restricted, and the decoding process is performed using the pixels within the search range.
なお、これらの包括的又は具体的な態様は、システム、装置、方法、集積回路、コンピュータプログラム、又は、コンピュータ読み取り可能なCD-ROMなどの非一時的な記録媒体で実現されてもよく、システム、装置、方法、集積回路、コンピュータプログラム、及び、記録媒体の任意な組み合わせで実現されてもよい。
Note that these general or specific aspects may be realized by a system, an apparatus, a method, an integrated circuit, a computer program, or a non-transitory recording medium such as a computer readable CD-ROM, and the system The present invention may be realized as any combination of an apparatus, a method, an integrated circuit, a computer program, and a storage medium.
本開示は、処理時間又は処理量を低減できる符号化装置、復号装置、符号化方法又は復号方法を提供できる。
The present disclosure can provide an encoding device, a decoding device, an encoding method, or a decoding method that can reduce processing time or processing amount.
本開示の一態様に係る符号化装置は、回路と、メモリと、を備え、前記回路は、前記メモリを用いて、第1処理単位で共通に使用する探索範囲を設定し、前記第1処理単位に含まれる1又は複数の第2処理単位のうちインター予測を用いる第2処理単位に対して、前記探索範囲外の画素の参照を制限し、前記探索範囲内の画素を参照して符号化処理を行う。
An encoding device according to an aspect of the present disclosure includes a circuit and a memory, and the circuit uses the memory to set a search range to be commonly used in a first processing unit, and the first processing. For the second processing unit using inter prediction among one or more second processing units included in the unit, reference to pixels outside the search range is restricted, and encoding is performed with reference to pixels in the search range Do the processing.
これによれば、処理済み領域の画像を格納しているメモリへのアクセス量を限定できるので、データ転送に関わる処理時間を抑制できるとともに、処理量を低減できる。
According to this, since the amount of access to the memory storing the image of the processed area can be limited, the processing time related to data transfer can be suppressed, and the amount of processing can be reduced.
例えば、前記第1処理単位は、ピクチャの基本分割単位である1つ或いは複数の第2処理単位から構成されるブロック単位、又は、1つ或いは複数の第2処理単位から構成される予め定義された大きさのブロック単位であってもよい。
For example, the first processing unit may be a block unit configured of one or more second processing units, which is a basic division unit of a picture, or a predefined unit configured of one or more second processing units. It may be a block unit of another size.
例えば、前記第1処理単位に含まれる対象第2処理単位に対して、複数のインター予測モードのうち、選択対象のインター予測モードに割り当てられた動きベクトルを用いた動き補償処理で、前記探索範囲外の画素を参照するインター予測モードを除外し、除外後のインター予測モードとイントラ予測モードとのなかから1つのモードを選択し、選択したモードを用いて符号化処理を行ってもよい。
For example, in the motion compensation process using a motion vector assigned to an inter prediction mode to be selected among a plurality of inter prediction modes with respect to a target second processing unit included in the first processing unit, the search range An inter prediction mode that refers to an outer pixel may be excluded, one mode may be selected from the inter prediction mode after the exclusion and the intra prediction mode, and the encoding process may be performed using the selected mode.
例えば、前記インター予測モードの除外では、さらに、前記選択対象のインター予測モードにおける、前記動き補償処理以外に適用される予測画像生成に関わる他の処理において、前記探索範囲外の画素を必要とするインター予測モードを除外してもよい。
For example, in the exclusion of the inter prediction mode, pixels outside the search range are further required in another process related to predicted image generation applied other than the motion compensation process in the inter prediction mode to be selected. Inter prediction mode may be excluded.
例えば、前記選択対象のインター予測モードにおいて、動き補償処理以外に適用される予測画像生成に関わる他の処理であって、前記探索範囲外の画素を必要とする前記他の処理があった場合、前記他の処理を行わずに予測画像を生成してもよい。
For example, in the inter prediction mode to be selected, there is another process related to predicted image generation to be applied other than the motion compensation process, and there is the other process requiring pixels outside the search range, The predicted image may be generated without performing the other processing.
例えば、前記探索範囲の設定では、参照可能な処理済みピクチャ、前記処理済みピクチャにおける探索領域の大きさ、及び前記処理済みピクチャにおける探索領域の中心位置シフト量、を含む情報を用いて前記探索範囲を設定してもよい。
For example, in the setting of the search range, the search range using information including a processed processed picture, the size of a search area in the processed picture, and the center position shift amount of the search area in the processed picture May be set.
例えば、前記探索領域の大きさを、前記参照可能な処理済みピクチャの枚数に応じて切替えてもよい。
For example, the size of the search area may be switched according to the number of processed reference pictures.
例えば、前記参照可能な処理済みピクチャにおける前記探索領域の総和が特定の値以下になるように、前記探索領域の大きさを設定してもよい。
For example, the size of the search area may be set such that the sum of the search areas in the referenceable processed picture is less than or equal to a specific value.
例えば、前記参照可能な処理済みピクチャの枚数及び前記探索領域の大きさ、又は前記探索領域の総和、の上限値を、プロファイル値又はレベル値に対応付けて規定し、対象ストリームに割り当てられたプロファイル値又はレベル値に応じて、前記上限値以下の値になるように、前記参照可能な処理済みピクチャの枚数及び前記探索領域の大きさを設定してもよい。
For example, the upper limit of the number of processable pictures that can be referred to and the size of the search area or the total sum of the search areas is defined in association with the profile value or the level value, and the profile assigned to the target stream The number of referable processed pictures and the size of the search area may be set according to the value or the level value so as to be a value equal to or less than the upper limit value.
例えば、前記第1処理単位に含まれる全ての第2処理単位で、前記探索範囲外の画素を必要とするインター予測モードを選択していないことを示す情報を、シーケンスヘッダ領域、ピクチャヘッダ領域、スライスヘッダ領域又は補助情報領域に符号化してもよい。
For example, information indicating that the inter prediction mode requiring the pixels outside the search range is not selected in all the second processing units included in the first processing unit is a sequence header area, a picture header area, It may be encoded in the slice header area or the side information area.
例えば、復号装置の処理能力に応じて、前記探索範囲外の画素を参照するインター予測モードを除外するか否かを切替えてもよい。
For example, according to the processing capability of the decoding device, it may be switched whether to exclude the inter prediction mode that refers to the pixels outside the search range.
例えば、対象ストリームに割り当てられたプロファイル値又はレベル値に応じて、前記探索範囲外の画素を参照するインター予測モードを除外するか否かを切替えてもよい。
For example, whether to exclude an inter prediction mode that refers to a pixel outside the search range may be switched according to a profile value or a level value assigned to a target stream.
例えば、対象ピクチャの大きさに応じて、前記探索範囲外の画素を参照するインター予測モードを除外するか否かを切替えてもよい。
For example, whether to exclude an inter prediction mode that refers to a pixel outside the search range may be switched according to the size of the target picture.
例えば、前記探索領域の中心位置シフト量は、対象ピクチャにおける対象第1処理単位の位置と、参照する処理済みピクチャにおける前記探索領域の位置とのシフト量であってもよい。
For example, the center position shift amount of the search area may be a shift amount between the position of the target first processing unit in the target picture and the position of the search area in the processed picture to be referred to.
例えば、前記探索領域の中心位置シフト量を、第1処理単位毎に導出してもよい。
For example, the center position shift amount of the search area may be derived for each first processing unit.
例えば、前記探索領域の中心位置シフト量を、対象第1処理単位の空間的又は時間的周辺に位置する処理済み第1処理単位に含まれる第2処理単位に割り当てられた動きベクトルを用いて導出してもよい。
For example, the center position shift amount of the search area is derived using the motion vector assigned to the second processing unit included in the processed first processing unit located in the spatial or temporal periphery of the target first processing unit. You may
例えば、前記処理済み第1処理単位は、対象第1処理単位に対して処理順が直前である第1処理単位以外の処理済み第1処理単位であってもよい。
For example, the processed first processing unit may be a processed first processing unit other than the first processing unit in which the processing order is immediately before the target first processing unit.
例えば、前記探索領域の中心位置シフト量として、対象ピクチャ又は対象スライスに含まれる全ての第1処理単位に対して、共通の値を設定し、前記共通の値を特定するための情報を、ピクチャヘッダ領域又はスライスヘッダ領域に符号化してもよい。
For example, as the center position shift amount of the search area, a value common to all the first processing units included in the target picture or target slice is set, and the information for specifying the common value is a picture. It may be encoded in the header area or slice header area.
例えば、前記共通の値を、中心位置のシフトが0となる値に設定してもよい。
For example, the common value may be set to a value at which the shift of the center position is zero.
例えば、前記共通の値を、処理済みピクチャに含まれる複数の第2処理単位で導出された複数の動きベクトルの統計量を用いて導出してもよい。
For example, the common value may be derived using statistics of a plurality of motion vectors derived in a plurality of second processing units included in the processed picture.
例えば、前記探索範囲の位置が特定された時点で、処理済みピクチャの画像データを格納しているメモリから、対象第1処理単位に対して設定される前記探索範囲の参照画素データの転送を開始し、転送が完了してから前記対象第1処理単位の処理を開始してもよい。
For example, when the position of the search range is specified, transfer of reference pixel data of the search range set for the target first processing unit is started from the memory storing image data of a processed picture. The processing of the target first processing unit may be started after the transfer is completed.
例えば、前記処理順が直前である第1処理単位の処理を待たずに、処理済みピクチャの画像データを格納しているメモリから、対象第1処理単位に対して設定される前記探索範囲の参照画素データの転送を開始してもよい。
For example, without waiting for the processing of the first processing unit whose processing order is immediately before, reference to the search range set for the target first processing unit from the memory storing the image data of the processed picture Transfer of pixel data may be started.
例えば、対象第1処理単位に対して設定された前記探索範囲の参照画素データのうち、既に処理済みの第1処理単位に対して設定されていた前記探索範囲と重複する領域の参照画素データを除いて、前記参照画素データのメモリからの転送を行ってもよい。
For example, among reference pixel data of the search range set for the target first processing unit, reference pixel data of an area overlapping the search range set for the already processed first processing unit Alternatively, the reference pixel data may be transferred from the memory.
例えば、前記第1処理単位に含まれる前記複数の第2処理単位のうち、FRUCモードを用いる第2処理単位に対して、前記探索範囲外の画素の参照を制限し、前記探索範囲内の画素を参照して符号化処理を行ってもよい。
For example, among the plurality of second processing units included in the first processing unit, reference to pixels outside the search range is restricted with respect to the second processing unit using the FRUC mode, and pixels within the search range The encoding process may be performed with reference to FIG.
例えば、前記FRUCモードにおいて、処理済みブロックの動きベクトルから導出した複数の候補動きベクトルから前記探索範囲外の画素を参照とする候補動きベクトルを評価対象から除外し、除外後の候補動きベクトルに対してコスト評価を行ってもよい。
For example, in the FRUC mode, candidate motion vectors with reference to pixels outside the search range are excluded from evaluation targets from a plurality of candidate motion vectors derived from motion vectors of processed blocks, and candidate motion vectors after exclusion are excluded. Cost evaluation.
例えば、前記候補動きベクトルの除外では、さらに、FRUC処理を行った後に適用される予測画像生成に関わる他の処理において、前記探索範囲外の画素を必要とする候補動きベクトルを評価対象から除外してもよい。
For example, in the exclusion of the candidate motion vector, a candidate motion vector requiring a pixel outside the search range is further excluded from the evaluation target in another process related to prediction image generation applied after performing the FRUC process. May be
例えば、前記FRUCモードにおいて、FRUC処理を行った後に適用される予測画像生成に関わる他の処理であって、前記探索範囲外の画素を必要とする前記他の処理があった場合、前記他の処理を行わずに予測画像を生成してもよい。
For example, in the FRUC mode, there is another process related to predicted image generation applied after performing the FRUC process and there is the other process requiring a pixel outside the search range. The predicted image may be generated without processing.
例えば、前記探索範囲の設定では、参照可能である処理済みピクチャを指定するための参照インデックスと、前記参照インデックスにおける探索領域の大きさと、前記参照インデックスにおける探索領域の中心位置シフト量と、を含む情報を用いて前記探索範囲を設定してもよい。
For example, the setting of the search range includes a reference index for specifying a processed picture that can be referred to, the size of a search area in the reference index, and the shift amount of the center position of the search area in the reference index. Information may be used to set the search range.
例えば、前記探索領域の大きさを、前記参照インデックスの総数に応じて切替えてもよい。
For example, the size of the search area may be switched according to the total number of reference indexes.
例えば、前記参照インデックスにおける前記探索領域の総和が特定の値以下になるように、前記探索領域の大きさを設定してもよい。
For example, the size of the search area may be set such that the sum of the search areas in the reference index is less than or equal to a specific value.
例えば、前記参照インデックスの総数及び探索領域の大きさ、又は前記探索領域の総和、の上限値を、プロファイル値又はレベル値に対応付けて規定し、対象ストリームに割り当てられたプロファイル値又はレベル値に応じて、前記上限値以下の値になるように、前記参照インデックスの総数及び前記探索領域の大きさを設定してもよい。
For example, the upper limit value of the total number of reference indexes and the size of the search area or the total sum of the search areas is defined in association with the profile value or the level value, and is defined as the profile value or the level value assigned to the target stream Accordingly, the total number of reference indexes and the size of the search area may be set so as to be a value equal to or less than the upper limit value.
例えば、1つの前記参照可能な処理済みピクチャに対して、複数の前記参照インデックスを対応付けてもよい。
For example, a plurality of reference indexes may be associated with one referenceable processed picture.
例えば、前記参照可能な処理済みピクチャを指定するための参照インデックス及び前記探索領域の大きさ特定するための情報を、シーケンスヘッダ領域、ピクチャヘッダ領域、スライスヘッダ領域又は補助情報領域に符号化してもよい。
For example, even if the reference index for specifying the referenceable processed picture and the information for specifying the size of the search area are encoded in the sequence header area, the picture header area, the slice header area or the auxiliary information area Good.
例えば、復号装置の処理能力に応じて、前記参照インデックスの総数及び前記探索領域の大きさを切替えてもよい。
For example, the total number of reference indexes and the size of the search area may be switched according to the processing capability of the decoding device.
例えば、対象ストリームに割り当てられたプロファイル値又はレベル値に応じて、前記参照インデックスの総数及び前記探索領域の大きさを切替えてもよい。
For example, the total number of reference indexes and the size of the search area may be switched according to a profile value or a level value assigned to a target stream.
例えば、対象ピクチャの大きさに応じて、前記参照インデックスの総数及び前記探索領域の大きさを切替えてもよい。
For example, the total number of reference indexes and the size of the search area may be switched according to the size of the target picture.
例えば、前記探索領域の中心位置シフト量を、第1処理単位毎に導出する方法と、対象ピクチャ又は対象スライスに属する全ての第1処理単位に対して共通の値を設定する方法との、2つの方法を対象ピクチャ毎に切り替えてもよい。
For example, a method of deriving the center position shift amount of the search area for each first processing unit, and a method of setting a common value to all the first processing units belonging to the target picture or target slice, 2 One method may be switched for each target picture.
例えば、前記2つの方法のどちらを使用するかを特定するための情報を、ピクチャヘッダ領域又はスライスヘッダ領域に符号化してもよい。
For example, information for specifying which of the two methods is used may be encoded in the picture header area or slice header area.
本開示の一態様に係る復号装置は、回路と、メモリと、を備え、前記回路は、前記メモリを用いて、第1処理単位で共通に使用する探索範囲を設定し、前記第1処理単位に含まれる複数の第2処理単位のうちインター予測を用いる第2処理単位に対して、前記探索範囲外の画素の参照を制限し、前記探索範囲内の画素を用いて復号処理を行う。
A decoding device according to an aspect of the present disclosure includes a circuit and a memory, and the circuit uses the memory to set a search range commonly used in the first processing unit, and the first processing unit. For the second processing unit using inter prediction among the plurality of second processing units included in, the reference of the pixels outside the search range is restricted, and the decoding process is performed using the pixels within the search range.
これによれば、処理済み領域の画像を格納しているメモリへのアクセス量を限定できるので、データ転送に関わる処理時間を抑制できるとともに、処理量を低減できる。
According to this, since the amount of access to the memory storing the image of the processed area can be limited, the processing time related to data transfer can be suppressed and the amount of processing can be reduced.
例えば、前記第1処理単位は、ピクチャの基本分割単位である1つ或いは複数の第2処理単位から構成されるブロック単位、又は、1つ或いは複数の第2処理単位から構成される予め定義された大きさのブロック単位であってもよい。
For example, the first processing unit may be a block unit configured of one or more second processing units, which is a basic division unit of a picture, or a predefined unit configured of one or more second processing units. It may be a block unit of another size.
例えば、前記探索範囲の設定では、参照可能な処理済みピクチャ、前記処理済みピクチャにおける探索領域の大きさ、及び前記処理済みピクチャにおける探索領域の中心位置シフト量、を含む情報を用いて前記探索範囲を設定してもよい。
For example, in the setting of the search range, the search range using information including a processed processed picture, the size of a search area in the processed picture, and the center position shift amount of the search area in the processed picture May be set.
例えば、前記探索領域の大きさを、前記参照可能な処理済みピクチャの枚数に応じて切替えてもよい。
For example, the size of the search area may be switched according to the number of processed reference pictures.
例えば、前記参照可能な処理済みピクチャにおける前記探索領域の総和が特定の値以下になるように、前記探索領域の大きさを設定してもよい。
For example, the size of the search area may be set such that the sum of the search areas in the referenceable processed picture is less than or equal to a specific value.
例えば、前記参照可能な処理済みピクチャの枚数及び前記探索領域の大きさ、又は前記探索領域の総和、の上限値を、プロファイル値又はレベル値に対応付けて規定し、対象ストリームに割り当てられたプロファイル値又はレベル値に応じて、前記上限値以下の値になるように、前記参照可能な処理済みピクチャの枚数及び前記探索領域の大きさを設定してもよい。
For example, the upper limit of the number of processable pictures that can be referred to and the size of the search area or the total sum of the search areas is defined in association with the profile value or the level value, and the profile assigned to the target stream The number of referable processed pictures and the size of the search area may be set according to the value or the level value so as to be a value equal to or less than the upper limit value.
例えば、前記第1処理単位に含まれる全ての第2処理単位で、前記探索範囲外の画素を必要とするインター予測モードを選択していないことを示す情報を、シーケンスヘッダ領域、ピクチャヘッダ領域、スライスヘッダ領域又は補助情報領域から復号してもよい。
For example, information indicating that the inter prediction mode requiring the pixels outside the search range is not selected in all the second processing units included in the first processing unit is a sequence header area, a picture header area, It may be decoded from the slice header area or the side information area.
例えば、前記探索領域の中心位置シフト量は、対象ピクチャにおける対象第1処理単位の位置と、参照する処理済みピクチャにおける前記探索領域の位置とのシフト量であってもよい。
For example, the center position shift amount of the search area may be a shift amount between the position of the target first processing unit in the target picture and the position of the search area in the processed picture to be referred to.
例えば、前記探索領域の中心位置シフト量を、第1処理単位毎に導出してもよい。
For example, the center position shift amount of the search area may be derived for each first processing unit.
例えば、前記探索領域の中心位置シフト量を、対象第1処理単位の空間的又は時間的周辺に位置する処理済み第1処理単位に含まれる第2処理単位に割り当てられた動きベクトルを用いて導出してもよい。
For example, the center position shift amount of the search area is derived using the motion vector assigned to the second processing unit included in the processed first processing unit located in the spatial or temporal periphery of the target first processing unit. You may
例えば、前記処理済み第1処理単位は、対象第1処理単位に対して処理順が直前である第1処理単位以外の処理済み第1処理単位であってもよい。
For example, the processed first processing unit may be a processed first processing unit other than the first processing unit in which the processing order is immediately before the target first processing unit.
例えば、前記探索領域の中心位置シフト量として、対象ピクチャ又は対象スライスに含まれる全ての第1処理単位に対して、共通の値が設定され、前記共通の値を特定するための情報を、ピクチャヘッダ領域又はスライスヘッダ領域から復号し、前記共通の値を特定してもよい。
For example, as the center position shift amount of the search area, a common value is set to all the first processing units included in the target picture or the target slice, and the information for specifying the common value is a picture The common value may be identified by decoding from the header area or slice header area.
例えば、前記探索範囲の位置が特定された時点で、処理済みピクチャの画像データを格納しているメモリから、対象第1処理単位に対して設定される前記探索範囲の参照画素データの転送を開始し、転送が完了してから前記対象第1処理単位の処理を開始してもよい。
For example, when the position of the search range is specified, transfer of reference pixel data of the search range set for the target first processing unit is started from the memory storing image data of a processed picture. The processing of the target first processing unit may be started after the transfer is completed.
例えば、前記処理順が直前である第1処理単位の処理を待たずに、処理済みピクチャの画像データを格納しているメモリから、対象第1処理単位に対して設定される前記探索範囲の参照画素データの転送を開始してもよい。
For example, without waiting for the processing of the first processing unit whose processing order is immediately before, reference to the search range set for the target first processing unit from the memory storing the image data of the processed picture Transfer of pixel data may be started.
例えば、対象第1処理単位に対して設定された前記探索範囲の参照画素データのうち、既に処理済みの第1処理単位に対して設定されていた前記探索範囲と重複する領域の参照画素データを除いて、前記参照画素データのメモリからの転送を行ってもよい。
For example, among reference pixel data of the search range set for the target first processing unit, reference pixel data of an area overlapping the search range set for the already processed first processing unit Alternatively, the reference pixel data may be transferred from the memory.
例えば、前記第1処理単位に含まれる1又は複数の第2処理単位のうち、FRUCモードを用いる第2処理単位に対して、前記探索範囲外の画素の参照を制限し、前記探索範囲内の画素を用いて復号処理を行ってもよい。
For example, among the one or more second processing units included in the first processing unit, reference to pixels outside the search range is restricted with respect to the second processing unit using the FRUC mode, and Decoding processing may be performed using pixels.
例えば、前記FRUCモードにおいて、処理済みブロックの動きベクトルから導出した複数の候補動きベクトルから前記探索範囲外の画素を参照とする候補動きベクトルを評価対象から除外し、除外後の候補動きベクトルに対してコスト評価を行ってもよい。
For example, in the FRUC mode, candidate motion vectors with reference to pixels outside the search range are excluded from evaluation targets from a plurality of candidate motion vectors derived from motion vectors of processed blocks, and candidate motion vectors after exclusion are excluded. Cost evaluation.
例えば、前記候補動きベクトルの除外では、さらに、FRUC処理を行った後に適用される予測画像生成に関わる他の処理において、前記探索範囲外の画素を必要とする候補動きベクトルを評価対象から除外してもよい。
For example, in the exclusion of the candidate motion vector, a candidate motion vector requiring a pixel outside the search range is further excluded from the evaluation target in another process related to prediction image generation applied after performing the FRUC process. May be
例えば、前記FRUCモードにおいて、FRUC処理を行った後に適用される予測画像生成に関わる他の処理であって、前記探索範囲外の画素を必要とする前記他の処理があった場合、前記他の処理を行わずに予測画像を生成してもよい。
For example, in the FRUC mode, there is another process related to predicted image generation applied after performing the FRUC process and there is the other process requiring a pixel outside the search range. The predicted image may be generated without processing.
例えば、前記探索範囲の設定では、参照可能である処理済みピクチャを指定するための参照インデックスと、前記参照インデックスにおける探索領域の大きさと、前記参照インデックスにおける探索領域の中心位置シフト量と、を含む情報を用いて前記探索範囲を設定してもよい。
For example, the setting of the search range includes a reference index for specifying a processed picture that can be referred to, the size of a search area in the reference index, and the shift amount of the center position of the search area in the reference index. Information may be used to set the search range.
例えば、前記探索領域の大きさを、前記参照インデックスの総数に応じて切替えてもよい。
For example, the size of the search area may be switched according to the total number of reference indexes.
例えば、前記参照インデックスにおける前記探索領域の総和が特定の値以下になるように、前記探索領域の大きさを設定してもよい。
For example, the size of the search area may be set such that the sum of the search areas in the reference index is less than or equal to a specific value.
例えば、前記参照インデックスの総数及び探索領域の大きさ、又は前記探索領域の総和、の上限値を、プロファイル値又はレベル値に対応付けて規定し、対象ストリームに割り当てられたプロファイル値又はレベル値に応じて、前記上限値以下の値になるように、前記参照インデックスの総数及び前記探索領域の大きさを設定してもよい。
For example, the upper limit value of the total number of reference indexes and the size of the search area or the total sum of the search areas is defined in association with the profile value or the level value, and is defined as the profile value or the level value assigned to the target stream Accordingly, the total number of reference indexes and the size of the search area may be set so as to be a value equal to or less than the upper limit value.
例えば、前記参照可能な処理済みピクチャを指定するための参照インデックス及び前記探索領域の大きさ特定するための情報を、シーケンスヘッダ領域、ピクチャヘッダ領域、スライスヘッダ領域又は補助情報領域から復号し、前記参照インデックス及び前記探索領域の大きさを特定してもよい。
For example, the reference index for specifying the referenceable processed picture and the information for specifying the size of the search area are decoded from the sequence header area, the picture header area, the slice header area or the auxiliary information area, A reference index and the size of the search area may be specified.
例えば、前記探索領域の中心位置シフト量を、第1処理単位毎に導出する方法と、対象ピクチャ又は対象スライスに属する全ての第1処理単位に対して共通の値を設定する方法との、2つの方法を対象ピクチャ毎に切り替えてもよい。
For example, a method of deriving the center position shift amount of the search area for each first processing unit, and a method of setting a common value to all the first processing units belonging to the target picture or target slice, 2 One method may be switched for each target picture.
例えば、前記2つの方法のどちらを使用するかを特定するための情報を、ピクチャヘッダ領域又はスライスヘッダ領域から復号し、前記2つの方法のどちらを使用するかを特定してもよい。
For example, information for specifying which of the two methods is to be used may be decoded from the picture header area or the slice header area, and it may be specified which of the two methods is to be used.
本開示の一態様に係る符号化方法は、第1処理単位で共通に使用する探索範囲を設定し、前記第1処理単位に含まれる1又は複数の第2処理単位のうちインター予測を用いる第2処理単位に対して、前記探索範囲外の画素の参照を制限し、前記探索範囲内の画素を参照して符号化処理を行う。
The encoding method according to an aspect of the present disclosure sets a search range to be commonly used in the first processing unit, and uses inter prediction among the one or more second processing units included in the first processing unit. For two processing units, reference to pixels outside the search range is restricted, and coding processing is performed with reference to pixels in the search range.
これによれば、処理済み領域の画像を格納しているメモリへのアクセス量を限定できるので、データ転送に関わる処理時間を抑制できるとともに、処理量を低減できる。
According to this, since the amount of access to the memory storing the image of the processed area can be limited, the processing time related to data transfer can be suppressed and the amount of processing can be reduced.
本開示の一態様に係る復号方法は、第1処理単位で共通に使用する探索範囲を設定し、前記第1処理単位に含まれる複数の第2処理単位のうちインター予測を用いる第2処理単位に対して、前記探索範囲外の画素の参照を制限し、前記探索範囲内の画素を用いて復号処理を行う。
The decoding method according to an aspect of the present disclosure sets a search range to be commonly used in the first processing unit, and a second processing unit using inter prediction among the plurality of second processing units included in the first processing unit. On the other hand, the reference of pixels outside the search range is restricted, and the decoding process is performed using the pixels within the search range.
これによれば、処理済み領域の画像を格納しているメモリへのアクセス量を限定できるので、データ転送に関わる処理時間を抑制できるとともに、処理量を低減できる。
According to this, since the amount of access to the memory storing the image of the processed area can be limited, the processing time related to data transfer can be suppressed and the amount of processing can be reduced.
さらに、これらの包括的又は具体的な態様は、システム、装置、方法、集積回路、コンピュータプログラム、又は、コンピュータ読み取り可能なCD-ROMなどの非一時的な記録媒体で実現されてもよく、システム、装置、方法、集積回路、コンピュータプログラム、及び、記録媒体の任意な組み合わせで実現されてもよい。
Furthermore, these general or specific aspects may be realized by a system, an apparatus, a method, an integrated circuit, a computer program, or a non-transitory recording medium such as a computer readable CD-ROM, and the system The present invention may be realized as any combination of an apparatus, a method, an integrated circuit, a computer program, and a storage medium.
以下、実施の形態について図面を参照しながら具体的に説明する。
Embodiments will be specifically described below with reference to the drawings.
なお、以下で説明する実施の形態は、いずれも包括的または具体的な例を示すものである。以下の実施の形態で示される数値、形状、材料、構成要素、構成要素の配置位置及び接続形態、ステップ、ステップの順序などは、一例であり、請求の範囲を限定する主旨ではない。また、以下の実施の形態における構成要素のうち、最上位概念を示す独立請求項に記載されていない構成要素については、任意の構成要素として説明される。
The embodiments described below are all inclusive or specific examples. Numerical values, shapes, materials, components, arrangement positions and connection forms of components, steps, order of steps, and the like shown in the following embodiments are merely examples, and are not intended to limit the scope of the claims. Further, among the components in the following embodiments, components not described in the independent claim indicating the highest concept are described as arbitrary components.
(実施の形態1)
まず、後述する本開示の各態様で説明する処理および/または構成を適用可能な符号化装置および復号化装置の一例として、実施の形態1の概要を説明する。ただし、実施の形態1は、本開示の各態様で説明する処理および/または構成を適用可能な符号化装置および復号化装置の一例にすぎず、本開示の各態様で説明する処理および/または構成は、実施の形態1とは異なる符号化装置および復号化装置においても実施可能である。Embodiment 1
First, an outline of the first embodiment will be described as an example of an encoding apparatus and a decoding apparatus to which the process and / or the configuration described in each aspect of the present disclosure described later can be applied. However,Embodiment 1 is merely an example of an encoding apparatus and a decoding apparatus to which the process and / or the configuration described in each aspect of the present disclosure can be applied, and the processing and / or the process described in each aspect of the present disclosure The configuration can also be implemented in a coding apparatus and a decoding apparatus that are different from the first embodiment.
まず、後述する本開示の各態様で説明する処理および/または構成を適用可能な符号化装置および復号化装置の一例として、実施の形態1の概要を説明する。ただし、実施の形態1は、本開示の各態様で説明する処理および/または構成を適用可能な符号化装置および復号化装置の一例にすぎず、本開示の各態様で説明する処理および/または構成は、実施の形態1とは異なる符号化装置および復号化装置においても実施可能である。
First, an outline of the first embodiment will be described as an example of an encoding apparatus and a decoding apparatus to which the process and / or the configuration described in each aspect of the present disclosure described later can be applied. However,
実施の形態1に対して本開示の各態様で説明する処理および/または構成を適用する場合、例えば以下のいずれかを行ってもよい。
When the processing and / or configuration described in each aspect of the present disclosure is applied to Embodiment 1, for example, any of the following may be performed.
(1)実施の形態1の符号化装置または復号化装置に対して、当該符号化装置または復号化装置を構成する複数の構成要素のうち、本開示の各態様で説明する構成要素に対応する構成要素を、本開示の各態様で説明する構成要素に置き換えること
(2)実施の形態1の符号化装置または復号化装置に対して、当該符号化装置または復号化装置を構成する複数の構成要素のうち一部の構成要素について機能または実施する処理の追加、置き換え、削除などの任意の変更を施した上で、本開示の各態様で説明する構成要素に対応する構成要素を、本開示の各態様で説明する構成要素に置き換えること
(3)実施の形態1の符号化装置または復号化装置が実施する方法に対して、処理の追加、および/または当該方法に含まれる複数の処理のうちの一部の処理について置き換え、削除などの任意の変更を施した上で、本開示の各態様で説明する処理に対応する処理を、本開示の各態様で説明する処理に置き換えること
(4)実施の形態1の符号化装置または復号化装置を構成する複数の構成要素のうちの一部の構成要素を、本開示の各態様で説明する構成要素、本開示の各態様で説明する構成要素が備える機能の一部を備える構成要素、または本開示の各態様で説明する構成要素が実施する処理の一部を実施する構成要素と組み合わせて実施すること
(5)実施の形態1の符号化装置または復号化装置を構成する複数の構成要素のうちの一部の構成要素が備える機能の一部を備える構成要素、または実施の形態1の符号化装置または復号化装置を構成する複数の構成要素のうちの一部の構成要素が実施する処理の一部を実施する構成要素を、本開示の各態様で説明する構成要素、本開示の各態様で説明する構成要素が備える機能の一部を備える構成要素、または本開示の各態様で説明する構成要素が実施する処理の一部を実施する構成要素と組み合わせて実施すること
(6)実施の形態1の符号化装置または復号化装置が実施する方法に対して、当該方法に含まれる複数の処理のうち、本開示の各態様で説明する処理に対応する処理を、本開示の各態様で説明する処理に置き換えること
(7)実施の形態1の符号化装置または復号化装置が実施する方法に含まれる複数の処理のうちの一部の処理を、本開示の各態様で説明する処理と組み合わせて実施すること (1) The encoding apparatus or the decoding apparatus according to the first embodiment corresponds to the constituent elements described in each aspect of the present disclosure among a plurality of constituent elements that configure the encoding apparatus or the decoding apparatus. Replacing a component with a component described in each aspect of the present disclosure (2) A plurality of configurations constituting the encoding device or the decoding device with respect to the encoding device or the decoding device of the first embodiment A component corresponding to the component described in each aspect of the present disclosure, after any change such as addition, replacement, or deletion of a function or processing to be performed on a part of components among elements, is disclosed (3) Addition of processing to the method performed by the encoding apparatus or the decoding apparatus of the first embodiment, and / or a plurality of processes included in the method home Replacing a process corresponding to the process described in each aspect of the present disclosure with the process described in each aspect of the present disclosure after replacing some of the processes and arbitrary changes such as deletion. The component described in each aspect of the present disclosure, the component described in each aspect of the present disclosure is a component of a part of the plurality of components constituting the encoding apparatus or the decoding apparatus of the first aspect Implementing in combination with a component having a part of the functions to be provided or a component performing a part of the process performed by the component described in each aspect of the present disclosure (5) The encoding apparatus according to the first embodiment Or a component having a part of functions provided by a part of a plurality of components constituting the decoding apparatus, or a plurality of components constituting the coding apparatus or the decoding apparatus of the first embodiment Part of A component performing a part of the process performed by the component is a component described in each aspect of the present disclosure, a component provided with a part of the function of the component described in each aspect of the present disclosure, or the present Implementing in combination with a component that performs part of the processing performed by the components described in each aspect of the disclosure (6) For the method performed by the encoding apparatus or the decoding apparatus according to the first embodiment Replacing the processing corresponding to the processing described in each aspect of the present disclosure among the plurality of processing included in the method with the processing described in each aspect of the present disclosure (7) The encoding apparatus according to the first embodiment or Implementing some of the plurality of processes included in the method performed by the decoding device in combination with the processes described in each aspect of the present disclosure
(2)実施の形態1の符号化装置または復号化装置に対して、当該符号化装置または復号化装置を構成する複数の構成要素のうち一部の構成要素について機能または実施する処理の追加、置き換え、削除などの任意の変更を施した上で、本開示の各態様で説明する構成要素に対応する構成要素を、本開示の各態様で説明する構成要素に置き換えること
(3)実施の形態1の符号化装置または復号化装置が実施する方法に対して、処理の追加、および/または当該方法に含まれる複数の処理のうちの一部の処理について置き換え、削除などの任意の変更を施した上で、本開示の各態様で説明する処理に対応する処理を、本開示の各態様で説明する処理に置き換えること
(4)実施の形態1の符号化装置または復号化装置を構成する複数の構成要素のうちの一部の構成要素を、本開示の各態様で説明する構成要素、本開示の各態様で説明する構成要素が備える機能の一部を備える構成要素、または本開示の各態様で説明する構成要素が実施する処理の一部を実施する構成要素と組み合わせて実施すること
(5)実施の形態1の符号化装置または復号化装置を構成する複数の構成要素のうちの一部の構成要素が備える機能の一部を備える構成要素、または実施の形態1の符号化装置または復号化装置を構成する複数の構成要素のうちの一部の構成要素が実施する処理の一部を実施する構成要素を、本開示の各態様で説明する構成要素、本開示の各態様で説明する構成要素が備える機能の一部を備える構成要素、または本開示の各態様で説明する構成要素が実施する処理の一部を実施する構成要素と組み合わせて実施すること
(6)実施の形態1の符号化装置または復号化装置が実施する方法に対して、当該方法に含まれる複数の処理のうち、本開示の各態様で説明する処理に対応する処理を、本開示の各態様で説明する処理に置き換えること
(7)実施の形態1の符号化装置または復号化装置が実施する方法に含まれる複数の処理のうちの一部の処理を、本開示の各態様で説明する処理と組み合わせて実施すること (1) The encoding apparatus or the decoding apparatus according to the first embodiment corresponds to the constituent elements described in each aspect of the present disclosure among a plurality of constituent elements that configure the encoding apparatus or the decoding apparatus. Replacing a component with a component described in each aspect of the present disclosure (2) A plurality of configurations constituting the encoding device or the decoding device with respect to the encoding device or the decoding device of the first embodiment A component corresponding to the component described in each aspect of the present disclosure, after any change such as addition, replacement, or deletion of a function or processing to be performed on a part of components among elements, is disclosed (3) Addition of processing to the method performed by the encoding apparatus or the decoding apparatus of the first embodiment, and / or a plurality of processes included in the method home Replacing a process corresponding to the process described in each aspect of the present disclosure with the process described in each aspect of the present disclosure after replacing some of the processes and arbitrary changes such as deletion. The component described in each aspect of the present disclosure, the component described in each aspect of the present disclosure is a component of a part of the plurality of components constituting the encoding apparatus or the decoding apparatus of the first aspect Implementing in combination with a component having a part of the functions to be provided or a component performing a part of the process performed by the component described in each aspect of the present disclosure (5) The encoding apparatus according to the first embodiment Or a component having a part of functions provided by a part of a plurality of components constituting the decoding apparatus, or a plurality of components constituting the coding apparatus or the decoding apparatus of the first embodiment Part of A component performing a part of the process performed by the component is a component described in each aspect of the present disclosure, a component provided with a part of the function of the component described in each aspect of the present disclosure, or the present Implementing in combination with a component that performs part of the processing performed by the components described in each aspect of the disclosure (6) For the method performed by the encoding apparatus or the decoding apparatus according to the first embodiment Replacing the processing corresponding to the processing described in each aspect of the present disclosure among the plurality of processing included in the method with the processing described in each aspect of the present disclosure (7) The encoding apparatus according to the first embodiment or Implementing some of the plurality of processes included in the method performed by the decoding device in combination with the processes described in each aspect of the present disclosure
なお、本開示の各態様で説明する処理および/または構成の実施の仕方は、上記の例に限定されるものではない。例えば、実施の形態1において開示する動画像/画像符号化装置または動画像/画像復号化装置とは異なる目的で利用される装置において実施されてもよいし、各態様において説明した処理および/または構成を単独で実施してもよい。また、異なる態様において説明した処理および/または構成を組み合わせて実施してもよい。
Note that the manner of implementation of the processing and / or configuration described in each aspect of the present disclosure is not limited to the above example. For example, it may be implemented in an apparatus used for a purpose different from the moving picture / image coding apparatus or the moving picture / image decoding apparatus disclosed in the first embodiment, or the process and / or the process described in each aspect. The configuration may be implemented alone. Also, the processes and / or configurations described in the different embodiments may be implemented in combination.
[符号化装置の概要]
まず、実施の形態1に係る符号化装置の概要を説明する。図1は、実施の形態1に係る符号化装置100の機能構成を示すブロック図である。符号化装置100は、動画像/画像をブロック単位で符号化する動画像/画像符号化装置である。 [Overview of Encoding Device]
First, an outline of the coding apparatus according toEmbodiment 1 will be described. FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration of coding apparatus 100 according to the first embodiment. The encoding device 100 is a moving image / image coding device that encodes a moving image / image in units of blocks.
まず、実施の形態1に係る符号化装置の概要を説明する。図1は、実施の形態1に係る符号化装置100の機能構成を示すブロック図である。符号化装置100は、動画像/画像をブロック単位で符号化する動画像/画像符号化装置である。 [Overview of Encoding Device]
First, an outline of the coding apparatus according to
図1に示すように、符号化装置100は、画像をブロック単位で符号化する装置であって、分割部102と、減算部104と、変換部106と、量子化部108と、エントロピー符号化部110と、逆量子化部112と、逆変換部114と、加算部116と、ブロックメモリ118と、ループフィルタ部120と、フレームメモリ122と、イントラ予測部124と、インター予測部126と、予測制御部128と、を備える。
As shown in FIG. 1, the encoding apparatus 100 is an apparatus for encoding an image in units of blocks, and includes a dividing unit 102, a subtracting unit 104, a converting unit 106, a quantizing unit 108, and entropy coding. Unit 110, inverse quantization unit 112, inverse transformation unit 114, addition unit 116, block memory 118, loop filter unit 120, frame memory 122, intra prediction unit 124, inter prediction unit 126, And a prediction control unit 128.
符号化装置100は、例えば、汎用プロセッサ及びメモリにより実現される。この場合、メモリに格納されたソフトウェアプログラムがプロセッサにより実行されたときに、プロセッサは、分割部102、減算部104、変換部106、量子化部108、エントロピー符号化部110、逆量子化部112、逆変換部114、加算部116、ループフィルタ部120、イントラ予測部124、インター予測部126及び予測制御部128として機能する。また、符号化装置100は、分割部102、減算部104、変換部106、量子化部108、エントロピー符号化部110、逆量子化部112、逆変換部114、加算部116、ループフィルタ部120、イントラ予測部124、インター予測部126及び予測制御部128に対応する専用の1以上の電子回路として実現されてもよい。
The encoding device 100 is realized by, for example, a general-purpose processor and a memory. In this case, when the software program stored in the memory is executed by the processor, the processor controls the division unit 102, the subtraction unit 104, the conversion unit 106, the quantization unit 108, the entropy coding unit 110, and the dequantization unit 112. The inverse transform unit 114, the addition unit 116, the loop filter unit 120, the intra prediction unit 124, the inter prediction unit 126, and the prediction control unit 128 function. In addition, coding apparatus 100 includes division section 102, subtraction section 104, conversion section 106, quantization section 108, entropy coding section 110, inverse quantization section 112, inverse conversion section 114, addition section 116, and loop filter section 120. , And may be realized as one or more dedicated electronic circuits corresponding to the intra prediction unit 124, the inter prediction unit 126, and the prediction control unit 128.
以下に、符号化装置100に含まれる各構成要素について説明する。
Each component included in the encoding device 100 will be described below.
[分割部]
分割部102は、入力動画像に含まれる各ピクチャを複数のブロックに分割し、各ブロックを減算部104に出力する。例えば、分割部102は、まず、ピクチャを固定サイズ(例えば128x128)のブロックに分割する。この固定サイズのブロックは、符号化ツリーユニット(CTU)と呼ばれることがある。そして、分割部102は、再帰的な四分木(quadtree)及び/又は二分木(binary tree)ブロック分割に基づいて、固定サイズのブロックの各々を可変サイズ(例えば64x64以下)のブロックに分割する。この可変サイズのブロックは、符号化ユニット(CU)、予測ユニット(PU)あるいは変換ユニット(TU)と呼ばれることがある。なお、本実施の形態では、CU、PU及びTUは区別される必要はなく、ピクチャ内の一部又はすべてのブロックがCU、PU、TUの処理単位となってもよい。 [Division]
The dividingunit 102 divides each picture included in the input moving image into a plurality of blocks, and outputs each block to the subtracting unit 104. For example, the division unit 102 first divides a picture into blocks of a fixed size (for example, 128 × 128). This fixed size block may be referred to as a coding tree unit (CTU). Then, the dividing unit 102 divides each of fixed size blocks into blocks of variable size (for example, 64 × 64 or less) based on recursive quadtree and / or binary tree block division. . This variable sized block may be referred to as a coding unit (CU), a prediction unit (PU) or a transform unit (TU). In the present embodiment, CUs, PUs, and TUs need not be distinguished, and some or all of the blocks in a picture may be processing units of CUs, PUs, and TUs.
分割部102は、入力動画像に含まれる各ピクチャを複数のブロックに分割し、各ブロックを減算部104に出力する。例えば、分割部102は、まず、ピクチャを固定サイズ(例えば128x128)のブロックに分割する。この固定サイズのブロックは、符号化ツリーユニット(CTU)と呼ばれることがある。そして、分割部102は、再帰的な四分木(quadtree)及び/又は二分木(binary tree)ブロック分割に基づいて、固定サイズのブロックの各々を可変サイズ(例えば64x64以下)のブロックに分割する。この可変サイズのブロックは、符号化ユニット(CU)、予測ユニット(PU)あるいは変換ユニット(TU)と呼ばれることがある。なお、本実施の形態では、CU、PU及びTUは区別される必要はなく、ピクチャ内の一部又はすべてのブロックがCU、PU、TUの処理単位となってもよい。 [Division]
The dividing
図2は、実施の形態1におけるブロック分割の一例を示す図である。図2において、実線は四分木ブロック分割によるブロック境界を表し、破線は二分木ブロック分割によるブロック境界を表す。
FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example of block division in the first embodiment. In FIG. 2, solid lines represent block boundaries by quadtree block division, and broken lines represent block boundaries by binary tree block division.
ここでは、ブロック10は、128x128画素の正方形ブロック(128x128ブロック)である。この128x128ブロック10は、まず、4つの正方形の64x64ブロックに分割される(四分木ブロック分割)。
Here, the block 10 is a square block (128 × 128 block) of 128 × 128 pixels. The 128x128 block 10 is first divided into four square 64x64 blocks (quadtree block division).
左上の64x64ブロックは、さらに2つの矩形の32x64ブロックに垂直に分割され、左の32x64ブロックはさらに2つの矩形の16x64ブロックに垂直に分割される(二分木ブロック分割)。その結果、左上の64x64ブロックは、2つの16x64ブロック11、12と、32x64ブロック13とに分割される。
The upper left 64x64 block is further vertically divided into two rectangular 32x64 blocks, and the left 32x64 block is further vertically divided into two rectangular 16x64 blocks (binary block division). As a result, the upper left 64x64 block is divided into two 16x64 blocks 11, 12 and a 32x64 block 13.
右上の64x64ブロックは、2つの矩形の64x32ブロック14、15に水平に分割される(二分木ブロック分割)。
The upper right 64x64 block is divided horizontally into two rectangular 64x32 blocks 14 and 15 (binary block division).
左下の64x64ブロックは、4つの正方形の32x32ブロックに分割される(四分木ブロック分割)。4つの32x32ブロックのうち左上のブロック及び右下のブロックはさらに分割される。左上の32x32ブロックは、2つの矩形の16x32ブロックに垂直に分割され、右の16x32ブロックはさらに2つの16x16ブロックに水平に分割される(二分木ブロック分割)。右下の32x32ブロックは、2つの32x16ブロックに水平に分割される(二分木ブロック分割)。その結果、左下の64x64ブロックは、16x32ブロック16と、2つの16x16ブロック17、18と、2つの32x32ブロック19、20と、2つの32x16ブロック21、22とに分割される。
The lower left 64x64 block is divided into four square 32x32 blocks (quadtree block division). Of the four 32x32 blocks, the upper left block and the lower right block are further divided. The upper left 32x32 block is vertically divided into two rectangular 16x32 blocks, and the right 16x32 block is further horizontally split into two 16x16 blocks (binary block division). The lower right 32x32 block is divided horizontally into two 32x16 blocks (binary block division). As a result, the lower left 64x64 block is divided into a 16x32 block 16, two 16x16 blocks 17, 18, two 32x32 blocks 19, 20, and two 32x16 blocks 21, 22.
右下の64x64ブロック23は分割されない。
The lower right 64x64 block 23 is not divided.
以上のように、図2では、ブロック10は、再帰的な四分木及び二分木ブロック分割に基づいて、13個の可変サイズのブロック11~23に分割される。このような分割は、QTBT(quad-tree plus binary tree)分割と呼ばれることがある。
As described above, in FIG. 2, the block 10 is divided into thirteen variable sized blocks 11 to 23 based on recursive quadtree and binary tree block division. Such division is sometimes called quad-tree plus binary tree (QTBT) division.
なお、図2では、1つのブロックが4つ又は2つのブロックに分割されていたが(四分木又は二分木ブロック分割)、分割はこれに限定されない。例えば、1つのブロックが3つのブロックに分割されてもよい(三分木ブロック分割)。このような三分木ブロック分割を含む分割は、MBT(multi type tree)分割と呼ばれることがある。
Although one block is divided into four or two blocks (quadtree or binary tree block division) in FIG. 2, the division is not limited to this. For example, one block may be divided into three blocks (tri-tree block division). A partition including such a ternary tree block partition may be referred to as a multi type tree (MBT) partition.
[減算部]
減算部104は、分割部102によって分割されたブロック単位で原信号(原サンプル)から予測信号(予測サンプル)を減算する。つまり、減算部104は、符号化対象ブロック(以下、カレントブロックという)の予測誤差(残差ともいう)を算出する。そして、減算部104は、算出された予測誤差を変換部106に出力する。 [Subtractor]
The subtractingunit 104 subtracts a prediction signal (prediction sample) from an original signal (original sample) in block units divided by the dividing unit 102. That is, the subtraction unit 104 calculates a prediction error (also referred to as a residual) of the encoding target block (hereinafter, referred to as a current block). Then, the subtracting unit 104 outputs the calculated prediction error to the converting unit 106.
減算部104は、分割部102によって分割されたブロック単位で原信号(原サンプル)から予測信号(予測サンプル)を減算する。つまり、減算部104は、符号化対象ブロック(以下、カレントブロックという)の予測誤差(残差ともいう)を算出する。そして、減算部104は、算出された予測誤差を変換部106に出力する。 [Subtractor]
The subtracting
原信号は、符号化装置100の入力信号であり、動画像を構成する各ピクチャの画像を表す信号(例えば輝度(luma)信号及び2つの色差(chroma)信号)である。以下において、画像を表す信号をサンプルともいうこともある。
The original signal is an input signal of the coding apparatus 100, and is a signal (for example, a luminance (luma) signal and two color difference (chroma) signals) representing an image of each picture constituting a moving image. In the following, a signal representing an image may also be referred to as a sample.
[変換部]
変換部106は、空間領域の予測誤差を周波数領域の変換係数に変換し、変換係数を量子化部108に出力する。具体的には、変換部106は、例えば空間領域の予測誤差に対して予め定められた離散コサイン変換(DCT)又は離散サイン変換(DST)を行う。 [Converter]
Transform section 106 transforms the prediction error in the spatial domain into a transform coefficient in the frequency domain, and outputs the transform coefficient to quantization section 108. Specifically, the transform unit 106 performs, for example, discrete cosine transform (DCT) or discrete sine transform (DST) determined in advance on the prediction error in the spatial domain.
変換部106は、空間領域の予測誤差を周波数領域の変換係数に変換し、変換係数を量子化部108に出力する。具体的には、変換部106は、例えば空間領域の予測誤差に対して予め定められた離散コサイン変換(DCT)又は離散サイン変換(DST)を行う。 [Converter]
なお、変換部106は、複数の変換タイプの中から適応的に変換タイプを選択し、選択された変換タイプに対応する変換基底関数(transform basis function)を用いて、予測誤差を変換係数に変換してもよい。このような変換は、EMT(explicit multiple core transform)又はAMT(adaptive multiple transform)と呼ばれることがある。
Transform section 106 adaptively selects a transform type from among a plurality of transform types, and transforms the prediction error into transform coefficients using a transform basis function corresponding to the selected transform type. You may Such transformation may be referred to as explicit multiple core transform (EMT) or adaptive multiple transform (AMT).
複数の変換タイプは、例えば、DCT-II、DCT-V、DCT-VIII、DST-I及びDST-VIIを含む。図3は、各変換タイプに対応する変換基底関数を示す表である。図3においてNは入力画素の数を示す。これらの複数の変換タイプの中からの変換タイプの選択は、例えば、予測の種類(イントラ予測及びインター予測)に依存してもよいし、イントラ予測モードに依存してもよい。
The plurality of transformation types include, for example, DCT-II, DCT-V, DCT-VIII, DST-I and DST-VII. FIG. 3 is a table showing transform basis functions corresponding to each transform type. In FIG. 3, N indicates the number of input pixels. The choice of transform type from among these multiple transform types may depend, for example, on the type of prediction (intra-prediction and inter-prediction) or depending on the intra-prediction mode.
このようなEMT又はAMTを適用するか否かを示す情報(例えばAMTフラグと呼ばれる)及び選択された変換タイプを示す情報は、CUレベルで信号化される。なお、これらの情報の信号化は、CUレベルに限定される必要はなく、他のレベル(例えば、シーケンスレベル、ピクチャレベル、スライスレベル、タイルレベル又はCTUレベル)であってもよい。
Information indicating whether to apply such EMT or AMT (for example, called an AMT flag) and information indicating the selected conversion type are signaled at CU level. Note that the signaling of these pieces of information need not be limited to the CU level, but may be at other levels (eg, sequence level, picture level, slice level, tile level or CTU level).
また、変換部106は、変換係数(変換結果)を再変換してもよい。このような再変換は、AST(adaptive secondary transform)又はNSST(non-separable secondary transform)と呼ばれることがある。例えば、変換部106は、イントラ予測誤差に対応する変換係数のブロックに含まれるサブブロック(例えば4x4サブブロック)ごとに再変換を行う。NSSTを適用するか否かを示す情報及びNSSTに用いられる変換行列に関する情報は、CUレベルで信号化される。なお、これらの情報の信号化は、CUレベルに限定される必要はなく、他のレベル(例えば、シーケンスレベル、ピクチャレベル、スライスレベル、タイルレベル又はCTUレベル)であってもよい。
Also, the conversion unit 106 may re-convert the conversion coefficient (conversion result). Such reconversion may be referred to as adaptive secondary transform (AST) or non-separable secondary transform (NSST). For example, the transform unit 106 performs retransformation for each sub block (for example, 4 × 4 sub blocks) included in the block of transform coefficients corresponding to the intra prediction error. The information indicating whether to apply the NSST and the information on the transformation matrix used for the NSST are signaled at the CU level. Note that the signaling of these pieces of information need not be limited to the CU level, but may be at other levels (eg, sequence level, picture level, slice level, tile level or CTU level).
ここで、Separableな変換とは、入力の次元の数だけ方向ごとに分離して複数回変換を行う方式であり、Non-Separableな変換とは、入力が多次元であった際に2つ以上の次元をまとめて1次元とみなして、まとめて変換を行う方式である。
Here, Separable conversion is a method in which conversion is performed multiple times by separating in each direction as many as the number of dimensions of the input, and Non-Separable conversion is two or more when the input is multidimensional. This is a method of collectively converting the dimensions of 1 and 2 into one dimension.
例えば、Non-Separableな変換の1例として、入力が4×4のブロックであった場合にはそれを16個の要素を持ったひとつの配列とみなし、その配列に対して16×16の変換行列で変換処理を行うようなものが挙げられる。
For example, as an example of Non-Separable conversion, if the input is a 4 × 4 block, it is regarded as one array having 16 elements, and 16 × 16 conversion is performed on the array There is one that performs transformation processing with a matrix.
また、同様に4×4の入力ブロックを16個の要素を持ったひとつの配列とみなした後に、その配列に対してGivens回転を複数回行うようなもの(Hypercube Givens Transform)もNon-Separableな変換の例である。
Similarly, if you consider 4x4 input blocks as one array with 16 elements, you can perform multiple Givens rotation on the array (Hypercube Givens Transform) as Non-Separable as well. It is an example of conversion.
[量子化部]
量子化部108は、変換部106から出力された変換係数を量子化する。具体的には、量子化部108は、カレントブロックの変換係数を所定の走査順序で走査し、走査された変換係数に対応する量子化パラメータ(QP)に基づいて当該変換係数を量子化する。そして、量子化部108は、カレントブロックの量子化された変換係数(以下、量子化係数という)をエントロピー符号化部110及び逆量子化部112に出力する。 [Quantizer]
Thequantization unit 108 quantizes the transform coefficient output from the transform unit 106. Specifically, the quantization unit 108 scans the transform coefficient of the current block in a predetermined scan order, and quantizes the transform coefficient based on the quantization parameter (QP) corresponding to the scanned transform coefficient. Then, the quantization unit 108 outputs the quantized transform coefficient of the current block (hereinafter, referred to as a quantization coefficient) to the entropy coding unit 110 and the inverse quantization unit 112.
量子化部108は、変換部106から出力された変換係数を量子化する。具体的には、量子化部108は、カレントブロックの変換係数を所定の走査順序で走査し、走査された変換係数に対応する量子化パラメータ(QP)に基づいて当該変換係数を量子化する。そして、量子化部108は、カレントブロックの量子化された変換係数(以下、量子化係数という)をエントロピー符号化部110及び逆量子化部112に出力する。 [Quantizer]
The
所定の順序は、変換係数の量子化/逆量子化のための順序である。例えば、所定の走査順序は、周波数の昇順(低周波から高周波の順)又は降順(高周波から低周波の順)で定義される。
The predetermined order is an order for quantization / inverse quantization of transform coefficients. For example, the predetermined scan order is defined in ascending order (low frequency to high frequency) or descending order (high frequency to low frequency) of the frequency.
量子化パラメータとは、量子化ステップ(量子化幅)を定義するパラメータである。例えば、量子化パラメータの値が増加すれば量子化ステップも増加する。つまり、量子化パラメータの値が増加すれば量子化誤差が増大する。
The quantization parameter is a parameter that defines a quantization step (quantization width). For example, if the value of the quantization parameter increases, the quantization step also increases. That is, as the value of the quantization parameter increases, the quantization error increases.
[エントロピー符号化部]
エントロピー符号化部110は、量子化部108から入力である量子化係数を可変長符号化することにより符号化信号(符号化ビットストリーム)を生成する。具体的には、エントロピー符号化部110は、例えば、量子化係数を二値化し、二値信号を算術符号化する。 [Entropy coding unit]
Theentropy coding unit 110 generates a coded signal (coded bit stream) by subjecting the quantization coefficient input from the quantization unit 108 to variable-length coding. Specifically, for example, the entropy coding unit 110 binarizes the quantization coefficient and performs arithmetic coding on the binary signal.
エントロピー符号化部110は、量子化部108から入力である量子化係数を可変長符号化することにより符号化信号(符号化ビットストリーム)を生成する。具体的には、エントロピー符号化部110は、例えば、量子化係数を二値化し、二値信号を算術符号化する。 [Entropy coding unit]
The
[逆量子化部]
逆量子化部112は、量子化部108からの入力である量子化係数を逆量子化する。具体的には、逆量子化部112は、カレントブロックの量子化係数を所定の走査順序で逆量子化する。そして、逆量子化部112は、カレントブロックの逆量子化された変換係数を逆変換部114に出力する。 [Inverse quantization unit]
Theinverse quantization unit 112 inversely quantizes the quantization coefficient which is the input from the quantization unit 108. Specifically, the inverse quantization unit 112 inversely quantizes the quantization coefficient of the current block in a predetermined scan order. Then, the inverse quantization unit 112 outputs the inverse quantized transform coefficient of the current block to the inverse transform unit 114.
逆量子化部112は、量子化部108からの入力である量子化係数を逆量子化する。具体的には、逆量子化部112は、カレントブロックの量子化係数を所定の走査順序で逆量子化する。そして、逆量子化部112は、カレントブロックの逆量子化された変換係数を逆変換部114に出力する。 [Inverse quantization unit]
The
[逆変換部]
逆変換部114は、逆量子化部112からの入力である変換係数を逆変換することにより予測誤差を復元する。具体的には、逆変換部114は、変換係数に対して、変換部106による変換に対応する逆変換を行うことにより、カレントブロックの予測誤差を復元する。そして、逆変換部114は、復元された予測誤差を加算部116に出力する。 [Inverse converter]
The inverse transform unit 114 restores the prediction error by inversely transforming the transform coefficient which is the input from theinverse quantization unit 112. Specifically, the inverse transform unit 114 restores the prediction error of the current block by performing inverse transform corresponding to the transform by the transform unit 106 on the transform coefficient. Then, the inverse conversion unit 114 outputs the restored prediction error to the addition unit 116.
逆変換部114は、逆量子化部112からの入力である変換係数を逆変換することにより予測誤差を復元する。具体的には、逆変換部114は、変換係数に対して、変換部106による変換に対応する逆変換を行うことにより、カレントブロックの予測誤差を復元する。そして、逆変換部114は、復元された予測誤差を加算部116に出力する。 [Inverse converter]
The inverse transform unit 114 restores the prediction error by inversely transforming the transform coefficient which is the input from the
なお、復元された予測誤差は、量子化により情報が失われているので、減算部104が算出した予測誤差と一致しない。すなわち、復元された予測誤差には、量子化誤差が含まれている。
The restored prediction error does not match the prediction error calculated by the subtracting unit 104 because the information is lost due to quantization. That is, the restored prediction error includes the quantization error.
[加算部]
加算部116は、逆変換部114からの入力である予測誤差と予測制御部128からの入力である予測サンプルとを加算することによりカレントブロックを再構成する。そして、加算部116は、再構成されたブロックをブロックメモリ118及びループフィルタ部120に出力する。再構成ブロックは、ローカル復号ブロックと呼ばれることもある。 [Adder]
Theaddition unit 116 reconstructs the current block by adding the prediction error, which is the input from the inverse conversion unit 114, and the prediction sample, which is the input from the prediction control unit 128. Then, the addition unit 116 outputs the reconstructed block to the block memory 118 and the loop filter unit 120. Reconstruction blocks may also be referred to as local decoding blocks.
加算部116は、逆変換部114からの入力である予測誤差と予測制御部128からの入力である予測サンプルとを加算することによりカレントブロックを再構成する。そして、加算部116は、再構成されたブロックをブロックメモリ118及びループフィルタ部120に出力する。再構成ブロックは、ローカル復号ブロックと呼ばれることもある。 [Adder]
The
[ブロックメモリ]
ブロックメモリ118は、イントラ予測で参照されるブロックであって符号化対象ピクチャ(以下、カレントピクチャという)内のブロックを格納するための記憶部である。具体的には、ブロックメモリ118は、加算部116から出力された再構成ブロックを格納する。 [Block memory]
Theblock memory 118 is a storage unit for storing a block in an encoding target picture (hereinafter referred to as a current picture) which is a block referred to in intra prediction. Specifically, the block memory 118 stores the reconstructed block output from the adding unit 116.
ブロックメモリ118は、イントラ予測で参照されるブロックであって符号化対象ピクチャ(以下、カレントピクチャという)内のブロックを格納するための記憶部である。具体的には、ブロックメモリ118は、加算部116から出力された再構成ブロックを格納する。 [Block memory]
The
[ループフィルタ部]
ループフィルタ部120は、加算部116によって再構成されたブロックにループフィルタを施し、フィルタされた再構成ブロックをフレームメモリ122に出力する。ループフィルタとは、符号化ループ内で用いられるフィルタ(インループフィルタ)であり、例えば、デブロッキング・フィルタ(DF)、サンプルアダプティブオフセット(SAO)及びアダプティブループフィルタ(ALF)などを含む。 [Loop filter section]
Theloop filter unit 120 applies a loop filter to the block reconstructed by the adding unit 116, and outputs the filtered reconstructed block to the frame memory 122. The loop filter is a filter (in-loop filter) used in the coding loop, and includes, for example, a deblocking filter (DF), a sample adaptive offset (SAO), an adaptive loop filter (ALF) and the like.
ループフィルタ部120は、加算部116によって再構成されたブロックにループフィルタを施し、フィルタされた再構成ブロックをフレームメモリ122に出力する。ループフィルタとは、符号化ループ内で用いられるフィルタ(インループフィルタ)であり、例えば、デブロッキング・フィルタ(DF)、サンプルアダプティブオフセット(SAO)及びアダプティブループフィルタ(ALF)などを含む。 [Loop filter section]
The
ALFでは、符号化歪みを除去するための最小二乗誤差フィルタが適用され、例えばカレントブロック内の2x2サブブロックごとに、局所的な勾配(gradient)の方向及び活性度(activity)に基づいて複数のフィルタの中から選択された1つのフィルタが適用される。
In ALF, a least squares error filter is applied to remove coding distortion, for example, multiple 2x2 subblocks in the current block, based on local gradient direction and activity. One filter selected from the filters is applied.
具体的には、まず、サブブロック(例えば2x2サブブロック)が複数のクラス(例えば15又は25クラス)に分類される。サブブロックの分類は、勾配の方向及び活性度に基づいて行われる。例えば、勾配の方向値D(例えば0~2又は0~4)と勾配の活性値A(例えば0~4)とを用いて分類値C(例えばC=5D+A)が算出される。そして、分類値Cに基づいて、サブブロックが複数のクラス(例えば15又は25クラス)に分類される。
Specifically, first, subblocks (for example, 2x2 subblocks) are classified into a plurality of classes (for example, 15 or 25 classes). Sub-block classification is performed based on the gradient direction and activity. For example, the classification value C (for example, C = 5 D + A) is calculated using the gradient direction value D (for example, 0 to 2 or 0 to 4) and the gradient activity value A (for example, 0 to 4). Then, based on the classification value C, the sub-blocks are classified into a plurality of classes (for example, 15 or 25 classes).
勾配の方向値Dは、例えば、複数の方向(例えば水平、垂直及び2つの対角方向)の勾配を比較することにより導出される。また、勾配の活性値Aは、例えば、複数の方向の勾配を加算し、加算結果を量子化することにより導出される。
The direction value D of the gradient is derived, for example, by comparing gradients in a plurality of directions (for example, horizontal, vertical and two diagonal directions). The gradient activation value A is derived, for example, by adding gradients in a plurality of directions and quantizing the addition result.
このような分類の結果に基づいて、複数のフィルタの中からサブブロックのためのフィルタが決定される。
Based on the result of such classification, a filter for the subblock is determined among the plurality of filters.
ALFで用いられるフィルタの形状としては例えば円対称形状が利用される。図4A~図4Cは、ALFで用いられるフィルタの形状の複数の例を示す図である。図4Aは、5x5ダイヤモンド形状フィルタを示し、図4Bは、7x7ダイヤモンド形状フィルタを示し、図4Cは、9x9ダイヤモンド形状フィルタを示す。フィルタの形状を示す情報は、ピクチャレベルで信号化される。なお、フィルタの形状を示す情報の信号化は、ピクチャレベルに限定される必要はなく、他のレベル(例えば、シーケンスレベル、スライスレベル、タイルレベル、CTUレベル又はCUレベル)であってもよい。
For example, a circularly symmetrical shape is used as the shape of the filter used in ALF. FIGS. 4A to 4C are diagrams showing a plurality of examples of filter shapes used in ALF. FIG. 4A shows a 5 × 5 diamond shaped filter, FIG. 4B shows a 7 × 7 diamond shaped filter, and FIG. 4C shows a 9 × 9 diamond shaped filter. Information indicating the shape of the filter is signaled at the picture level. Note that the signaling of the information indicating the shape of the filter does not have to be limited to the picture level, and may be another level (for example, sequence level, slice level, tile level, CTU level or CU level).
ALFのオン/オフは、例えば、ピクチャレベル又はCUレベルで決定される。例えば、輝度についてはCUレベルでALFを適用するか否かが決定され、色差についてはピクチャレベルでALFを適用するか否かが決定される。ALFのオン/オフを示す情報は、ピクチャレベル又はCUレベルで信号化される。なお、ALFのオン/オフを示す情報の信号化は、ピクチャレベル又はCUレベルに限定される必要はなく、他のレベル(例えば、シーケンスレベル、スライスレベル、タイルレベル又はCTUレベル)であってもよい。
The on / off of the ALF is determined, for example, at the picture level or the CU level. For example, as to luminance, it is determined whether to apply ALF at the CU level, and as to color difference, it is determined whether to apply ALF at the picture level. Information indicating on / off of ALF is signaled at picture level or CU level. Note that the signaling of the information indicating ALF on / off need not be limited to the picture level or CU level, and may be other levels (eg, sequence level, slice level, tile level or CTU level) Good.
選択可能な複数のフィルタ(例えば15又は25までのフィルタ)の係数セットは、ピクチャレベルで信号化される。なお、係数セットの信号化は、ピクチャレベルに限定される必要はなく、他のレベル(例えば、シーケンスレベル、スライスレベル、タイルレベル、CTUレベル、CUレベル又はサブブロックレベル)であってもよい。
The set of coefficients of the plurality of selectable filters (eg, up to 15 or 25 filters) is signaled at the picture level. Note that the signaling of the coefficient set need not be limited to the picture level, but may be other levels (eg, sequence level, slice level, tile level, CTU level, CU level or sub-block level).
[フレームメモリ]
フレームメモリ122は、インター予測に用いられる参照ピクチャを格納するための記憶部であり、フレームバッファと呼ばれることもある。具体的には、フレームメモリ122は、ループフィルタ部120によってフィルタされた再構成ブロックを格納する。 [Frame memory]
Theframe memory 122 is a storage unit for storing a reference picture used for inter prediction, and may be referred to as a frame buffer. Specifically, the frame memory 122 stores the reconstructed block filtered by the loop filter unit 120.
フレームメモリ122は、インター予測に用いられる参照ピクチャを格納するための記憶部であり、フレームバッファと呼ばれることもある。具体的には、フレームメモリ122は、ループフィルタ部120によってフィルタされた再構成ブロックを格納する。 [Frame memory]
The
[イントラ予測部]
イントラ予測部124は、ブロックメモリ118に格納されたカレントピクチャ内のブロックを参照してカレントブロックのイントラ予測(画面内予測ともいう)を行うことで、予測信号(イントラ予測信号)を生成する。具体的には、イントラ予測部124は、カレントブロックに隣接するブロックのサンプル(例えば輝度値、色差値)を参照してイントラ予測を行うことでイントラ予測信号を生成し、イントラ予測信号を予測制御部128に出力する。 [Intra prediction unit]
Theintra prediction unit 124 generates a prediction signal (intra prediction signal) by performing intra prediction (also referred to as in-screen prediction) of the current block with reference to a block in the current picture stored in the block memory 118. Specifically, the intra prediction unit 124 generates an intra prediction signal by performing intra prediction with reference to samples (for example, luminance value, color difference value) of a block adjacent to the current block, and performs prediction control on the intra prediction signal. Output to the part 128.
イントラ予測部124は、ブロックメモリ118に格納されたカレントピクチャ内のブロックを参照してカレントブロックのイントラ予測(画面内予測ともいう)を行うことで、予測信号(イントラ予測信号)を生成する。具体的には、イントラ予測部124は、カレントブロックに隣接するブロックのサンプル(例えば輝度値、色差値)を参照してイントラ予測を行うことでイントラ予測信号を生成し、イントラ予測信号を予測制御部128に出力する。 [Intra prediction unit]
The
例えば、イントラ予測部124は、予め規定された複数のイントラ予測モードのうちの1つを用いてイントラ予測を行う。複数のイントラ予測モードは、1以上の非方向性予測モードと、複数の方向性予測モードと、を含む。
For example, the intra prediction unit 124 performs intra prediction using one of a plurality of predefined intra prediction modes. The plurality of intra prediction modes include one or more non-directional prediction modes and a plurality of directional prediction modes.
1以上の非方向性予測モードは、例えばH.265/HEVC(High-Efficiency Video Coding)規格(非特許文献1)で規定されたPlanar予測モード及びDC予測モードを含む。
One or more non-directional prediction modes are described in, for example, H.264. It includes Planar prediction mode and DC prediction mode defined in H.265 / High-Efficiency Video Coding (HEVC) standard (Non-Patent Document 1).
複数の方向性予測モードは、例えばH.265/HEVC規格で規定された33方向の予測モードを含む。なお、複数の方向性予測モードは、33方向に加えてさらに32方向の予測モード(合計で65個の方向性予測モード)を含んでもよい。図5Aは、イントラ予測における67個のイントラ予測モード(2個の非方向性予測モード及び65個の方向性予測モード)を示す図である。実線矢印は、H.265/HEVC規格で規定された33方向を表し、破線矢印は、追加された32方向を表す。
The plurality of directionality prediction modes are, for example, H.264. It includes 33 directional prediction modes defined by the H.265 / HEVC standard. In addition to the 33 directions, the plurality of directionality prediction modes may further include 32 direction prediction modes (a total of 65 directionality prediction modes). FIG. 5A is a diagram showing 67 intra prediction modes (2 non-directional prediction modes and 65 directional prediction modes) in intra prediction. Solid arrows indicate H. A broken line arrow represents the added 32 directions, which represents the 33 directions defined in the H.265 / HEVC standard.
なお、色差ブロックのイントラ予測において、輝度ブロックが参照されてもよい。つまり、カレントブロックの輝度成分に基づいて、カレントブロックの色差成分が予測されてもよい。このようなイントラ予測は、CCLM(cross-component linear model)予測と呼ばれることがある。このような輝度ブロックを参照する色差ブロックのイントラ予測モード(例えばCCLMモードと呼ばれる)は、色差ブロックのイントラ予測モードの1つとして加えられてもよい。
Note that a luminance block may be referred to in intra prediction of a chrominance block. That is, the chrominance component of the current block may be predicted based on the luminance component of the current block. Such intra prediction may be referred to as cross-component linear model (CCLM) prediction. The intra prediction mode (for example, referred to as a CCLM mode) of a chrominance block referencing such a luminance block may be added as one of the intra prediction modes of the chrominance block.
イントラ予測部124は、水平/垂直方向の参照画素の勾配に基づいてイントラ予測後の画素値を補正してもよい。このような補正をともなうイントラ予測は、PDPC(position dependent intra prediction combination)と呼ばれることがある。PDPCの適用の有無を示す情報(例えばPDPCフラグと呼ばれる)は、例えばCUレベルで信号化される。なお、この情報の信号化は、CUレベルに限定される必要はなく、他のレベル(例えば、シーケンスレベル、ピクチャレベル、スライスレベル、タイルレベル又はCTUレベル)であってもよい。
The intra prediction unit 124 may correct the pixel value after intra prediction based on the gradient of the reference pixel in the horizontal / vertical directions. Intra prediction with such correction is sometimes called position dependent intra prediction combination (PDPC). Information indicating the presence or absence of application of PDPC (for example, called a PDPC flag) is signaled, for example, at CU level. Note that the signaling of this information need not be limited to the CU level, but may be at other levels (eg, sequence level, picture level, slice level, tile level or CTU level).
[インター予測部]
インター予測部126は、フレームメモリ122に格納された参照ピクチャであってカレントピクチャとは異なる参照ピクチャを参照してカレントブロックのインター予測(画面間予測ともいう)を行うことで、予測信号(インター予測信号)を生成する。インター予測は、カレントブロック又はカレントブロック内のサブブロック(例えば4x4ブロック)の単位で行われる。例えば、インター予測部126は、カレントブロック又はサブブロックについて参照ピクチャ内で動き探索(motion estimation)を行う。そして、インター予測部126は、動き探索により得られた動き情報(例えば動きベクトル)を用いて動き補償を行うことでカレントブロック又はサブブロックのインター予測信号を生成する。そして、インター予測部126は、生成されたインター予測信号を予測制御部128に出力する。 [Inter prediction unit]
Theinter prediction unit 126 performs inter prediction (also referred to as inter-frame prediction) of a current block with reference to a reference picture that is a reference picture stored in the frame memory 122 and that is different from the current picture. Generate a prediction signal). Inter prediction is performed in units of a current block or sub blocks (for example, 4 × 4 blocks) in the current block. For example, the inter prediction unit 126 performs motion estimation on the current block or sub block in the reference picture. Then, the inter prediction unit 126 generates an inter prediction signal of the current block or sub block by performing motion compensation using motion information (for example, a motion vector) obtained by the motion search. Then, the inter prediction unit 126 outputs the generated inter prediction signal to the prediction control unit 128.
インター予測部126は、フレームメモリ122に格納された参照ピクチャであってカレントピクチャとは異なる参照ピクチャを参照してカレントブロックのインター予測(画面間予測ともいう)を行うことで、予測信号(インター予測信号)を生成する。インター予測は、カレントブロック又はカレントブロック内のサブブロック(例えば4x4ブロック)の単位で行われる。例えば、インター予測部126は、カレントブロック又はサブブロックについて参照ピクチャ内で動き探索(motion estimation)を行う。そして、インター予測部126は、動き探索により得られた動き情報(例えば動きベクトル)を用いて動き補償を行うことでカレントブロック又はサブブロックのインター予測信号を生成する。そして、インター予測部126は、生成されたインター予測信号を予測制御部128に出力する。 [Inter prediction unit]
The
動き補償に用いられた動き情報は信号化される。動きベクトルの信号化には、予測動きベクトル(motion vector predictor)が用いられてもよい。つまり、動きベクトルと予測動きベクトルとの間の差分が信号化されてもよい。
The motion information used for motion compensation is signaled. A motion vector predictor may be used to signal the motion vector. That is, the difference between the motion vector and the predicted motion vector may be signaled.
なお、動き探索により得られたカレントブロックの動き情報だけでなく、隣接ブロックの動き情報も用いて、インター予測信号が生成されてもよい。具体的には、動き探索により得られた動き情報に基づく予測信号と、隣接ブロックの動き情報に基づく予測信号と、を重み付け加算することにより、カレントブロック内のサブブロック単位でインター予測信号が生成されてもよい。このようなインター予測(動き補償)は、OBMC(overlapped block motion compensation)と呼ばれることがある。
Note that the inter prediction signal may be generated using not only the motion information of the current block obtained by the motion search but also the motion information of the adjacent block. Specifically, the inter prediction signal is generated in units of sub blocks in the current block by weighting and adding a prediction signal based on motion information obtained by motion search and a prediction signal based on motion information of an adjacent block. It may be done. Such inter prediction (motion compensation) may be called OBMC (overlapped block motion compensation).
このようなOBMCモードでは、OBMCのためのサブブロックのサイズを示す情報(例えばOBMCブロックサイズと呼ばれる)は、シーケンスレベルで信号化される。また、OBMCモードを適用するか否かを示す情報(例えばOBMCフラグと呼ばれる)は、CUレベルで信号化される。なお、これらの情報の信号化のレベルは、シーケンスレベル及びCUレベルに限定される必要はなく、他のレベル(例えばピクチャレベル、スライスレベル、タイルレベル、CTUレベル又はサブブロックレベル)であってもよい。
In such OBMC mode, information indicating the size of sub-blocks for OBMC (for example, called OBMC block size) is signaled at the sequence level. Also, information indicating whether or not to apply the OBMC mode (for example, called an OBMC flag) is signaled at the CU level. Note that the level of signaling of these pieces of information need not be limited to the sequence level and the CU level, and may be other levels (eg, picture level, slice level, tile level, CTU level or subblock level) Good.
OBMCモードについて、より具体的に説明する。図5B及び図5Cは、OBMC処理による予測画像補正処理の概要を説明するためのフローチャート及び概念図である。
The OBMC mode will be described more specifically. FIG. 5B and FIG. 5C are a flowchart and a conceptual diagram for explaining an outline of predicted image correction processing by OBMC processing.
まず、符号化対象ブロックに割り当てられた動きベクトル(MV)を用いて通常の動き補償による予測画像(Pred)を取得する。
First, a predicted image (Pred) by normal motion compensation is acquired using the motion vector (MV) assigned to the encoding target block.
次に、符号化済みの左隣接ブロックの動きベクトル(MV_L)を符号化対象ブロックに適用して予測画像(Pred_L)を取得し、前記予測画像とPred_Lとを重みを付けて重ね合わせることで予測画像の1回目の補正を行う。
Next, the motion vector (MV_L) of the encoded left adjacent block is applied to the current block to obtain a predicted image (Pred_L), and the predicted image and Pred_L are weighted and superimposed. Perform the first correction of the image.
同様に、符号化済みの上隣接ブロックの動きベクトル(MV_U)を符号化対象ブロックに適用して予測画像(Pred_U)を取得し、前記1回目の補正を行った予測画像とPred_Uとを重みを付けて重ね合わせることで予測画像の2回目の補正を行い、それを最終的な予測画像とする。
Similarly, the motion vector (MV_U) of the encoded upper adjacent block is applied to the coding target block to obtain a predicted image (Pred_U), and the predicted image subjected to the first correction and the Pred_U are weighted. A second correction of the predicted image is performed by adding and superposing, and this is made a final predicted image.
なお、ここでは左隣接ブロックと上隣接ブロックを用いた2段階の補正の方法を説明したが、右隣接ブロックや下隣接ブロックを用いて2段階よりも多い回数の補正を行う構成とすることも可能である。
Although the two-step correction method using the left adjacent block and the upper adjacent block has been described here, the right adjacent block and the lower adjacent block may be used to perform correction more than two steps. It is possible.
なお、重ね合わせを行う領域はブロック全体の画素領域ではなく、ブロック境界近傍の一部の領域のみであってもよい。
The area to be superimposed may not be the pixel area of the entire block, but only a partial area near the block boundary.
なお、ここでは1枚の参照ピクチャからの予測画像補正処理について説明したが、複数枚の参照ピクチャから予測画像を補正する場合も同様であり、各々の参照ピクチャから補正した予測画像を取得した後に、得られた予測画像をさらに重ね合わせることで最終的な予測画像とする。
Although the predicted image correction processing from one reference picture has been described here, the same applies to the case where a predicted image is corrected from a plurality of reference pictures, and after obtaining a corrected predicted image from each reference picture The final predicted image is obtained by further superimposing the obtained predicted images.
なお、前記処理対象ブロックは、予測ブロック単位であっても、予測ブロックをさらに分割したサブブロック単位であってもよい。
The processing target block may be a prediction block unit or a sub block unit obtained by further dividing the prediction block.
OBMC処理を適用するかどうかの判定の方法として、例えば、OBMC処理を適用するかどうかを示す信号であるobmc_flagを用いる方法がある。具体的な一例としては、符号化装置において、符号化対象ブロックが動きの複雑な領域に属しているかどうかを判定し、動きの複雑な領域に属している場合はobmc_flagとして値1を設定してOBMC処理を適用して符号化を行い、動きの複雑な領域に属していない場合はobmc_flagとして値0を設定してOBMC処理を適用せずに符号化を行う。一方、復号化装置では、ストリームに記述されたobmc_flagを復号化することで、その値に応じてOBMC処理を適用するかどうかを切替えて復号化を行う。
As a method of determining whether to apply the OBMC process, for example, there is a method using obmc_flag which is a signal indicating whether to apply the OBMC process. As a specific example, in the encoding apparatus, it is determined whether the encoding target block belongs to a complex area of motion, and if it belongs to a complex area of motion, the value 1 is set as obmc_flag. The encoding is performed by applying the OBMC processing, and when not belonging to the complex region of motion, the value 0 is set as the obmc_flag and the encoding is performed without applying the OBMC processing. On the other hand, the decoding apparatus decodes the obmc_flag described in the stream, and switches whether to apply the OBMC process according to the value to perform decoding.
なお、動き情報は信号化されずに、復号装置側で導出されてもよい。例えば、H.265/HEVC規格で規定されたマージモードが用いられてもよい。また例えば、復号装置側で動き探索を行うことにより動き情報が導出されてもよい。この場合、カレントブロックの画素値を用いずに動き探索が行われる。
The motion information may be derived on the decoding device side without being signalized. For example, H. The merge mode defined in the H.265 / HEVC standard may be used. Also, for example, motion information may be derived by performing motion search on the decoding device side. In this case, motion search is performed without using the pixel value of the current block.
ここで、復号装置側で動き探索を行うモードについて説明する。この復号装置側で動き探索を行うモードは、PMMVD(pattern matched motion vector derivation)モード又はFRUC(frame rate up-conversion)モードと呼ばれることがある。
Here, a mode in which motion estimation is performed on the decoding device side will be described. The mode in which motion estimation is performed on the side of the decoding apparatus may be referred to as a pattern matched motion vector derivation (PMMVD) mode or a frame rate up-conversion (FRUC) mode.
FRUC処理の一例を図5Dに示す。まず、カレントブロックに空間的又は時間的に隣接する符号化済みブロックの動きベクトルを参照して、各々が予測動きベクトルを有する複数の候補のリスト(マージリストと共通であってもよい)が生成される。次に、候補リストに登録されている複数の候補MVの中からベスト候補MVを選択する。例えば、候補リストに含まれる各候補の評価値が算出され、評価値に基づいて1つの候補が選択される。
An example of the FRUC process is shown in FIG. 5D. First, referring to motion vectors of encoded blocks spatially or temporally adjacent to the current block, a plurality of candidate lists (which may be common to the merge list) each having a predicted motion vector are generated Be done. Next, the best candidate MV is selected from among the plurality of candidate MVs registered in the candidate list. For example, an evaluation value of each candidate included in the candidate list is calculated, and one candidate is selected based on the evaluation value.
そして、選択された候補の動きベクトルに基づいて、カレントブロックのための動きベクトルが導出される。具体的には、例えば、選択された候補の動きベクトル(ベスト候補MV)がそのままカレントブロックのための動きベクトルとして導出される。また例えば、選択された候補の動きベクトルに対応する参照ピクチャ内の位置の周辺領域において、パターンマッチングを行うことにより、カレントブロックのための動きベクトルが導出されてもよい。すなわち、ベスト候補MVの周辺の領域に対して同様の方法で探索を行い、さらに評価値が良い値となるMVがあった場合は、ベスト候補MVを前記MVに更新して、それをカレントブロックの最終的なMVとしてもよい。なお、当該処理を実施しない構成とすることも可能である。
Then, a motion vector for the current block is derived based on the selected candidate motion vector. Specifically, for example, the selected candidate motion vector (best candidate MV) is derived as it is as the motion vector for the current block. Also, for example, a motion vector for the current block may be derived by performing pattern matching in a peripheral region of a position in the reference picture corresponding to the selected candidate motion vector. That is, the search is performed on the area around the best candidate MV by the same method, and if there is an MV for which the evaluation value is good, the best candidate MV is updated to the MV and the current block is updated. It may be used as the final MV. In addition, it is also possible to set it as the structure which does not implement the said process.
サブブロック単位で処理を行う場合も全く同様の処理としてもよい。
When processing is performed in units of subblocks, the same processing may be performed.
なお、評価値は、動きベクトルに対応する参照ピクチャ内の領域と、所定の領域との間のパターンマッチングによって再構成画像の差分値を求めることにより算出される。なお、差分値に加えてそれ以外の情報を用いて評価値を算出してもよい。
The evaluation value is calculated by calculating the difference value of the reconstructed image by pattern matching between the area in the reference picture corresponding to the motion vector and the predetermined area. Note that the evaluation value may be calculated using information other than the difference value.
パターンマッチングとしては、第1パターンマッチング又は第2パターンマッチングが用いられる。第1パターンマッチング及び第2パターンマッチングは、それぞれ、バイラテラルマッチング(bilateral matching)及びテンプレートマッチング(template matching)と呼ばれることがある。
As pattern matching, first pattern matching or second pattern matching is used. The first pattern matching and the second pattern matching may be referred to as bilateral matching and template matching, respectively.
第1パターンマッチングでは、異なる2つの参照ピクチャ内の2つのブロックであってカレントブロックの動き軌道(motion trajectory)に沿う2つのブロックの間でパターンマッチングが行われる。したがって、第1パターンマッチングでは、上述した候補の評価値の算出のための所定の領域として、カレントブロックの動き軌道に沿う他の参照ピクチャ内の領域が用いられる。
In the first pattern matching, pattern matching is performed between two blocks in two different reference pictures, which are along the motion trajectory of the current block. Therefore, in the first pattern matching, a region in another reference picture along the motion trajectory of the current block is used as the predetermined region for calculation of the evaluation value of the candidate described above.
図6は、動き軌道に沿う2つのブロック間でのパターンマッチング(バイラテラルマッチング)の一例を説明するための図である。図6に示すように、第1パターンマッチングでは、カレントブロック(Cur block)の動き軌道に沿う2つのブロックであって異なる2つの参照ピクチャ(Ref0、Ref1)内の2つのブロックのペアの中で最もマッチするペアを探索することにより2つの動きベクトル(MV0、MV1)が導出される。具体的には、カレントブロックに対して、候補MVで指定された第1の符号化済み参照ピクチャ(Ref0)内の指定位置における再構成画像と、前記候補MVを表示時間間隔でスケーリングした対称MVで指定された第2の符号化済み参照ピクチャ(Ref1)内の指定位置における再構成画像との差分を導出し、得られた差分値を用いて評価値を算出する。複数の候補MVの中で最も評価値が良い値となる候補MVを最終MVとして選択するとよい。
FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining an example of pattern matching (bilateral matching) between two blocks along a motion trajectory. As shown in FIG. 6, in the first pattern matching, among pairs of two blocks in two reference pictures (Ref0, Ref1) which are two blocks along the motion trajectory of the current block (Cur block), Two motion vectors (MV0, MV1) are derived by searching for the most matching pair. Specifically, for the current block, a reconstructed image at a designated position in the first encoded reference picture (Ref 0) designated by the candidate MV, and a symmetric MV obtained by scaling the candidate MV at a display time interval. The difference with the reconstructed image at the specified position in the second coded reference picture (Ref 1) specified in step is derived, and the evaluation value is calculated using the obtained difference value. The candidate MV with the best evaluation value among the plurality of candidate MVs may be selected as the final MV.
連続的な動き軌道の仮定の下では、2つの参照ブロックを指し示す動きベクトル(MV0、MV1)は、カレントピクチャ(Cur Pic)と2つの参照ピクチャ(Ref0、Ref1)との間の時間的な距離(TD0、TD1)に対して比例する。例えば、カレントピクチャが時間的に2つの参照ピクチャの間に位置し、カレントピクチャから2つの参照ピクチャへの時間的な距離が等しい場合、第1パターンマッチングでは、鏡映対称な双方向の動きベクトルが導出される。
Under the assumption of continuous motion trajectory, motion vectors (MV0, MV1) pointing to two reference blocks are the temporal distance between the current picture (Cur Pic) and the two reference pictures (Ref0, Ref1) It is proportional to (TD0, TD1). For example, when the current picture is temporally located between two reference pictures, and the temporal distances from the current picture to the two reference pictures are equal, in the first pattern matching, the mirror symmetric bi-directional motion vector Is derived.
第2パターンマッチングでは、カレントピクチャ内のテンプレート(カレントピクチャ内でカレントブロックに隣接するブロック(例えば上及び/又は左隣接ブロック))と参照ピクチャ内のブロックとの間でパターンマッチングが行われる。したがって、第2パターンマッチングでは、上述した候補の評価値の算出のための所定の領域として、カレントピクチャ内のカレントブロックに隣接するブロックが用いられる。
In the second pattern matching, pattern matching is performed between a template in the current picture (a block adjacent to the current block in the current picture (eg, upper and / or left adjacent blocks)) and a block in the reference picture. Therefore, in the second pattern matching, a block adjacent to the current block in the current picture is used as the predetermined area for calculating the evaluation value of the candidate described above.
図7は、カレントピクチャ内のテンプレートと参照ピクチャ内のブロックとの間でのパターンマッチング(テンプレートマッチング)の一例を説明するための図である。図7に示すように、第2パターンマッチングでは、カレントピクチャ(Cur Pic)内でカレントブロック(Cur block)に隣接するブロックと最もマッチするブロックを参照ピクチャ(Ref0)内で探索することによりカレントブロックの動きベクトルが導出される。具体的には、カレントブロックに対して、左隣接および上隣接の両方もしくはどちらか一方の符号化済み領域の再構成画像と、候補MVで指定された符号化済み参照ピクチャ(Ref0)内の同等位置における再構成画像との差分を導出し、得られた差分値を用いて評価値を算出し、複数の候補MVの中で最も評価値が良い値となる候補MVをベスト候補MVとして選択するとよい。
FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of pattern matching (template matching) between a template in a current picture and a block in a reference picture. As shown in FIG. 7, in the second pattern matching, the current block (Cur Pic) is searched for in the reference picture (Ref 0) for a block that most closely matches a block adjacent to the current block (Cur block). Motion vectors are derived. Specifically, for the current block, the reconstructed image of the left adjacent region and / or the upper adjacent encoded region and the encoded reference picture (Ref 0) specified by the candidate MV are equivalent to each other. When the difference between the position and the reconstructed image is derived, the evaluation value is calculated using the obtained difference value, and the candidate MV having the best evaluation value among the plurality of candidate MVs is selected as the best candidate MV Good.
このようなFRUCモードを適用するか否かを示す情報(例えばFRUCフラグと呼ばれる)は、CUレベルで信号化される。また、FRUCモードが適用される場合(例えばFRUCフラグが真の場合)、パターンマッチングの方法(第1パターンマッチング又は第2パターンマッチング)を示す情報(例えばFRUCモードフラグと呼ばれる)がCUレベルで信号化される。なお、これらの情報の信号化は、CUレベルに限定される必要はなく、他のレベル(例えば、シーケンスレベル、ピクチャレベル、スライスレベル、タイルレベル、CTUレベル又はサブブロックレベル)であってもよい。
Information indicating whether to apply such a FRUC mode (for example, called a FRUC flag) is signaled at the CU level. In addition, when the FRUC mode is applied (for example, when the FRUC flag is true), a signal (for example, called a FRUC mode flag) indicating a method of pattern matching (for example, first pattern matching or second pattern matching) is a signal at CU level Be Note that the signaling of these pieces of information need not be limited to the CU level, but may be at other levels (eg, sequence level, picture level, slice level, tile level, CTU level or subblock level) .
ここで、等速直線運動を仮定したモデルに基づいて動きベクトルを導出するモードについて説明する。このモードは、BIO(bi-directional optical flow)モードと呼ばれることがある。
Here, a mode for deriving a motion vector based on a model assuming uniform linear motion will be described. This mode is sometimes referred to as a bi-directional optical flow (BIO) mode.
図8は、等速直線運動を仮定したモデルを説明するための図である。図8において、(vx,vy)は、速度ベクトルを示し、τ0、τ1は、それぞれ、カレントピクチャ(Cur Pic)と2つの参照ピクチャ(Ref0,Ref1)との間の時間的な距離を示す。(MVx0,MVy0)は、参照ピクチャRef0に対応する動きベクトルを示し、(MVx1、MVy1)は、参照ピクチャRef1に対応する動きベクトルを示す。
FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining a model assuming uniform linear motion. In FIG. 8, (v x , v y ) indicate velocity vectors, and τ 0 and τ 1 indicate the time between the current picture (Cur Pic) and two reference pictures (Ref 0 and Ref 1 ), respectively. Indicate the distance. (MVx 0 , MVy 0 ) indicates a motion vector corresponding to the reference picture Ref 0 , and (MVx 1 , MVy 1 ) indicates a motion vector corresponding to the reference picture Ref 1 .
このとき速度ベクトル(vx,vy)の等速直線運動の仮定の下では、(MVx0,MVy0)及び(MVx1,MVy1)は、それぞれ、(vxτ0,vyτ0)及び(-vxτ1,-vyτ1)と表され、以下のオプティカルフロー等式(1)が成り立つ。
At this time, under the assumption of uniform linear motion of the velocity vector (v x , v y ), (MV x 0 , MV y 0 ) and (MV x 1 , MV y 1 ) respectively represent (v x τ 0 , v y τ 0 ) and (-v x τ 1 , -v y τ 1 ), the following optical flow equation (1) holds.
ここで、I(k)は、動き補償後の参照画像k(k=0,1)の輝度値を示す。このオプティカルフロー等式は、(i)輝度値の時間微分と、(ii)水平方向の速度及び参照画像の空間勾配の水平成分の積と、(iii)垂直方向の速度及び参照画像の空間勾配の垂直成分の積と、の和が、ゼロと等しいことを示す。このオプティカルフロー等式とエルミート補間(Hermite interpolation)との組み合わせに基づいて、マージリスト等から得られるブロック単位の動きベクトルが画素単位で補正される。
Here, I (k) represents the luminance value of the reference image k (k = 0, 1) after motion compensation. The optical flow equation is: (i) the time derivative of the luminance value, (ii) the product of the horizontal velocity and the horizontal component of the spatial gradient of the reference image, and (iii) the vertical velocity and the spatial gradient of the reference image Indicates that the product of the vertical components of and the sum of is equal to zero. Based on the combination of the optical flow equation and Hermite interpolation, a motion vector in units of blocks obtained from a merge list or the like is corrected in units of pixels.
なお、等速直線運動を仮定したモデルに基づく動きベクトルの導出とは異なる方法で、復号装置側で動きベクトルが導出されてもよい。例えば、複数の隣接ブロックの動きベクトルに基づいてサブブロック単位で動きベクトルが導出されてもよい。
Note that the motion vector may be derived on the decoding device side by a method different from the derivation of the motion vector based on a model assuming uniform linear motion. For example, motion vectors may be derived on a subblock basis based on motion vectors of a plurality of adjacent blocks.
ここで、複数の隣接ブロックの動きベクトルに基づいてサブブロック単位で動きベクトルを導出するモードについて説明する。このモードは、アフィン動き補償予測(affine motion compensation prediction)モードと呼ばれることがある。
Here, a mode for deriving a motion vector in units of sub blocks based on motion vectors of a plurality of adjacent blocks will be described. This mode is sometimes referred to as affine motion compensation prediction mode.
図9Aは、複数の隣接ブロックの動きベクトルに基づくサブブロック単位の動きベクトルの導出を説明するための図である。図9Aにおいて、カレントブロックは、16の4x4サブブロックを含む。ここでは、隣接ブロックの動きベクトルに基づいてカレントブロックの左上角制御ポイントの動きベクトルv0が導出され、隣接サブブロックの動きベクトルに基づいてカレントブロックの右上角制御ポイントの動きベクトルv1が導出される。そして、2つの動きベクトルv0及びv1を用いて、以下の式(2)により、カレントブロック内の各サブブロックの動きベクトル(vx,vy)が導出される。
FIG. 9A is a diagram for describing derivation of a motion vector in units of sub blocks based on motion vectors of a plurality of adjacent blocks. In FIG. 9A, the current block includes sixteen 4 × 4 subblocks. Here, the motion vector v 0 of the upper left corner control point of the current block is derived based on the motion vector of the adjacent block, and the motion vector v 1 of the upper right corner control point of the current block is derived based on the motion vector of the adjacent subblock Be done. Then, using the two motion vectors v 0 and v 1 , the motion vector (v x , v y ) of each sub block in the current block is derived according to the following equation (2).
ここで、x及びyは、それぞれ、サブブロックの水平位置及び垂直位置を示し、wは、予め定められた重み係数を示す。
Here, x and y indicate the horizontal position and the vertical position of the sub block, respectively, and w indicates a predetermined weighting factor.
このようなアフィン動き補償予測モードでは、左上及び右上角制御ポイントの動きベクトルの導出方法が異なるいくつかのモードを含んでもよい。このようなアフィン動き補償予測モードを示す情報(例えばアフィンフラグと呼ばれる)は、CUレベルで信号化される。なお、このアフィン動き補償予測モードを示す情報の信号化は、CUレベルに限定される必要はなく、他のレベル(例えば、シーケンスレベル、ピクチャレベル、スライスレベル、タイルレベル、CTUレベル又はサブブロックレベル)であってもよい。
In such an affine motion compensation prediction mode, the derivation method of the motion vector of the upper left and upper right control points may include several different modes. Information indicating such an affine motion compensation prediction mode (for example, called an affine flag) is signaled at the CU level. Note that the signaling of the information indicating this affine motion compensation prediction mode need not be limited to the CU level, and other levels (eg, sequence level, picture level, slice level, tile level, CTU level or subblock level) ) May be.
[予測制御部]
予測制御部128は、イントラ予測信号及びインター予測信号のいずれかを選択し、選択した信号を予測信号として減算部104及び加算部116に出力する。 [Prediction control unit]
Theprediction control unit 128 selects one of the intra prediction signal and the inter prediction signal, and outputs the selected signal as a prediction signal to the subtraction unit 104 and the addition unit 116.
予測制御部128は、イントラ予測信号及びインター予測信号のいずれかを選択し、選択した信号を予測信号として減算部104及び加算部116に出力する。 [Prediction control unit]
The
ここで、マージモードにより符号化対象ピクチャの動きベクトルを導出する例を説明する。図9Bは、マージモードによる動きベクトル導出処理の概要を説明するための図である。
Here, an example in which the motion vector of the current picture to be encoded is derived by the merge mode will be described. FIG. 9B is a diagram for describing an overview of motion vector derivation processing in the merge mode.
まず、予測MVの候補を登録した予測MVリストを生成する。予測MVの候補としては、符号化対象ブロックの空間的に周辺に位置する複数の符号化済みブロックが持つMVである空間隣接予測MV、符号化済み参照ピクチャにおける符号化対象ブロックの位置を投影した近辺のブロックが持つMVである時間隣接予測MV、空間隣接予測MVと時間隣接予測MVのMV値を組合わせて生成したMVである結合予測MV、および値がゼロのMVであるゼロ予測MV等がある。
First, a predicted MV list in which candidates for predicted MV are registered is generated. As the prediction MV candidate, the position of the coding target block in the coded reference picture, which is the MV of the plurality of coded blocks located in the spatial periphery of the coding target block, is projected Temporally adjacent prediction MV which is an MV possessed by a nearby block, joint prediction MV which is an MV generated by combining spatially adjacent prediction MV and MVs of temporally adjacent prediction MV, and zero prediction MV whose value is MV, etc. There is.
次に、予測MVリストに登録されている複数の予測MVの中から1つの予測MVを選択することで、符号化対象ブロックのMVとして決定する。
Next, one prediction MV is selected from among the plurality of prediction MVs registered in the prediction MV list, and it is determined as the MV of the current block.
さらに可変長符号化部では、どの予測MVを選択したかを示す信号であるmerge_idxをストリームに記述して符号化する。
Furthermore, in the variable-length coding unit, merge_idx, which is a signal indicating which prediction MV has been selected, is described in the stream and encoded.
なお、図9Bで説明した予測MVリストに登録する予測MVは一例であり、図中の個数とは異なる個数であったり、図中の予測MVの一部の種類を含まない構成であったり、図中の予測MVの種類以外の予測MVを追加した構成であったりしてもよい。
Note that the prediction MVs registered in the prediction MV list described in FIG. 9B are an example, and the number is different from the number in the drawing, or the configuration does not include some types of the prediction MV in the drawing, It may have a configuration in which prediction MVs other than the type of prediction MV in the drawing are added.
なお、マージモードにより導出した符号化対象ブロックのMVを用いて、後述するDMVR処理を行うことによって最終的なMVを決定してもよい。
The final MV may be determined by performing the DMVR process described later using the MV of the coding target block derived in the merge mode.
ここで、DMVR処理を用いてMVを決定する例について説明する。
Here, an example in which the MV is determined using the DMVR process will be described.
図9Cは、DMVR処理の概要を説明するための概念図である。
FIG. 9C is a conceptual diagram for describing an overview of DMVR processing.
まず、処理対象ブロックに設定された最適MVPを候補MVとして、前記候補MVに従って、L0方向の処理済みピクチャである第1参照ピクチャ、およびL1方向の処理済みピクチャである第2参照ピクチャから参照画素をそれぞれ取得し、各参照画素の平均をとることでテンプレートを生成する。
First, with the optimum MVP set as the processing target block as a candidate MV, according to the candidate MV, a first reference picture which is a processed picture in the L0 direction and a second reference picture which is a processed picture in the L1 direction To generate a template by averaging each reference pixel.
次に、前記テンプレートを用いて、第1参照ピクチャおよび第2参照ピクチャの候補MVの周辺領域をそれぞれ探索し、最もコストが最小となるMVを最終的なMVとして決定する。なお、コスト値はテンプレートの各画素値と探索領域の各画素値との差分値およびMV値等を用いて算出する。
Next, using the template, the regions around candidate MVs of the first reference picture and the second reference picture are respectively searched, and the MV with the lowest cost is determined as the final MV. The cost value is calculated using the difference value between each pixel value of the template and each pixel value of the search area, the MV value, and the like.
なお、符号化装置および復号化装置では、ここで説明した処理の概要は基本的に共通である。
The outline of the process described here is basically common to the encoding apparatus and the decoding apparatus.
なお、ここで説明した処理そのものでなくても、候補MVの周辺を探索して最終的なMVを導出することができる処理であれば、他の処理を用いてもよい。
Note that even if the process is not a process described here, another process may be used as long as the process can search for the periphery of the candidate MV and derive a final MV.
ここで、LIC処理を用いて予測画像を生成するモードについて説明する。
Here, a mode in which a predicted image is generated using LIC processing will be described.
図9Dは、LIC処理による輝度補正処理を用いた予測画像生成方法の概要を説明するための図である。
FIG. 9D is a diagram for describing an outline of a predicted image generation method using luminance correction processing by LIC processing.
まず、符号化済みピクチャである参照ピクチャから符号化対象ブロックに対応する参照画像を取得するためのMVを導出する。
First, an MV for obtaining a reference image corresponding to a current block to be coded is derived from a reference picture which is a coded picture.
次に、符号化対象ブロックに対して、左隣接および上隣接の符号化済み周辺参照領域の輝度画素値と、MVで指定された参照ピクチャ内の同等位置における輝度画素値とを用いて、参照ピクチャと符号化対象ピクチャとで輝度値がどのように変化したかを示す情報を抽出して輝度補正パラメータを算出する。
Next, for the block to be encoded, reference is made using the luminance pixel values of the left adjacent and upper adjacent encoded peripheral reference areas and the luminance pixel values at equivalent positions in the reference picture specified by MV. Information indicating how the luminance value has changed between the picture and the picture to be encoded is extracted to calculate a luminance correction parameter.
MVで指定された参照ピクチャ内の参照画像に対して前記輝度補正パラメータを用いて輝度補正処理を行うことで、符号化対象ブロックに対する予測画像を生成する。
By performing luminance correction processing on a reference image in a reference picture designated by MV using the luminance correction parameter, a predicted image for a block to be encoded is generated.
なお、図9Dにおける前記周辺参照領域の形状は一例であり、これ以外の形状を用いてもよい。
The shape of the peripheral reference area in FIG. 9D is an example, and other shapes may be used.
また、ここでは1枚の参照ピクチャから予測画像を生成する処理について説明したが、複数枚の参照ピクチャから予測画像を生成する場合も同様であり、各々の参照ピクチャから取得した参照画像に同様の方法で輝度補正処理を行ってから予測画像を生成する。
Further, although the process of generating a predicted image from one reference picture has been described here, the same applies to a case where a predicted image is generated from a plurality of reference pictures, and is similar to the reference image acquired from each reference picture. After performing luminance correction processing by a method, a predicted image is generated.
LIC処理を適用するかどうかの判定の方法として、例えば、LIC処理を適用するかどうかを示す信号であるlic_flagを用いる方法がある。具体的な一例としては、符号化装置において、符号化対象ブロックが輝度変化が発生している領域に属しているかどうかを判定し、輝度変化が発生している領域に属している場合はlic_flagとして値1を設定してLIC処理を適用して符号化を行い、輝度変化が発生している領域に属していない場合はlic_flagとして値0を設定してLIC処理を適用せずに符号化を行う。一方、復号化装置では、ストリームに記述されたlic_flagを復号化することで、その値に応じてLIC処理を適用するかどうかを切替えて復号化を行う。
As a method of determining whether to apply the LIC process, for example, there is a method using lic_flag which is a signal indicating whether to apply the LIC process. As a specific example, in the encoding apparatus, it is determined whether or not the encoding target block belongs to the area in which the luminance change occurs, and when it belongs to the area in which the luminance change occurs, as lic_flag A value of 1 is set and encoding is performed by applying LIC processing, and when not belonging to an area where a luminance change occurs, a value of 0 is set as lic_flag and encoding is performed without applying the LIC processing. . On the other hand, the decoding apparatus decodes lic_flag described in the stream to switch whether to apply the LIC processing according to the value and performs decoding.
LIC処理を適用するかどうかの判定の別の方法として、例えば、周辺ブロックでLIC処理を適用したかどうかに従って判定する方法もある。具体的な一例としては、符号化対象ブロックがマージモードであった場合、マージモード処理におけるMVの導出の際に選択した周辺の符号化済みブロックがLIC処理を適用して符号化したかどうかを判定し、その結果に応じてLIC処理を適用するかどうかを切替えて符号化を行う。なお、この例の場合、復号化における処理も全く同様となる。
As another method of determining whether to apply the LIC process, for example, there is also a method of determining according to whether or not the LIC process is applied to the peripheral block. As a specific example, when the encoding target block is in merge mode, whether or not the surrounding encoded blocks selected in the derivation of the MV in merge mode processing are encoded by applying LIC processing According to the result, whether to apply the LIC process is switched to perform encoding. In the case of this example, the processing in the decoding is completely the same.
[復号装置の概要]
次に、上記の符号化装置100から出力された符号化信号(符号化ビットストリーム)を復号可能な復号装置の概要について説明する。図10は、実施の形態1に係る復号装置200の機能構成を示すブロック図である。復号装置200は、動画像/画像をブロック単位で復号する動画像/画像復号装置である。 [Overview of Decryption Device]
Next, an outline of a decoding apparatus capable of decoding the coded signal (coded bit stream) output from theabove coding apparatus 100 will be described. FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration of decoding apparatus 200 according to Embodiment 1. The decoding device 200 is a moving image / image decoding device that decodes a moving image / image in units of blocks.
次に、上記の符号化装置100から出力された符号化信号(符号化ビットストリーム)を復号可能な復号装置の概要について説明する。図10は、実施の形態1に係る復号装置200の機能構成を示すブロック図である。復号装置200は、動画像/画像をブロック単位で復号する動画像/画像復号装置である。 [Overview of Decryption Device]
Next, an outline of a decoding apparatus capable of decoding the coded signal (coded bit stream) output from the
図10に示すように、復号装置200は、エントロピー復号部202と、逆量子化部204と、逆変換部206と、加算部208と、ブロックメモリ210と、ループフィルタ部212と、フレームメモリ214と、イントラ予測部216と、インター予測部218と、予測制御部220と、を備える。
As shown in FIG. 10, the decoding apparatus 200 includes an entropy decoding unit 202, an inverse quantization unit 204, an inverse conversion unit 206, an addition unit 208, a block memory 210, a loop filter unit 212, and a frame memory 214. , An intra prediction unit 216, an inter prediction unit 218, and a prediction control unit 220.
復号装置200は、例えば、汎用プロセッサ及びメモリにより実現される。この場合、メモリに格納されたソフトウェアプログラムがプロセッサにより実行されたときに、プロセッサは、エントロピー復号部202、逆量子化部204、逆変換部206、加算部208、ループフィルタ部212、イントラ予測部216、インター予測部218及び予測制御部220として機能する。また、復号装置200は、エントロピー復号部202、逆量子化部204、逆変換部206、加算部208、ループフィルタ部212、イントラ予測部216、インター予測部218及び予測制御部220に対応する専用の1以上の電子回路として実現されてもよい。
The decoding device 200 is realized by, for example, a general-purpose processor and a memory. In this case, when the processor executes the software program stored in the memory, the processor determines whether the entropy decoding unit 202, the inverse quantization unit 204, the inverse conversion unit 206, the addition unit 208, the loop filter unit 212, the intra prediction unit 216 functions as an inter prediction unit 218 and a prediction control unit 220. In addition, the decoding apparatus 200 is a dedicated unit corresponding to the entropy decoding unit 202, the inverse quantization unit 204, the inverse conversion unit 206, the addition unit 208, the loop filter unit 212, the intra prediction unit 216, the inter prediction unit 218, and the prediction control unit 220. And one or more electronic circuits.
以下に、復号装置200に含まれる各構成要素について説明する。
Each component included in the decoding device 200 will be described below.
[エントロピー復号部]
エントロピー復号部202は、符号化ビットストリームをエントロピー復号する。具体的には、エントロピー復号部202は、例えば、符号化ビットストリームから二値信号に算術復号する。そして、エントロピー復号部202は、二値信号を多値化(debinarize)する。これにより、エントロピー復号部202は、ブロック単位で量子化係数を逆量子化部204に出力する。 [Entropy decoder]
Theentropy decoding unit 202 entropy decodes the coded bit stream. Specifically, the entropy decoding unit 202 performs arithmetic decoding, for example, from a coded bit stream to a binary signal. Then, the entropy decoding unit 202 debinarizes the binary signal. Thereby, the entropy decoding unit 202 outputs the quantization coefficient to the dequantization unit 204 in block units.
エントロピー復号部202は、符号化ビットストリームをエントロピー復号する。具体的には、エントロピー復号部202は、例えば、符号化ビットストリームから二値信号に算術復号する。そして、エントロピー復号部202は、二値信号を多値化(debinarize)する。これにより、エントロピー復号部202は、ブロック単位で量子化係数を逆量子化部204に出力する。 [Entropy decoder]
The
[逆量子化部]
逆量子化部204は、エントロピー復号部202からの入力である復号対象ブロック(以下、カレントブロックという)の量子化係数を逆量子化する。具体的には、逆量子化部204は、カレントブロックの量子化係数の各々について、当該量子化係数に対応する量子化パラメータに基づいて当該量子化係数を逆量子化する。そして、逆量子化部204は、カレントブロックの逆量子化された量子化係数(つまり変換係数)を逆変換部206に出力する。 [Inverse quantization unit]
Theinverse quantization unit 204 inversely quantizes the quantization coefficient of the block to be decoded (hereinafter referred to as a current block), which is an input from the entropy decoding unit 202. Specifically, the dequantization part 204 dequantizes the said quantization coefficient about each of the quantization coefficient of a current block based on the quantization parameter corresponding to the said quantization coefficient. Then, the dequantization unit 204 outputs the dequantized quantization coefficient (that is, transform coefficient) of the current block to the inverse transformation unit 206.
逆量子化部204は、エントロピー復号部202からの入力である復号対象ブロック(以下、カレントブロックという)の量子化係数を逆量子化する。具体的には、逆量子化部204は、カレントブロックの量子化係数の各々について、当該量子化係数に対応する量子化パラメータに基づいて当該量子化係数を逆量子化する。そして、逆量子化部204は、カレントブロックの逆量子化された量子化係数(つまり変換係数)を逆変換部206に出力する。 [Inverse quantization unit]
The
[逆変換部]
逆変換部206は、逆量子化部204からの入力である変換係数を逆変換することにより予測誤差を復元する。 [Inverse converter]
Theinverse transform unit 206 restores the prediction error by inversely transforming the transform coefficient that is the input from the inverse quantization unit 204.
逆変換部206は、逆量子化部204からの入力である変換係数を逆変換することにより予測誤差を復元する。 [Inverse converter]
The
例えば符号化ビットストリームから読み解かれた情報がEMT又はAMTを適用することを示す場合(例えばAMTフラグが真)、逆変換部206は、読み解かれた変換タイプを示す情報に基づいてカレントブロックの変換係数を逆変換する。
For example, when the information deciphered from the coded bit stream indicates that the EMT or AMT is applied (for example, the AMT flag is true), the inverse transform unit 206 determines the current block based on the deciphered transformation type information. Inverse transform coefficients of
また例えば、符号化ビットストリームから読み解かれた情報がNSSTを適用することを示す場合、逆変換部206は、変換係数に逆再変換を適用する。
Also, for example, when the information deciphered from the coded bit stream indicates that the NSST is to be applied, the inverse transform unit 206 applies inverse retransformation to the transform coefficients.
[加算部]
加算部208は、逆変換部206からの入力である予測誤差と予測制御部220からの入力である予測サンプルとを加算することによりカレントブロックを再構成する。そして、加算部208は、再構成されたブロックをブロックメモリ210及びループフィルタ部212に出力する。 [Adder]
Theaddition unit 208 adds the prediction error, which is the input from the inverse conversion unit 206, and the prediction sample, which is the input from the prediction control unit 220, to reconstruct the current block. Then, the adding unit 208 outputs the reconstructed block to the block memory 210 and the loop filter unit 212.
加算部208は、逆変換部206からの入力である予測誤差と予測制御部220からの入力である予測サンプルとを加算することによりカレントブロックを再構成する。そして、加算部208は、再構成されたブロックをブロックメモリ210及びループフィルタ部212に出力する。 [Adder]
The
[ブロックメモリ]
ブロックメモリ210は、イントラ予測で参照されるブロックであって復号対象ピクチャ(以下、カレントピクチャという)内のブロックを格納するための記憶部である。具体的には、ブロックメモリ210は、加算部208から出力された再構成ブロックを格納する。 [Block memory]
Theblock memory 210 is a storage unit for storing a block within a picture to be decoded (hereinafter referred to as a current picture) which is a block referred to in intra prediction. Specifically, the block memory 210 stores the reconstructed block output from the adding unit 208.
ブロックメモリ210は、イントラ予測で参照されるブロックであって復号対象ピクチャ(以下、カレントピクチャという)内のブロックを格納するための記憶部である。具体的には、ブロックメモリ210は、加算部208から出力された再構成ブロックを格納する。 [Block memory]
The
[ループフィルタ部]
ループフィルタ部212は、加算部208によって再構成されたブロックにループフィルタを施し、フィルタされた再構成ブロックをフレームメモリ214及び表示装置等に出力する。 [Loop filter section]
Theloop filter unit 212 applies a loop filter to the block reconstructed by the adding unit 208, and outputs the filtered reconstructed block to the frame memory 214 and a display device or the like.
ループフィルタ部212は、加算部208によって再構成されたブロックにループフィルタを施し、フィルタされた再構成ブロックをフレームメモリ214及び表示装置等に出力する。 [Loop filter section]
The
符号化ビットストリームから読み解かれたALFのオン/オフを示す情報がALFのオンを示す場合、局所的な勾配の方向及び活性度に基づいて複数のフィルタの中から1つのフィルタが選択され、選択されたフィルタが再構成ブロックに適用される。
If the information indicating on / off of ALF read from the encoded bit stream indicates that ALF is on, one filter is selected from the plurality of filters based on the local gradient direction and activity, The selected filter is applied to the reconstruction block.
[フレームメモリ]
フレームメモリ214は、インター予測に用いられる参照ピクチャを格納するための記憶部であり、フレームバッファと呼ばれることもある。具体的には、フレームメモリ214は、ループフィルタ部212によってフィルタされた再構成ブロックを格納する。 [Frame memory]
Theframe memory 214 is a storage unit for storing a reference picture used for inter prediction, and may be referred to as a frame buffer. Specifically, the frame memory 214 stores the reconstructed block filtered by the loop filter unit 212.
フレームメモリ214は、インター予測に用いられる参照ピクチャを格納するための記憶部であり、フレームバッファと呼ばれることもある。具体的には、フレームメモリ214は、ループフィルタ部212によってフィルタされた再構成ブロックを格納する。 [Frame memory]
The
[イントラ予測部]
イントラ予測部216は、符号化ビットストリームから読み解かれたイントラ予測モードに基づいて、ブロックメモリ210に格納されたカレントピクチャ内のブロックを参照してイントラ予測を行うことで、予測信号(イントラ予測信号)を生成する。具体的には、イントラ予測部216は、カレントブロックに隣接するブロックのサンプル(例えば輝度値、色差値)を参照してイントラ予測を行うことでイントラ予測信号を生成し、イントラ予測信号を予測制御部220に出力する。 [Intra prediction unit]
Theintra prediction unit 216 refers to a block in the current picture stored in the block memory 210 to perform intra prediction based on the intra prediction mode read from the coded bit stream, thereby generating a prediction signal (intra prediction Signal). Specifically, the intra prediction unit 216 generates an intra prediction signal by performing intra prediction with reference to samples (for example, luminance value, color difference value) of a block adjacent to the current block, and performs prediction control on the intra prediction signal. Output to unit 220.
イントラ予測部216は、符号化ビットストリームから読み解かれたイントラ予測モードに基づいて、ブロックメモリ210に格納されたカレントピクチャ内のブロックを参照してイントラ予測を行うことで、予測信号(イントラ予測信号)を生成する。具体的には、イントラ予測部216は、カレントブロックに隣接するブロックのサンプル(例えば輝度値、色差値)を参照してイントラ予測を行うことでイントラ予測信号を生成し、イントラ予測信号を予測制御部220に出力する。 [Intra prediction unit]
The
なお、色差ブロックのイントラ予測において輝度ブロックを参照するイントラ予測モードが選択されている場合は、イントラ予測部216は、カレントブロックの輝度成分に基づいて、カレントブロックの色差成分を予測してもよい。
When the intra prediction mode that refers to the luminance block is selected in the intra prediction of the chrominance block, the intra prediction unit 216 may predict the chrominance component of the current block based on the luminance component of the current block. .
また、符号化ビットストリームから読み解かれた情報がPDPCの適用を示す場合、イントラ予測部216は、水平/垂直方向の参照画素の勾配に基づいてイントラ予測後の画素値を補正する。
Also, when the information read from the coded bit stream indicates the application of PDPC, the intra prediction unit 216 corrects the pixel value after intra prediction based on the gradient of reference pixels in the horizontal / vertical directions.
[インター予測部]
インター予測部218は、フレームメモリ214に格納された参照ピクチャを参照して、カレントブロックを予測する。予測は、カレントブロック又はカレントブロック内のサブブロック(例えば4x4ブロック)の単位で行われる。例えば、インター予測部218は、符号化ビットストリームから読み解かれた動き情報(例えば動きベクトル)を用いて動き補償を行うことでカレントブロック又はサブブロックのインター予測信号を生成し、インター予測信号を予測制御部220に出力する。 [Inter prediction unit]
Theinter prediction unit 218 predicts the current block with reference to the reference picture stored in the frame memory 214. The prediction is performed in units of the current block or subblocks (for example, 4 × 4 blocks) in the current block. For example, the inter prediction unit 218 generates an inter prediction signal of the current block or sub block by performing motion compensation using motion information (for example, a motion vector) read from the coded bit stream, and generates an inter prediction signal. It is output to the prediction control unit 220.
インター予測部218は、フレームメモリ214に格納された参照ピクチャを参照して、カレントブロックを予測する。予測は、カレントブロック又はカレントブロック内のサブブロック(例えば4x4ブロック)の単位で行われる。例えば、インター予測部218は、符号化ビットストリームから読み解かれた動き情報(例えば動きベクトル)を用いて動き補償を行うことでカレントブロック又はサブブロックのインター予測信号を生成し、インター予測信号を予測制御部220に出力する。 [Inter prediction unit]
The
なお、符号化ビットストリームから読み解かれた情報がOBMCモードを適用することを示す場合、インター予測部218は、動き探索により得られたカレントブロックの動き情報だけでなく、隣接ブロックの動き情報も用いて、インター予測信号を生成する。
When the information deciphered from the coded bit stream indicates that the OBMC mode is applied, the inter prediction unit 218 determines not only the motion information of the current block obtained by the motion search but also the motion information of the adjacent block. Use to generate an inter prediction signal.
また、符号化ビットストリームから読み解かれた情報がFRUCモードを適用することを示す場合、インター予測部218は、符号化ストリームから読み解かれたパターンマッチングの方法(バイラテラルマッチング又はテンプレートマッチング)に従って動き探索を行うことにより動き情報を導出する。そして、インター予測部218は、導出された動き情報を用いて動き補償を行う。
Also, in the case where the information deciphered from the coded bit stream indicates that the FRUC mode is applied, the inter prediction unit 218 is configured to follow the method of pattern matching deciphered from the coded stream (bilateral matching or template matching). Motion information is derived by performing motion search. Then, the inter prediction unit 218 performs motion compensation using the derived motion information.
また、インター予測部218は、BIOモードが適用される場合に、等速直線運動を仮定したモデルに基づいて動きベクトルを導出する。また、符号化ビットストリームから読み解かれた情報がアフィン動き補償予測モードを適用することを示す場合には、インター予測部218は、複数の隣接ブロックの動きベクトルに基づいてサブブロック単位で動きベクトルを導出する。
In addition, when the BIO mode is applied, the inter prediction unit 218 derives a motion vector based on a model assuming uniform linear motion. Also, in the case where the information deciphered from the coded bit stream indicates that the affine motion compensation prediction mode is applied, the inter prediction unit 218 performs motion vectors in units of sub blocks based on motion vectors of a plurality of adjacent blocks. Derive
[予測制御部]
予測制御部220は、イントラ予測信号及びインター予測信号のいずれかを選択し、選択した信号を予測信号として加算部208に出力する。 [Prediction control unit]
Theprediction control unit 220 selects one of the intra prediction signal and the inter prediction signal, and outputs the selected signal to the addition unit 208 as a prediction signal.
予測制御部220は、イントラ予測信号及びインター予測信号のいずれかを選択し、選択した信号を予測信号として加算部208に出力する。 [Prediction control unit]
The
[インター予測処理の第1の例]
図11は、符号化装置100におけるインター予測処理の第1の例のフローチャートである。なお、以下では、符号化装置100に含まれるインター予測部126の動作を主に説明するが、復号装置200に含まれるインター予測部218の動作も同様である。 [First example of inter prediction processing]
FIG. 11 is a flowchart of a first example of inter prediction processing in theencoding device 100. Although the operation of the inter prediction unit 126 included in the coding apparatus 100 will be mainly described below, the operation of the inter prediction unit 218 included in the decoding apparatus 200 is also the same.
図11は、符号化装置100におけるインター予測処理の第1の例のフローチャートである。なお、以下では、符号化装置100に含まれるインター予測部126の動作を主に説明するが、復号装置200に含まれるインター予測部218の動作も同様である。 [First example of inter prediction processing]
FIG. 11 is a flowchart of a first example of inter prediction processing in the
インター予測部126は、複数のモード(FRUCモード、ノーマルモード、マージモード等)から、符号化対象又は復号対象のブロックである対象ブロックに用いるインター予測モードを選択する。インター予測部126は、選択されたインター予測モードを用いて動きベクトル(MV)を導出する。
The inter prediction unit 126 selects, from a plurality of modes (FRUC mode, normal mode, merge mode, etc.), an inter prediction mode to be used for a target block which is a block to be encoded or to be decoded. The inter prediction unit 126 derives a motion vector (MV) using the selected inter prediction mode.
インター予測部126は、FRUC以外のモードが選択された場合は、動きベクトルを導出し、導出した動きベクトルに関する情報をストリームに符号化する。インター予測部126は、導出した動きベクトルを用いて動き補償を行うことで予測画像を生成する。
When a mode other than FRUC is selected, the inter prediction unit 126 derives a motion vector, and encodes information on the derived motion vector into a stream. The inter prediction unit 126 generates a predicted image by performing motion compensation using the derived motion vector.
一方、FRUCモードが選択された場合は、インター予測部126は、図6及び図7で説明した方法を用いて、動きベクトルに関する情報をストリームに符号化することなく、処理済み領域の画像で探索を行うことで動きベクトルを導出する。
On the other hand, when the FRUC mode is selected, the inter prediction unit 126 searches for the image of the processed area without encoding the information on the motion vector into the stream using the method described with reference to FIGS. 6 and 7. To derive motion vectors.
第1の例では、インター予測部126は、まず、ピクチャの基本分割単位であるCTU毎に、FRUC処理の動きベクトルの導出において参照する処理済み領域の範囲を制限するための探索範囲を決定する(S201)。
In the first example, the inter prediction unit 126 first determines, for each CTU that is a basic division unit of a picture, a search range for limiting the range of the processed region to be referred to in the derivation of the motion vector of FRUC processing. (S201).
次に、インター予測部126は、CTUに属する処理基本単位であるCU毎に、FRUCモード又はそれ以外のモードを用いてインター予測処理を行う。
Next, the inter prediction unit 126 performs inter prediction processing using the FRUC mode or another mode for each CU that is a processing basic unit belonging to the CTU.
FRUCモードが用いられる場合(S202でYes)、インター予測部126は、まず、符号化対象又は復号対象のCUである対象CUの周辺の処理済みCUの動きベクトルを参照して候補動きベクトルリストを生成する(S203)。
When the FRUC mode is used (Yes in S202), the inter prediction unit 126 first refers to the motion vector of the processed CU around the target CU that is the CU to be encoded or decoded and refers to the candidate motion vector list. It generates (S203).
次に、インター予測部126は、候補動きベクトルリストに登録した複数の候補動きベクトルのうち、ステップS201で決定された探索範囲外を参照する候補動きベクトルを評価対象から除外する(S204)。
Next, the inter prediction unit 126 excludes, from among the plurality of candidate motion vectors registered in the candidate motion vector list, candidate motion vectors that reference the outside of the search range determined in step S201 (S204).
次に、インター予測部126は、候補動きベクトルリストに登録した複数の候補動きベクトルのうち、除外された残りの候補動きベクトル毎にテンプレートマッチング方式又はバイラテラルマッチング方式を用いて処理済み領域を参照してコスト評価を行う。そして、インター予測部126は、コストが最小である候補動きベクトルを選択する(S205)。さらに、インター予測部126は、選択された候補動きベクトルの周辺領域の探索を行って最終的な動きベクトルを導出する(S206)。
Next, the inter prediction unit 126 refers to the processed region using the template matching scheme or the bilateral matching scheme for each of the remaining candidate motion vectors excluded among the plurality of candidate motion vectors registered in the candidate motion vector list. And evaluate the cost. Then, the inter prediction unit 126 selects a candidate motion vector with the smallest cost (S205). Furthermore, the inter prediction unit 126 searches for a peripheral region of the selected candidate motion vector to derive a final motion vector (S206).
次に、インター予測部126は、導出した動きベクトルを用いて動き補償を行うことで予測画像を生成する(S207)。
Next, the inter prediction unit 126 generates a predicted image by performing motion compensation using the derived motion vector (S207).
このように、探索範囲外を参照する候補動きベクトルを評価対象から除外することで、参照に必要な領域が探索範囲内の領域に制限される。よって、処理済み領域の画像を格納しているメモリへのアクセス量を限定することが可能となる。さらに評価対象とする候補動きベクトルの個数が削減されるため処理量を抑制することが可能となる。
As described above, by excluding candidate motion vectors that reference the outside of the search range from the evaluation target, the region necessary for the reference is limited to the region within the search range. Therefore, it is possible to limit the amount of access to the memory storing the image of the processed area. Furthermore, since the number of candidate motion vectors to be evaluated is reduced, the amount of processing can be suppressed.
一方、FRUCモード以外のインター予測モードが用いられる場合(S202でNo)、インター予測部126は、当該インター予測モードにより動きベクトルを導出し、導出した動きベクトルに関する情報をストリームに符号化する(S208)。次に、インター予測部126は、導出した動きベクトルを用いて動き補償を行うことで予測画像を生成する(S209)。
On the other hand, when the inter prediction mode other than the FRUC mode is used (No in S202), the inter prediction unit 126 derives a motion vector according to the inter prediction mode, and encodes information on the derived motion vector into a stream (S208). ). Next, the inter prediction unit 126 generates a prediction image by performing motion compensation using the derived motion vector (S209).
なお、図11に示す例では、インター予測部126は、CTU単位で探索範囲を決定しているが、CTU単位でなくてもよく、例えば複数のCUを集めた単位で探索範囲を決定してもよい。
In the example illustrated in FIG. 11, the inter prediction unit 126 determines the search range in CTU units, but may not be in CTU units, and for example, determines the search range in units of collecting a plurality of CUs It is also good.
また、図11に示す例では、CU単位の処理について説明したが、CUをさらに分割したサブブロック単位の処理を行った場合も同様である。
Further, in the example shown in FIG. 11, the processing in units of CUs has been described, but the same applies to the case where processing in units of sub-blocks obtained by further dividing CUs is performed.
また、図11に示す処理フローは一例であり、記載されている処理の一部を除いたり、記載されていない処理を追加したりしてもよい。
Further, the process flow illustrated in FIG. 11 is an example, and a part of the processes described may be removed or a process not described may be added.
また、復号装置200におけるインター予測処理も、処理に必要となる信号をストリームに符号化するか、ストリームから復号するかの違いのみで、ここで説明した処理フローと基本的に同様である。
In addition, the inter prediction processing in the decoding device 200 is also basically the same as the processing flow described here, with the difference between encoding a signal necessary for processing into a stream or decoding from a stream.
図12は、図11で説明したステップS204において探索範囲外を参照する候補動きベクトルを評価対象から除外する処理を説明するための図である。
FIG. 12 is a diagram for describing a process of excluding a candidate motion vector that refers to the outside of the search range from the evaluation target in step S204 described with reference to FIG.
図12に示す例では、符号化対象又は復号対象のCTUである対象CTUはCU0、CU1、CU2の3つのCUから構成されている。CU0及びCU2はFRUCモードで処理され、CU1はFRUC以外のモードで処理される。
In the example shown in FIG. 12, the target CTU which is a CTU to be encoded or to be decoded is composed of three CUs CU0, CU1, and CU2. CU0 and CU2 are processed in FRUC mode, and CU1 is processed in modes other than FRUC.
CU0は、FRUCモードの候補動きベクトルとしてCU0_MV0とCU0_MV1とを有する。CU0_MV0は探索範囲内を参照するため評価対象に設定される。一方、CU0_MV1は探索範囲外を参照するため評価対象から除外される。
CU0 has CU0_MV0 and CU0_MV1 as candidate motion vectors in the FRUC mode. CU0_MV0 is set as an evaluation target in order to refer to the search range. On the other hand, CU0_MV1 is excluded from the evaluation targets because it refers to the outside of the search range.
CU2は、FRUCモードの候補動きベクトルとしてCU2_MV0とCU2_MV1とを有する。CU2_MV0は探索範囲内を参照するため評価対象に設定される。一方、CU2_MV1は探索範囲外を参照するため評価対象から除外される。
CU2 has CU2_MV0 and CU2_MV1 as candidate motion vectors in the FRUC mode. CU2_MV0 is set as an evaluation target to refer to the search range. On the other hand, CU2_MV1 is excluded from the evaluation targets because it refers to the outside of the search range.
一方、CU1にはFRUC以外のモードが用いられるため、上記の制限処理とは無関係にCU1_MV0が示す参照領域を使用して予測画像が生成される。つまり、FRUC以外のモードが用いられる場合には、探索範囲外を参照する候補動きベクトルが用いられる。
On the other hand, since a mode other than FRUC is used for CU1, a prediction image is generated using the reference area indicated by CU1_MV0 regardless of the above-described restriction processing. That is, when a mode other than FRUC is used, candidate motion vectors that reference the outside of the search range are used.
このように、探索範囲に従ってFRUCの候補動きベクトルの評価対象を限定することで、例え候補動きベクトルの個数が大量にあったとしても、インター予測部126は、探索範囲内の画素を用いてFRUC処理を行える。よって、処理済み領域の画像を格納しているメモリへのアクセス量を限定することが可能となる。さらに評価対象とする候補動きベクトルの個数が削減されるため処理量を抑制することが可能となる。
As described above, by limiting the evaluation target of the candidate motion vector of FRUC according to the search range, the inter prediction unit 126 uses the pixels within the search range as the FRUC even if the number of candidate motion vectors is large. It can process. Therefore, it is possible to limit the amount of access to the memory storing the image of the processed area. Furthermore, since the number of candidate motion vectors to be evaluated is reduced, the amount of processing can be suppressed.
また、FRUC以外のモードでは、導出された動きベクトルが示す参照領域は限られているため、極端にメモリへのアクセス量が増加することはない。
In addition, in modes other than FRUC, since the reference region indicated by the derived motion vector is limited, the amount of access to the memory does not increase extremely.
なお、インター予測部126は、FRUCの各候補動きベクトルが探索範囲内であるか否かの判定の方法として、各候補動きベクトルが示すブロック位置そのものが探索範囲内に納まっているか否を判定するだけではなく、候補動きベクトルが示すブロック位置と、インター予測処理(FRUC処理)に用いられる1以上の領域とが共に探索範囲内に納まっているか否かを判定してもよい。ここで、インター予測処理に用いられる1以上の領域とは、テンプレートマッチングのために必要な周辺領域、小数画素の動きベクトル位置の画素取得のために必要なフィルタタップの適用領域、及びコストが最適となる候補動きベクトルを選択した後に実施する周辺探索のための領域等である。
Note that the inter prediction unit 126 determines whether or not the block position itself indicated by each candidate motion vector falls within the search range, as a method of determining whether each candidate motion vector of FRUC is within the search range. Not only the block position indicated by the candidate motion vector but also one or more regions used in the inter prediction process (FRUC process) may be determined within the search range. Here, the one or more regions used for inter prediction processing are the peripheral region necessary for template matching, the application region of filter taps necessary for pixel acquisition of motion vector positions of decimal pixels, and cost optimum It is an area or the like for a peripheral search to be performed after selecting candidate motion vectors that become.
また、上記の1以上の領域は、FRUC処理を行った後の予測画像生成に関わる他の処理(MC処理、BIO処理、OBMC処理等)において必要となる参照領域を含んでもよい。
In addition, the one or more areas may include a reference area that is required in other processes (MC process, BIO process, OBMC process, etc.) related to the predicted image generation after performing the FRUC process.
また、FRUC処理を行った後の予測画像生成に関わる他の処理(MC処理、BIO処理、OBMC処理、LIC処理等)において、処理に必要となる参照領域が上記探索範囲外であった場合、インター予測部126は、当該他の処理を行わずに予測画像の生成を行ってもよい。
Also, if the reference area required for processing is outside the above search range in other processing (MC processing, BIO processing, OBMC processing, LIC processing, etc.) related to predicted image generation after performing the FRUC processing, The inter prediction unit 126 may generate a prediction image without performing the other processing.
また、上記説明では、1枚の参照ピクチャに対しての処理を説明しているが、複数枚の参照ピクチャに対しての処理も同様である。
In the above description, the process for one reference picture is described, but the process for a plurality of reference pictures is the same.
また、ここで説明した処理は、符号化装置100におけるインター予測処理においても、復号装置200におけるインター予測処理においても共通である。
Also, the processing described here is common to the inter prediction processing in the encoding device 100 and the inter prediction processing in the decoding device 200.
[インター予測処理の第1の例の探索範囲の指定方法]
図13は、図11で説明したステップS201で決定される探索範囲を説明するための図である。 [Method of specifying search range in first example of inter prediction processing]
FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the search range determined in step S201 described with reference to FIG.
図13は、図11で説明したステップS201で決定される探索範囲を説明するための図である。 [Method of specifying search range in first example of inter prediction processing]
FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the search range determined in step S201 described with reference to FIG.
インター予測部126は、参照可能な参照ピクチャと、各参照ピクチャにおける探索領域の大きさ(縦幅×横幅)と、各参照ピクチャにおける探索領域の中心位置と、を含む情報から探索範囲を決定する。
The inter prediction unit 126 determines the search range from information including the reference pictures that can be referred to, the size (vertical width × horizontal width) of the search area in each reference picture, and the center position of the search area in each reference picture. .
図13に示す例では、参照可能な参照ピクチャは、参照ピクチャ1と参照ピクチャ2とであり、参照ピクチャ1における探索領域の縦幅はheight1であり、横幅はwidth1であり、中心位置はcenter1である。参照ピクチャ2における探索領域の縦幅はheight2であり、横幅はwidth2であり、中心位置はcenter2である。
In the example shown in FIG. 13, referenceable reference pictures are reference picture 1 and reference picture 2, the vertical width of the search area in reference picture 1 is height1, horizontal width is width1, and the center position is center1. is there. The vertical width of the search area in the reference picture 2 is height2, the horizontal width is width2, and the center position is center2.
探索領域の大きさは、参照ピクチャ毎に指定されてもよい。これにより、例えば、符号化対象又は復号対象のピクチャである対象ピクチャから時間的に遠い参照ピクチャ2の探索領域を、対象ピクチャから時間的に近い参照ピクチャ1の探索領域より大きくすることで、時間の経過とともにばらつきが大きくなる動領域に対する追従性を高めることが可能となる。
The size of the search area may be designated for each reference picture. Thus, for example, the search area of reference picture 2 that is temporally far from the target picture that is the picture to be encoded or decoded is made larger than the search area of reference picture 1 that is temporally close to the target picture. It is possible to improve the followability to a moving area in which the variation increases with the lapse of time.
また、探索領域の大きさは、全ての参照ピクチャで共通の大きさとして指定されてもよい。これにより、参照ピクチャ毎に探索領域の大きさに関する情報を符号化する必要がなくなるため、探索範囲情報に関わる符号量を抑制することが可能となる。
Also, the size of the search area may be designated as a common size for all reference pictures. This eliminates the need to encode information on the size of the search area for each reference picture, thereby making it possible to suppress the code amount related to the search range information.
また、探索領域の大きさは、参照可能な参照ピクチャの枚数に応じて切替えて指定されてもよい。これにより、例えば、参照可能な参照ピクチャの枚数が少ない場合は探索領域を大きくすることで、より広い範囲を探索可能となる。また、参照可能な参照ピクチャの枚数が多い場合は探索領域を小さくすることでメモリへのアクセス量を抑制できる。
Further, the size of the search area may be switched and designated in accordance with the number of reference pictures that can be referred to. Thus, for example, when the number of reference pictures that can be referred to is small, it is possible to search a wider range by enlarging the search area. When the number of reference pictures that can be referred to is large, the amount of access to the memory can be suppressed by reducing the search area.
なお、参照可能な参照ピクチャの枚数及び探索領域の大きさの上限に関する情報、又は、全ての参照ピクチャにおける探索領域の大きさの総和の上限に関する情報が、符号化対象又は復号対象のストリームである対象ストリームに割り当てられるプロファイル値又はレベル値に対応付けて規定され、符号化装置100は、参照ピクチャの枚数及び探索領域の大きさ、又は探索領域の大きさの総和が、規定された上限以下となるように探索領域の大きさ等を設定してもよい。例えば、処理能力の低い復号装置を想定したレベルでは、探索領域の大きさの総和の上限を小さな値として規定される。これにより、メモリ転送速度の遅い復号装置でもストリームを復号できることを保証することが可能となる。
Information on the number of referable reference pictures and the upper limit of the size of the search area, or information on the upper limit of the sum of sizes of the search areas in all reference pictures is a stream to be encoded or decoded. The encoding apparatus 100 defines the number of reference pictures and the size of the search area or the sum of the sizes of the search areas to be less than or equal to the specified upper limit. The size of the search area may be set to For example, at a level assuming a decoding apparatus with low processing power, the upper limit of the sum of the sizes of the search areas is defined as a small value. This makes it possible to guarantee that the decoder can decode the stream even at a low memory transfer rate.
中心位置は、対象ピクチャにおける対象CTUの位置に対して、各参照ピクチャにおける探索領域の位置がどれくらいシフトした位置であるかによって示される。なお、図13の例では、中心位置は対象CTUの中心位置を基準にして指定されているが、例えば左上の位置等を基準にして中心位置が指定されてもよい。
The center position is indicated by how much the position of the search area in each reference picture is shifted with respect to the position of the target CTU in the target picture. In the example of FIG. 13, the center position is specified based on the center position of the target CTU, but the center position may be specified based on, for example, the upper left position.
各参照ピクチャにおける探索領域の中心位置の指定方法としては、(1)対象CTU毎に中心位置シフト量を導出して指定する方法、(2)対象ピクチャ内の全てのCTUで共通の中心位置シフト量を導出して指定する方法、の2つの方法がある。
As a method of specifying the center position of the search area in each reference picture, (1) a method of deriving and specifying a center position shift amount for each target CTU, (2) center position shift common to all CTUs in the target picture There are two ways to derive and specify the quantity.
図14は、図13で説明した探索領域の中心位置シフト量を、対象CTU毎に導出する方法を説明するための図である。
FIG. 14 is a diagram for describing a method of deriving the center position shift amount of the search area described in FIG. 13 for each target CTU.
図14では、インター予測部126は、対象CTUに対して上側に隣接する処理済みCTU(Upper-CTU)、対象CTUに対して左側に隣接する処理済みCTU(Left-CTU)、及び処理済みピクチャにおける対象CTUと同じ位置にある処理済みCTU(Col-CTU)を参照し、各々の処理済みCTUに属するCUの動きベクトル値を用いて、対象CTUの探索領域の中心位置シフト量を導出している。
In FIG. 14, the inter prediction unit 126 is configured such that a processed CTU (upper-CTU) adjacent to the upper side with respect to the target CTU, a processed CTU (left-CTU) adjacent to the left with respect to the target CTU, and a processed picture. Referring to the processed CTU (Col-CTU) at the same position as the target CTU in, and using the motion vector values of the CUs belonging to each processed CTU, the center position shift amount of the search area of the target CTU is derived There is.
具体的には、インター予測部126は、参照する処理済みCTUに属する全てのCUの動きベクトルの平均値を中心位置シフト量として算出する。または、インター予測部126は、参照する処理済みCTU毎に平均動きベクトル値を導出し、導出した複数の平均動きベクトル値のいずれかを選択し、選択した平均動きベクトル値を中心位置シフト量として算出する。
Specifically, the inter prediction unit 126 calculates an average value of motion vectors of all CUs belonging to the processed CTU to be referred to as a center position shift amount. Alternatively, the inter prediction unit 126 derives an average motion vector value for each processed CTU to be referenced, selects one of a plurality of derived average motion vector values, and uses the selected average motion vector value as a center position shift amount calculate.
なお、図13に示す例のように、参照可能な参照ピクチャが複数ある場合は、インター予測部126は、処理済みCTUに属するCUのうち対象とする参照ピクチャを参照しているCUの動きベクトルを用いて中心位置シフト量を導出してもよい。
Note that, as in the example illustrated in FIG. 13, when there are a plurality of reference pictures that can be referred to, the inter prediction unit 126 determines a motion vector of a CU that refers to the target reference picture among the CUs belonging to the processed CTU. The center position shift amount may be derived using
このように、インター予測部126は、対象CTU毎に周辺の処理済みCTUを参照して中心位置シフト量を導出することで、ストリームに中心位置に関する情報を符号化することなく、局所的に動きの異なるような画像に対しても最適な探索領域を指定することが可能となる。これにより、符号量を増加させることなく符号化性能を向上させることが可能となる。
As described above, the inter prediction unit 126 locally moves the information without encoding the information on the center position in the stream by deriving the center position shift amount with reference to the processed CTUs in the periphery for each target CTU. It is possible to specify an optimal search area even for images of different types. This makes it possible to improve coding performance without increasing the code amount.
なお、図14では、Upper-CTU、Left-CTU、及びCol-CTUの3つの処理済みCTUを参照して中心位置シフト量を導出する例を説明したが、参照する処理済みCTUはこれに限らない。例えば、インター予測部126は、上記の3つの処理済みCTUのいずれか1つ又は2つを用いてもよいし、3つの処理済みCTU以外の処理済みCTUを用いてもよい。例えば、インター予測部126は、対象CTUに対して処理順が直前であるLeft-CTUを参照せずに中心位置シフト量を導出してもよい。これにより、インター予測部126は、Left-CTUに属する各CUの動きベクトルの導出処理の完了を待たずに、対象CTUのための探索領域の参照画素のメモリ転送を開始することが可能となる。これにより、メモリ転送完了の待ち時間を短縮させることが可能となる。
Although FIG. 14 illustrates an example of deriving the center position shift amount with reference to three processed CTUs, Upper-CTU, Left-CTU, and Col-CTU, the processed CTU to be referred is limited to this. Absent. For example, the inter prediction unit 126 may use any one or two of the three processed CTUs described above, or may use a processed CTU other than the three processed CTUs. For example, the inter prediction unit 126 may derive the center position shift amount without referring to the Left-CTU whose processing order is immediately before the target CTU. This enables the inter prediction unit 126 to start memory transfer of reference pixels in the search area for the target CTU without waiting for the completion of the process of deriving motion vectors of the respective CUs belonging to the Left-CTU. . This makes it possible to shorten the waiting time for the completion of memory transfer.
なお、ここで説明した処理は、符号化装置100におけるインター予測処理においても、復号装置200におけるインター予測処理においても共通である。
Note that the processing described here is common to both the inter prediction processing in the encoding device 100 and the inter prediction processing in the decoding device 200.
また、符号化装置100は、周辺の処理済みCTUを参照することなく、直接的に対象CTUの中心位置シフト量を判定し、ストリームに対象CTU毎の中心位置に関する情報を符号化してもよい。これにより、符号量は増加するがより正確な探索領域を指定できるため符号化性能を向上させることが可能となる。また、復号装置200は、ストリームから対象CTU毎の中心位置に関する情報を直接復号して取得することができるため、処理の簡略化が可能となる。
Also, the encoding apparatus 100 may directly determine the center position shift amount of the target CTU without referring to the processed CTUs in the periphery, and encode information on the center position for each target CTU in the stream. As a result, although the code amount is increased, a more accurate search area can be specified, which makes it possible to improve the coding performance. In addition, since the decoding apparatus 200 can directly acquire information about the center position of each target CTU from the stream, the processing can be simplified.
図15は、図13で説明した探索領域の中心位置シフト量を、対象ピクチャ内の全てのCTUで共通の値として導出する方法を説明するための図である。
FIG. 15 is a diagram for describing a method of deriving the center position shift amount of the search area described in FIG. 13 as a value common to all CTUs in the target picture.
図15では、インター予測部126は、処理済みピクチャ全体の動きベクトルを参照して、対象ピクチャ内の全てのCTUに対して共通の中心位置シフト量を導出している。
In FIG. 15, the inter prediction unit 126 derives a common center position shift amount for all CTUs in the target picture, with reference to the motion vector of the entire processed picture.
具体的には、インター予測部126は、処理済みピクチャの複数のCUの複数の動きベクトルの統計量を集計し、集計した統計量を用いて対象ピクチャ全体の動きベクトルを推定する。そして、インター予測部126は、推定された動きベクトル値を中心位置シフト量として各CTUに設定する。例えば、インター予測部126は、統計量として処理済みピクチャ内の全てCUの動きベクトルから導出した平均動きベクトルを用いる。これにより、インター予測部126は、平均動きベクトルをそのまま対象ピクチャ全体の推定動きベクトル値として用いて中心位置シフト量を導出することができる。または、インター予測部126は、統計量として処理済みピクチャの動きベクトルを複数のクラスに分類し、クラス毎に導出した平均動きベクトルを用いる。これにより、インター予測部126は、導出された複数の平均動きベクトルの中から最適なものを選択し、選択した平均動きベクトルを対象ピクチャ全体の推定動きベクトル値として用いることができる。よって、インター予測部126は、最適な中心位置シフト量を導出することができる。
Specifically, the inter prediction unit 126 aggregates statistics of motion vectors of a plurality of CUs of processed pictures, and estimates motion vectors of the entire target picture using the aggregated statistics. Then, the inter prediction unit 126 sets the estimated motion vector value to each CTU as the center position shift amount. For example, the inter prediction unit 126 uses, as a statistic, an average motion vector derived from motion vectors of all CUs in the processed picture. Thus, the inter prediction unit 126 can derive the center position shift amount using the average motion vector as it is as the estimated motion vector value of the entire target picture. Alternatively, the inter prediction unit 126 classifies motion vectors of the processed picture into a plurality of classes as statistics and uses an average motion vector derived for each class. Thereby, the inter prediction unit 126 can select an optimal one from among the plurality of derived average motion vectors, and can use the selected average motion vector as an estimated motion vector value of the entire target picture. Therefore, the inter prediction unit 126 can derive an optimal center position shift amount.
なお、図13に示す例のように参照可能な参照ピクチャが複数ある場合は、インター予測部126は、対象ピクチャ全体の推定動きベクトル値を参照ピクチャまでの時間距離に応じてスケーリングし、得られた値を用いて中心位置シフト量を導出してもよい。または、インター予測部126は、クラス毎に求めた複数の平均動きベクトルから参照ピクチャ毎に最適な平均動きベクトルを選択し、選択した平均動きベクトルを用いて中心位置シフト量を導出してもよい。
When there are a plurality of reference pictures that can be referred to as in the example shown in FIG. 13, the inter prediction unit 126 scales the estimated motion vector value of the entire target picture according to the time distance to the reference picture. The center position shift amount may be derived using the above value. Alternatively, the inter prediction unit 126 may select an optimal average motion vector for each reference picture from a plurality of average motion vectors obtained for each class, and derive the center position shift amount using the selected average motion vector. .
このように、インター予測部126は、対象ピクチャ内の全てのCTUで共通の中心位置シフト量を導出し、中心位置に関する情報をピクチャ単位でストリームに符号化すればよい。よって、符号量を増加させずに中心位置を指定することが可能となる。また、CTU単位で中心位置を導出する処理が不要となるため、処理量を増加させずに中心位置を指定することが可能となる。
As described above, the inter prediction unit 126 may derive a central position shift amount common to all CTUs in the target picture, and encode information on the central position into a stream on a picture basis. Therefore, it becomes possible to specify the center position without increasing the code amount. In addition, since the process of deriving the center position on a CTU basis is unnecessary, the center position can be specified without increasing the amount of processing.
なお、図15では、ピクチャ全体で動きベクトルを推定して対象ピクチャ内の全てのCTUに対して共通の中心位置シフト量を導出する例を説明したが、インター予測部126は、ピクチャを複数の領域に分割したスライス毎に動きベクトルを推定し、対象スライス内の全てのCTUに対して共通の中心位置シフト量を導出してもよい。これにより、スライス毎に動きが異なるような画像に対しても最適な探索領域を指定することが可能となる。
Although FIG. 15 illustrates an example in which a motion position is estimated for the entire picture and a common center position shift amount is derived for all CTUs in the target picture, the inter prediction unit 126 has a plurality of pictures. A motion vector may be estimated for each slice divided into regions, and a common center position shift amount may be derived for all CTUs in the target slice. As a result, it becomes possible to specify an optimum search area even for an image whose motion is different for each slice.
また、図15では、処理済みピクチャの動きベクトルの情報を用いて中心位置シフト量を導出する例を説明したが、インター予測部126は、処理済みピクチャの動きベクトルの情報を用いずに、対象ピクチャの入力画像を用いて直接的に対象ピクチャ全体の動きを推定し、推定した動きを用いて中心位置シフト量を導出してもよい。これにより、処理量は増加するがより正確な対象ピクチャ全体の動きベクトルを推定することが可能となる。さらに、最適な探索領域を指定することが可能となる。
Although FIG. 15 illustrates an example in which the center position shift amount is derived using the information of the motion vector of the processed picture, the inter prediction unit 126 is not the object of the motion picture of the processed picture. The motion of the entire target picture may be directly estimated using the input image of the picture, and the center position shift amount may be derived using the estimated motion. As a result, it is possible to estimate the motion vector of the entire target picture more accurately although the amount of processing is increased. Furthermore, it becomes possible to specify an optimal search area.
また、中心位置シフト量として常に値0(対象CTUと同位置)が用いられてもよい。これにより、インター予測部126は、全く処理を行わずに中心位置を導出することが可能となる。さらに、インター予測部126は、中心位置に関する情報をストリーム符号化することなく処理を行うことが可能となる。
Also, the value 0 (the same position as the target CTU) may always be used as the center position shift amount. Thus, the inter prediction unit 126 can derive the center position without performing any processing. Furthermore, the inter prediction unit 126 can perform processing without stream encoding information on the center position.
なお、ここで説明した処理は、符号化装置100におけるインター予測処理における処理であるが、復号装置200は、説明した処理によって生成されたストリームを復号することで、中心位置に関する情報を取得する。
Note that the process described here is a process in the inter prediction process in the encoding apparatus 100, but the decoding apparatus 200 acquires information on the center position by decoding the stream generated by the described process.
[インター予測処理の第1の例のメモリアクセス方法]
図16A及び図16Bは、符号化装置100におけるインター予測処理の第1の例における、処理済み領域の画像を格納しているメモリからのデータ転送方法を説明するための図である。 [Memory access method of the first example of inter prediction processing]
FIGS. 16A and 16B are diagrams for explaining the data transfer method from the memory storing the image of the processed area in the first example of the inter prediction processing inencoding apparatus 100.
図16A及び図16Bは、符号化装置100におけるインター予測処理の第1の例における、処理済み領域の画像を格納しているメモリからのデータ転送方法を説明するための図である。 [Memory access method of the first example of inter prediction processing]
FIGS. 16A and 16B are diagrams for explaining the data transfer method from the memory storing the image of the processed area in the first example of the inter prediction processing in
図12を用いて説明したように、第1の例では、FRUCモードで参照するための探索範囲の参照画素の転送と、FRUC以外のモードで参照するための参照画素の転送とが必要である。図16A及び図16Bに示す例では、FRUCモードで参照するための探索範囲の参照画素の転送は、対象CTUの処理が開始する前に完了し、FRUC以外のモードで参照するための参照画素の転送は、対象CTUに属する各CUの動きベクトルが確定した時点で行われる。
As described with reference to FIG. 12, in the first example, transfer of reference pixels in the search range for reference in the FRUC mode and transfer of reference pixels for reference in the modes other than FRUC are necessary. . In the example shown in FIGS. 16A and 16B, the transfer of the reference pixel in the search range for reference in the FRUC mode is completed before the processing of the target CTU starts, and the reference pixel for reference in a mode other than FRUC. The transfer is performed when the motion vector of each CU belonging to the target CTU is determined.
図16Aに示す例では、CTU1のための探索範囲を決めるために必要な中心位置シフト量が、処理順で直前のCTU0の動きベクトルを用いて導出される。例えば、図14で説明したLeft-CTUの動きベクトルを用いて中心位置シフト量を導出する場合がこれに相当する。CTU0の処理過程の中で、CTU0に属する全てのCUの動きベクトルが確定した時点でCTU1のための探索範囲の参照画素の転送が開始される。これにより、CTU0の処理が完了するまでに転送処理が完了せず、CTU1の処理が待たされる可能性がある。転送速度が充分に早い場合、又は1つのCTUの処理に割り当てることのできる処理時間が充分に長い場合は、待ち時間を小さくすることができるが、そうでない場合は待ち時間が大きくなり、必要とされる処理時間内に対象ピクチャの処理を完了できなくなる可能性がある。
In the example illustrated in FIG. 16A, the center position shift amount necessary to determine the search range for CTU1 is derived using the motion vector of CTU0 immediately before in processing order. For example, the case of deriving the center position shift amount using the Left-CTU motion vector described in FIG. 14 corresponds to this. In the process of CTU0, transfer of reference pixels in the search range for CTU1 is started when the motion vectors of all the CUs belonging to CTU0 are determined. As a result, the transfer process may not be completed before the CTU0 process is completed, and the CTU1 process may be kept waiting. If the transfer rate is fast enough, or if the processing time that can be allocated to process one CTU is long enough, the latency can be small, but otherwise the latency will be large and the There is a possibility that the processing of the target picture can not be completed within the required processing time.
一方、図16Bに示す例では、CTU1のための探索範囲を決めるために必要な中心位置シフト量が、処理順で直前のCTU0の動きベクトルを用いずに導出される。例えば、図14で説明したLeft-CTUの動きベクトルを用いずに中心位置シフト量を導出する場合、又は図15で説明した対象ピクチャ内の全てのCTUで共通の中心位置シフト量を導出する場合がこれに相当する。CTU0の処理とは無関係にCTU1のための探索範囲の参照画素の転送を開始することができるため、早い時点で転送処理を開始できる。これにより、CTU0の処理が完了する前に転送処理を完了させることができるので、待ち時間なくCTU1の処理を開始させることが可能となる。これにより、転送速度が充分に早くない場合、又は1つのCTUの処理に割り当てることのできる処理時間が充分に長くない場合でも、待ち時間を小さくすることができる。よって、割り当てられた処理時間内に対象ピクチャの処理を完了させることができる可能性が高くなる。
On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 16B, the center position shift amount necessary to determine the search range for CTU1 is derived without using the motion vector of CTU0 immediately before in the processing order. For example, in the case of deriving the center position shift amount without using the Left-CTU motion vector described in FIG. 14 or in the case of deriving the common center position shift amount in all CTUs in the target picture described in FIG. Is equivalent to this. Since transfer of reference pixels in the search range for CTU1 can be started independently of the processing of CTU0, transfer processing can be started at an early point. As a result, the transfer process can be completed before the CTU 0 process is completed, so that the CTU 1 process can be started without waiting time. This allows the latency to be reduced even if the transfer rate is not fast enough, or if the processing time that can be allocated to the processing of one CTU is not long enough. Therefore, there is a high possibility that the processing of the target picture can be completed within the allocated processing time.
なお、ここで説明したデータ転送方法は一例であり、記載されている処理の一部を除いたり、記載されていない処理を追加したりしてもよい。
Note that the data transfer method described here is an example, and part of the described processing may be removed or processing not described may be added.
また、復号装置200におけるインター予測処理のデータ転送方法も基本的に同様である。
Also, the data transfer method of the inter prediction process in the decoding device 200 is basically the same.
図17A~図17Cは、図16に示す例で説明したCTU1のための探索範囲の参照画素の転送において、データ転送が必要な画素領域を説明するための図である。
FIGS. 17A to 17C are diagrams for describing a pixel region which requires data transfer in transfer of reference pixels in a search range for CTU 1 described in the example shown in FIG.
図17Aは、CTU1の探索範囲の全ての画素領域を転送する場合の例を示している。この例では、CTU1よりも先に処理を行ったCTUで転送した画素領域とは無関係に、常に斜線で示したCTU1の探索範囲の全ての画素領域が転送されるため、転送量は多くなる。一方で、必要となる転送量が常に一定となり、かつ他のCTUで転送した画素領域を考慮することなく制御が可能となるため、データ転送に関わる制御を単純化させることが可能となる。
FIG. 17A shows an example in the case of transferring all pixel areas of the search range of CTU1. In this example, since all pixel areas in the search range of CTU1 indicated by oblique lines are always transferred regardless of the pixel area transferred by CTU processed prior to CTU1, the transfer amount increases. On the other hand, since the required transfer amount is always constant, and control can be performed without considering pixel areas transferred by other CTUs, control related to data transfer can be simplified.
図17Bは、CTU1の探索範囲のうち一部の画素領域のみを転送する場合の例を示している。この例では、CTU1の探索範囲のうち、CTU1よりも先に処理を行ったCTUで転送されていなかった斜線で示した画素領域を転送する。図17Bに示す例では、図17Aの例と比較して必要な転送量を削減することが可能となる。一方で、各CTUで転送したデータをそれ以降のCTUで使用するために内部に確保しておく仕組みが必要となる。さらに、各CTUの探索範囲の中心位置シフト量が異なることによってCTU毎に必要となる転送量が変わってしまうため、データ転送に関わる制御が複雑になる可能性がある。
FIG. 17B shows an example in the case of transferring only a part of pixel regions in the search range of CTU1. In this example, among the search range of CTU1, a pixel area indicated by hatching not transferred by the CTU processed earlier than CTU1 is transferred. In the example shown in FIG. 17B, the required transfer amount can be reduced as compared with the example of FIG. 17A. On the other hand, it is necessary to have a mechanism for internally securing data transferred in each CTU for use in subsequent CTUs. Furthermore, since the amount of transfer required for each CTU changes due to the difference in the amount of shift of the central position of the search range of each CTU, control related to data transfer may be complicated.
図17Cは、CTU1の探索範囲のうち一部の画素領域のみを転送する場合の別の例を示している。図17Bの例では、CTU毎に探索範囲の中心位置シフト量が異なることを想定した転送方法を説明したが、図17Cの例では、各CTUの探索範囲の中心位置シフト量が共通であることを想定している。例えば、図15で説明した対象ピクチャ内の全てのCTUで共通の中心位置シフト量を導出する場合がこれに相当する。各CTUの探索範囲の中心位置シフト量が同じであるため、対象CTUが右方向に1つ分進む度に、探索範囲の右端のCTU幅に対応した斜線で示した画素領域が転送される。図17Cに示す例では、図17Aの例と比較して必要な転送量を削減することが可能となる。さらに、各CTUに必要となる転送量が常に一定なので、データ転送に関わる制御を単純化させることが可能となる。
FIG. 17C shows another example in the case of transferring only a part of pixel areas in the search range of CTU1. In the example of FIG. 17B, the transfer method assuming that the central position shift amount of the search range is different for each CTU has been described, but in the example of FIG. 17C, the central position shift amount of the search range of each CTU is common Is assumed. For example, the case where the central position shift amount common to all the CTUs in the target picture described in FIG. 15 is derived corresponds to this. Since the center position shift amount of the search range of each CTU is the same, whenever the target CTU advances one direction to the right, the pixel region indicated by the diagonal line corresponding to the CTU width at the right end of the search range is transferred. In the example shown in FIG. 17C, the required transfer amount can be reduced as compared to the example of FIG. 17A. Furthermore, since the transfer amount required for each CTU is always constant, control related to data transfer can be simplified.
[インター予測処理の第1の例のバリエーション]
なお、図13で説明した探索範囲を決定するための参照可能な参照ピクチャ及び各参照ピクチャにおける探索領域の大きさに関する情報を、符号化装置100は、対象ストリームのシーケンスヘッダ領域、ピクチャヘッダ領域、スライスヘッダ領域又は補助情報領域に符号化し、復号装置200は、それらの領域から上記情報を復号してもよい。 [Variation of first example of inter prediction processing]
Note that theencoding apparatus 100 can refer to a reference header that can be referred to for determining the search range described in FIG. 13 and information on the size of the search area in each reference picture, the sequence header area of the target stream, the picture header area, The slice header area or the side information area may be encoded, and the decoding apparatus 200 may decode the above information from those areas.
なお、図13で説明した探索範囲を決定するための参照可能な参照ピクチャ及び各参照ピクチャにおける探索領域の大きさに関する情報を、符号化装置100は、対象ストリームのシーケンスヘッダ領域、ピクチャヘッダ領域、スライスヘッダ領域又は補助情報領域に符号化し、復号装置200は、それらの領域から上記情報を復号してもよい。 [Variation of first example of inter prediction processing]
Note that the
例えば、符号化装置100は、ストリームの送信先の復号装置200の処理能力に応じて、参照可能な参照ピクチャの枚数及び探索領域の大きさを切替えてもよい。例えば、符号化装置100は、復号装置200の処理能力が高い場合は、復号装置200が一定の処理時間で多くの処理が可能であるため広い探索範囲を設定し、復号装置200の処理能力が低い場合は、復号装置200が一定の処理時間で多くの処理ができないため狭い探索範囲を設定してもよい。
For example, the encoding apparatus 100 may switch the number of reference pictures that can be referred to and the size of the search area according to the processing capability of the decoding apparatus 200 at the transmission destination of the stream. For example, when the processing capability of the decoding device 200 is high, the encoding device 100 sets a wide search range because the decoding device 200 can perform many processes in a fixed processing time, and the processing capability of the decoding device 200 If it is low, the decoding apparatus 200 may set a narrow search range because it can not perform many processes in a fixed processing time.
また、符号化装置100は、対象ストリームに割り当てられたプロファイル又はレベル情報に応じて、参照可能な参照ピクチャの枚数及び探索領域の大きさを切替えてもよい。例えば、符号化装置100は、充分な復号装置200の処理能力を想定したプロファイル及びレベルでは広い探索範囲を設定し、充分でない復号装置200の処理能力を想定したプロファイル及びレベルでは狭い探索範囲を設定してもよい。
Also, the encoding apparatus 100 may switch the number of reference pictures that can be referred to and the size of the search area according to the profile or level information assigned to the target stream. For example, the encoding apparatus 100 sets a wide search range at a profile and a level assuming sufficient processing power of the decoding apparatus 200, and sets a narrow search range at a profile and a level assuming the processing capacity of the insufficient decoding apparatus 200. You may
また、符号化装置100は、対象ピクチャのサイズに応じて、参照可能な参照ピクチャの枚数及び探索領域の大きさを切替えてもよい。例えば、符号化装置100は、ピクチャサイズが小さい場合は、処理するブロック数が少なく処理時間に余裕があるため広い探索範囲を設定し、ピクチャサイズが大きい場合は、処理するブロック数が多く処理時間に余裕がないため狭い探索範囲を設定してもよい。もしくは逆に、符号化装置100は、ピクチャサイズが小さい場合は、動きベクトルが過度にばらつくのを抑制するために狭い探索範囲を設定し、ピクチャサイズが大きい場合は、より広い範囲を探索できるように広い探索範囲を設定してもよい。
Also, the encoding apparatus 100 may switch the number of reference pictures that can be referred to and the size of the search area according to the size of the target picture. For example, when the picture size is small, the encoding apparatus 100 sets a wide search range because the number of blocks to be processed is small and the processing time has a margin, and when the picture size is large, the number of blocks to be processed is large. A narrow search range may be set because there is no room for Or, conversely, if the picture size is small, the encoding apparatus 100 sets a narrow search range to suppress excessive variation of motion vectors, and if the picture size is large, it can search a wider range. A wide search range may be set.
なお、ストリームに符号化される、参照可能な参照ピクチャ及び各参照ピクチャにおける探索領域の大きさに関する情報は、厳密にそれらを示す情報の信号でなくてもよく、他の意味を持つ信号として符号化されてもよい。例えば、前記情報をプロファイル及びレベルに直接対応付けることにより、復号装置200は、プロファイル及びレベルを示す信号を用いて前記情報を特定できる。
Note that the referenceable reference pictures encoded in the stream and the information on the size of the search area in each reference picture may not be signals of information strictly indicating them, and may be coded as signals having other meanings. It may be For example, by directly associating the information with the profile and the level, the decoding device 200 can specify the information using a signal indicating the profile and the level.
[インター予測処理の第1の例のその他のバリエーション]
なお、図13から図15で説明したインター予測処理の第1の例の探索範囲の指定方法では、参照ピクチャ毎に探索領域を定義していたが、参照ピクチャの代わりに参照インデックス毎に探索領域を定義してもよい。例えば、同じ1つの参照ピクチャに対して複数の参照インデックスを対応付けることにより、同じ1つの参照ピクチャ内に複数の探索領域を設定することが可能となる。これにより、参照インデックスを使い分けることでより広い範囲の領域を探索することが可能となる。 [Other variations of the first example of inter prediction processing]
In the search range specification method of the first example of the inter prediction processing described in FIGS. 13 to 15, the search area is defined for each reference picture, but instead of the reference picture, the search area for each reference index You may define For example, by associating a plurality of reference indices with the same one reference picture, it becomes possible to set a plurality of search areas in the same one reference picture. This makes it possible to search a wider range of regions by using different reference indexes.
なお、図13から図15で説明したインター予測処理の第1の例の探索範囲の指定方法では、参照ピクチャ毎に探索領域を定義していたが、参照ピクチャの代わりに参照インデックス毎に探索領域を定義してもよい。例えば、同じ1つの参照ピクチャに対して複数の参照インデックスを対応付けることにより、同じ1つの参照ピクチャ内に複数の探索領域を設定することが可能となる。これにより、参照インデックスを使い分けることでより広い範囲の領域を探索することが可能となる。 [Other variations of the first example of inter prediction processing]
In the search range specification method of the first example of the inter prediction processing described in FIGS. 13 to 15, the search area is defined for each reference picture, but instead of the reference picture, the search area for each reference index You may define For example, by associating a plurality of reference indices with the same one reference picture, it becomes possible to set a plurality of search areas in the same one reference picture. This makes it possible to search a wider range of regions by using different reference indexes.
また、符号化装置100は、図14で説明した探索領域の中心位置シフト量を対象CTU毎に導出する第1の方法と、図15で説明した探索領域の中心位置シフト量を対象ピクチャ内の全てのCTUで共通の値として導出する第2の方法とを、ピクチャ単位で切り替えてもよい。例えば、符号化装置100は、画面内で異なる動きをしている領域が混在している場合は第1の方法を使用し、画面内の全ての領域で同じような動きをしているピクチャでは第2の方法を使用する。これにより、符号化効率を低下させずに適切な探索領域を指定することが可能となる。また、符号化装置100は、第1の方法と第2の方法とのどちらの方法を使用するかを示す情報を、ピクチャヘッダ領域、スライスヘッダ領域又は補助情報領域に符号化し、復号装置200は、それらの領域から上記情報を復号して取得してもよい。
Also, the coding apparatus 100 uses the first method of deriving the center position shift amount of the search area described in FIG. 14 for each target CTU, and the center position shift amount of the search area described in FIG. A second method of deriving a value common to all CTUs may be switched on a picture basis. For example, the encoding apparatus 100 uses the first method when there are mixed regions that perform different movements in the screen, and in the case of a picture that performs the same movement in all the regions in the screen. Use the second method. This makes it possible to specify an appropriate search area without reducing the coding efficiency. In addition, the encoding apparatus 100 encodes information indicating which of the first method and the second method is to be used in the picture header area, slice header area or auxiliary information area, and the decoding apparatus 200 The above information may be decoded and acquired from those areas.
[インター予測処理の第1の例の効果]
図11から図17Cを用いて説明した構成により、対象CTUをFRUCモードを用いて処理する場合に、処理済み領域の画像を格納しているメモリへのアクセス量を限定できるので、データ転送に関わる処理時間を抑制できる。さらに、評価対象とするFRUCの候補動きベクトルの個数が削減されるので、FRUC処理に関わる処理量を抑制することができる。これにより、処理性能の低い符号化装置100及び復号装置200でも1ピクチャに割り当てられた処理時間内に全てのブロックの処理を完了させることができる可能性が高くなる。 [Effect of the first example of inter prediction processing]
With the configuration described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 17C, when processing the target CTU using the FRUC mode, the amount of access to the memory storing the image of the processed area can be limited, and thus the data transfer is involved. Processing time can be suppressed. Furthermore, since the number of FRUC candidate motion vectors to be evaluated is reduced, the amount of processing related to the FRUC processing can be suppressed. As a result, there is a high possibility that the processing of all the blocks can be completed within the processing time allocated to one picture even in thecoding apparatus 100 and the decoding apparatus 200 with low processing performance.
図11から図17Cを用いて説明した構成により、対象CTUをFRUCモードを用いて処理する場合に、処理済み領域の画像を格納しているメモリへのアクセス量を限定できるので、データ転送に関わる処理時間を抑制できる。さらに、評価対象とするFRUCの候補動きベクトルの個数が削減されるので、FRUC処理に関わる処理量を抑制することができる。これにより、処理性能の低い符号化装置100及び復号装置200でも1ピクチャに割り当てられた処理時間内に全てのブロックの処理を完了させることができる可能性が高くなる。 [Effect of the first example of inter prediction processing]
With the configuration described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 17C, when processing the target CTU using the FRUC mode, the amount of access to the memory storing the image of the processed area can be limited, and thus the data transfer is involved. Processing time can be suppressed. Furthermore, since the number of FRUC candidate motion vectors to be evaluated is reduced, the amount of processing related to the FRUC processing can be suppressed. As a result, there is a high possibility that the processing of all the blocks can be completed within the processing time allocated to one picture even in the
[インター予測処理の第2の例]
図18は、符号化装置100におけるインター予測処理の第2の例のフローチャートである。図18に示す処理は、図11に示す第1の例の処理に対して、ステップS210が追加されている点が異なる。 [Second example of inter prediction processing]
FIG. 18 is a flowchart of a second example of inter prediction processing in theencoding device 100. The process shown in FIG. 18 is different from the process of the first example shown in FIG. 11 in that step S210 is added.
図18は、符号化装置100におけるインター予測処理の第2の例のフローチャートである。図18に示す処理は、図11に示す第1の例の処理に対して、ステップS210が追加されている点が異なる。 [Second example of inter prediction processing]
FIG. 18 is a flowchart of a second example of inter prediction processing in the
第1の例では、符号化装置100は、FRUCモードを対象として、ステップS201で決定された探索範囲の外を参照するFRUC処理の候補動きベクトルを評価対象から除外する(S204)。これに対して、第2の例では、符号化装置100は、FRUC以外のモードにおいてもステップS201で決定された探索範囲の外を参照するモードを除外する(S210)。
In the first example, the coding apparatus 100 excludes candidate motion vectors of the FRUC process that refers to the outside of the search range determined in step S201 from the evaluation targets, in the FRUC mode (S204). On the other hand, in the second example, the encoding apparatus 100 excludes a mode that refers to the outside of the search range determined in step S201 even in modes other than FRUC (S210).
これにより、FRUCモードを含む全てのインター予測モードのうち、探索範囲内の画素を参照するインター予測モードが使用可能となる。これにより、対象CTUに属する全てのCUによる参照が探索範囲内の領域に制限されるため、処理済み領域の画像を格納しているメモリへのアクセス量をさらに限定することが可能となる。
As a result, among all the inter prediction modes including the FRUC mode, the inter prediction mode that refers to the pixels within the search range can be used. As a result, since the references by all the CUs belonging to the target CTU are limited to the area within the search range, it is possible to further limit the access amount to the memory storing the image of the processed area.
なお、図18に示す例では、符号化装置100は、CTU単位で探索範囲を決定しているが、CTU単位でなくてもよく、例えば複数のCUを集めた単位で探索範囲を決定してもよい。
In the example illustrated in FIG. 18, although the encoding device 100 determines the search range in CTU units, it may not be in CTU units, and for example, the search range is determined in units of collecting a plurality of CUs It is also good.
また、図18に示す例では、CU単位の処理について説明したが、CUをさらに分割したサブブロック単位の処理を行った場合も同様である。
Further, in the example shown in FIG. 18, the processing in units of CUs has been described, but the same applies to the case where processing in units of subblocks obtained by further dividing CUs is performed.
また、図18に示す処理フローは一例であり、記載されている処理の一部を除いたり、記載されていない処理を追加したりしてもよい。
In addition, the process flow illustrated in FIG. 18 is an example, and part of the processes described may be removed or processes not described may be added.
また、ここでは、符号化装置100におけるインター予測処理における処理を説明したが、復号装置200においても、FRUCモードが用いられる場合は、符号化装置100と同様の処理が行われる。FRUC以外のモードが用いられる場合は、説明した処理によって生成されたストリームを復号装置200が復号することで、自動的に探索範囲外を参照するインター予測モードを使用することなく復号処理が行われることになる。
Moreover, although the process in the inter prediction process in the encoding apparatus 100 was demonstrated here, also in the decoding apparatus 200, when a FRUC mode is used, the process similar to the encoding apparatus 100 is performed. When a mode other than FRUC is used, the decoding device 200 decodes the stream generated by the above-described processing, whereby the decoding processing is performed without using the inter prediction mode that refers to the outside of the search range automatically. It will be.
図19は、図18で説明したステップS204及びS210において探索範囲外を参照するFRUCの候補動きベクトル及びFRUC以外のモードを評価対象から除外する処理を説明するための図である。
FIG. 19 is a diagram for describing a process of excluding a candidate motion vector of FRUC which refers to the outside of the search range and modes other than FRUC in steps S204 and S210 described in FIG. 18 from evaluation targets.
図12で説明した第1の例における処理との違いは、FRUC以外のモードが用いられるCU1において、CU1_MV0の示す領域が探索範囲外にあるため、CU1における当該モードの使用が禁止されていることである。その結果、符号化装置100は、CU1を、当該モード以外のインター予測モード又はイントラ予測モードを用いて処理する。
The difference from the processing in the first example described in FIG. 12 is that in CU1 where modes other than FRUC are used, the use of the mode in CU1 is prohibited because the area indicated by CU1_MV0 is out of the search range It is. As a result, the encoding apparatus 100 processes CU1 using an inter prediction mode or an intra prediction mode other than the mode.
このように、探索範囲に従ってFRUCの候補動きベクトルを限定するのに加え、探索範囲に従ってFRUC以外のモードも限定することで、対象CTUに属する全てのCUによる参照が探索範囲内の領域に制限される。これにより、処理済み領域の画像を格納しているメモリへのアクセス量をさらに限定することが可能となる。
Thus, in addition to restricting the candidate motion vectors of FRUC according to the search range, by restricting modes other than FRUC according to the search range, reference by all CUs belonging to the target CTU is restricted to the region within the search range. Ru. This makes it possible to further limit the amount of access to the memory storing the image of the processed area.
なお、符号化装置100は、FRUC以外のモードの動きベクトルが探索範囲内であるか否かの判定方法として、動きベクトルが示すブロック位置そのものが探索範囲内に納まっているか否を判定するだけではなく、動きベクトルが示すブロック位置と、予測画像生成に関わる他の処理(ME処理、MC処理、BIO処理、OBMC処理、LIC処理、DMVR処理等)において必要となる参照領域との両方が探索範囲内に納まっているか否かを判定してもよい。
In addition, the encoding apparatus 100 only determines whether the block position itself indicated by the motion vector is within the search range, as a method of determining whether the motion vector in any mode other than FRUC is within the search range. Search range for both the block position indicated by the motion vector and the reference area required for other processing related to predicted image generation (ME processing, MC processing, BIO processing, OBMC processing, LIC processing, DMVR processing, etc.) It may be determined whether or not it is stored inside.
また、予測画像生成に関わる他の処理(ME処理、MC処理、BIO処理、OBMC処理、LIC処理、DMVR処理等)において、処理に必要となる参照領域が探索範囲外であった場合、符号化装置100は、当該他の処理を行わずに予測画像の生成を行ってもよい。
Also, in the case of other processing (ME processing, MC processing, BIO processing, OBMC processing, LIC processing, DMVR processing, etc.) related to predicted image generation, encoding is performed when the reference region required for processing is out of the search range The apparatus 100 may generate a prediction image without performing the other processing.
また、上記説明では、1枚の参照ピクチャに対しての処理を説明しているが、複数枚の参照ピクチャに対しての処理も同様である。
In the above description, the process for one reference picture is described, but the process for a plurality of reference pictures is the same.
また、ここでは、符号化装置100におけるインター予測処理における処理を説明したが、復号装置200においても、FRUCモードが用いられる場合は、符号化装置100と同様の処理が行われる。FRUC以外のモードが用いられる場合は、説明した処理によって生成されたストリームを復号装置200が復号することで、自動的に探索範囲外を参照するインター予測モードを使用することなく復号処理が行われることになる。
Moreover, although the process in the inter prediction process in the encoding apparatus 100 was demonstrated here, also in the decoding apparatus 200, when a FRUC mode is used, the process similar to the encoding apparatus 100 is performed. When a mode other than FRUC is used, the decoding device 200 decodes the stream generated by the above-described processing, whereby the decoding processing is performed without using the inter prediction mode that refers to the outside of the search range automatically. It will be.
また、ここではFRUC以外のインター予測モードの動きベクトルが探索範囲外である場合に当該インター予測モードを評価対象から除外する処理を例示したが、この例に限定されない。例えば、符号化装置100は、当該インター予測モードにおいて探索範囲外の領域を示す動きベクトルを評価対象から除外して、探索範囲内の領域を示す動きベクトルを用いた当該インター予測モードにより予測処理を行ってもよい。
Moreover, although the process which excludes the said inter prediction mode from evaluation object when the motion vector of inter prediction modes other than FRUC was out of the search range was illustrated here, it is not limited to this example. For example, the coding apparatus 100 excludes a motion vector indicating an area outside the search range in the inter prediction mode from the evaluation target, and performs prediction processing in the inter prediction mode using the motion vector indicating the area within the search range. You may go.
[インター予測処理の第2の例のメモリアクセス方法]
図20A及び図20Bは、符号化装置100におけるインター予測処理の第2の例における、処理済み領域の画像を格納しているメモリからのデータ転送方法を説明するための図である。 [Memory access method of the second example of inter prediction processing]
FIG. 20A and FIG. 20B are diagrams for explaining the data transfer method from the memory storing the image of the processed area in the second example of the inter prediction processing inencoding apparatus 100.
図20A及び図20Bは、符号化装置100におけるインター予測処理の第2の例における、処理済み領域の画像を格納しているメモリからのデータ転送方法を説明するための図である。 [Memory access method of the second example of inter prediction processing]
FIG. 20A and FIG. 20B are diagrams for explaining the data transfer method from the memory storing the image of the processed area in the second example of the inter prediction processing in
図20A及び図20Bに示すデータ転送方法は、図16A及び図16Bで説明した第1の例におけるデータ転送方法に対して、FRUC以外のモードで参照するための参照画素の転送がなくなっている点が異なる。
The data transfer method shown in FIGS. 20A and 20B is different from the data transfer method in the first example described in FIGS. 16A and 16B in that the transfer of reference pixels for reference in modes other than FRUC is lost. Is different.
図19を用いて説明したように、第2の例では、FRUCモード及びFRUC以外のモードの両方において探索範囲外の画素領域は参照されないため、探索範囲外の画素の転送は不要である。これにより、FRUC以外のモードで参照するための参照画素の転送のために発生していた待ち時間がなくなる。よって、転送速度が充分に早くない場合、又は1つのCTUの処理に割り当てることのできる処理時間が充分に長くない場合でも、割り当てられた処理時間内に対象ピクチャの処理を完了させることができる可能性が高くなる。
As described with reference to FIG. 19, in the second example, since the pixel area outside the search range is not referred to in both the FRUC mode and the modes other than FRUC, transfer of pixels outside the search range is unnecessary. This eliminates the waiting time generated for transfer of reference pixels for reference in modes other than FRUC. Therefore, even if the transfer rate is not fast enough, or the processing time that can be allocated to the processing of one CTU is not long enough, processing of the target picture can be completed within the allocated processing time. Sex is high.
なお、ここで説明したデータ転送方法は一例であり、記載されている処理の一部を除いたり、記載されていない処理を追加したりしてもよい。
Note that the data transfer method described here is an example, and part of the described processing may be removed or processing not described may be added.
また、復号装置200におけるインター予測処理のデータ転送方法も基本的に同様である。
Also, the data transfer method of the inter prediction process in the decoding device 200 is basically the same.
[インター予測処理の第2の例のバリエーション]
なお、図18に示すステップS210で説明したように探索範囲外を参照するインター予測モードを除外して符号化を行ったストリームであるか否かを示す情報を、符号化装置100は、対象ストリームのシーケンスヘッダ領域、ピクチャヘッダ領域、スライスヘッダ領域又は補助情報領域に符号化し、復号装置200は、それらの領域から上記情報を復号して取得してもよい。 [Variation of second example of inter prediction processing]
Note that, as described in step S210 illustrated in FIG. 18, theencoding apparatus 100 may use information indicating whether the stream has been encoded excluding the inter prediction mode that refers to the outside of the search range. The decoding apparatus 200 may encode the sequence header area, the picture header area, the slice header area, or the auxiliary information area, and decode and acquire the information from those areas.
なお、図18に示すステップS210で説明したように探索範囲外を参照するインター予測モードを除外して符号化を行ったストリームであるか否かを示す情報を、符号化装置100は、対象ストリームのシーケンスヘッダ領域、ピクチャヘッダ領域、スライスヘッダ領域又は補助情報領域に符号化し、復号装置200は、それらの領域から上記情報を復号して取得してもよい。 [Variation of second example of inter prediction processing]
Note that, as described in step S210 illustrated in FIG. 18, the
例えば、符号化装置100は、ストリームの送信先の復号装置200の処理能力に応じて、インター予測モードを除外するか否かを切替えてもよい。例えば、符号化装置100は、復号装置200の処理能力が高い場合は、復号装置200が一定の処理時間で多くの処理が可能であるためインター予測モードを除外せずに符号化を行い、復号装置200の処理能力が低い場合は、復号装置200が一定の処理時間で多くの処理ができないためインター予測モードを除外して符号化を行ってもよい。
For example, the encoding apparatus 100 may switch whether to exclude the inter prediction mode according to the processing capability of the decoding apparatus 200 at the transmission destination of the stream. For example, when the processing capability of the decoding device 200 is high, the encoding device 100 performs encoding without excluding the inter prediction mode because the decoding device 200 can perform many processes in a fixed processing time, and performs decoding When the processing capability of the apparatus 200 is low, the decoding apparatus 200 may perform coding without the inter prediction mode because it can not perform many processes in a fixed processing time.
また、符号化装置100は、対象ストリームに割り当てられたプロファイル又はレベル情報に応じて、インター予測モードを除外するか否かを切替えてもよい。例えば、符号化装置100は、充分な復号装置200の処理能力を想定したプロファイル及びレベルではインター予測モードを除外せずに符号化を行い、充分でない復号装置200の処理能力を想定したプロファイル及びレベルではインター予測モードを除外して符号化を行ってもよい。
Also, the coding apparatus 100 may switch whether to exclude the inter prediction mode according to the profile or level information assigned to the target stream. For example, the encoding apparatus 100 performs encoding without excluding the inter prediction mode in profiles and levels assuming sufficient processing capacity of the decoding apparatus 200, and profiles and levels assuming insufficient processing capacity of the decoding apparatus 200. Then, coding may be performed excluding the inter prediction mode.
また、符号化装置100は、対象ピクチャのサイズに応じて、インター予測モードを除外するか否かを切替えてもよい。例えば、符号化装置100は、ピクチャサイズが小さい場合は、処理するブロック数が少なく処理時間に余裕があるためインター予測モードを除外せずに符号化を行い、ピクチャサイズが大きい場合は、処理するブロック数が多く処理時間に余裕がないためインター予測モードを除外して符号化を行ってもよい。もしくは逆に、符号化装置100は、ピクチャサイズが小さい場合は、動きベクトルが過度にばらつくのを抑制するためにインター予測モードを除外して符号化を行い、ピクチャサイズが大きい場合は、より広い範囲を探索できるようにインター予測モードを除外せずに符号化を行ってもよい。
Also, the coding apparatus 100 may switch whether to exclude the inter prediction mode according to the size of the target picture. For example, when the picture size is small, the coding apparatus 100 performs coding without excluding the inter prediction mode because the number of blocks to be processed is small and the processing time has a margin, and performs processing when the picture size is large. Since the number of blocks is large and the processing time is not enough, coding may be performed excluding the inter prediction mode. Or conversely, if the picture size is small, the coding apparatus 100 performs coding by excluding the inter prediction mode in order to suppress excessive variation of motion vectors, and if the picture size is large, the coding is wider. The coding may be performed without excluding the inter prediction mode so that the range can be searched.
なお、ストリームに符号化される、当該ストリームが探索範囲外を参照するインター予測モードを除外して符号化したストリームであるか否かを示す情報は、厳密にそれを示す情報の信号でなくてもよく、他の意味を持つ信号として符号化されてもよい。例えば、前記情報をプロファイル及びレベルに直接対応付けることにより、復号装置200は、プロファイル及びレベルを示す信号を用いて前記情報を特定できる。
Note that the information indicating whether the stream is encoded by excluding the inter prediction mode that refers to the outside of the search range, which is encoded into the stream, is not a signal of information that indicates the stream strictly. And may be encoded as signals having other meanings. For example, by directly associating the information with the profile and the level, the decoding device 200 can specify the information using a signal indicating the profile and the level.
[インター予測処理の第2の例の効果]
図18から図20Bを用いて説明した構成により、対象CTUに属する全てのCUの処理において、処理済み領域の画像を格納しているメモリへのアクセス量を限定できるので、データ転送に関わる処理時間を抑制できる。さらに、評価対象とするインター予測モードの個数が削減されるので、符号化装置100におけるインター予測処理に関わる処理量を抑制することが可能となる。これにより、処理性能の低い符号化装置100及び復号装置200でも1ピクチャに割り当てられた処理時間内に全てのブロックの処理を完了させることができる可能性が高くなる。 [Effect of the second example of inter prediction processing]
With the configuration described with reference to FIGS. 18 to 20B, the amount of access to the memory storing the image of the processed area can be limited in the processing of all CUs belonging to the target CTU. Can be suppressed. Furthermore, since the number of inter prediction modes to be evaluated is reduced, it is possible to suppress the amount of processing related to the inter prediction processing in theencoding device 100. As a result, there is a high possibility that the processing of all the blocks can be completed within the processing time allocated to one picture even in the coding apparatus 100 and the decoding apparatus 200 with low processing performance.
図18から図20Bを用いて説明した構成により、対象CTUに属する全てのCUの処理において、処理済み領域の画像を格納しているメモリへのアクセス量を限定できるので、データ転送に関わる処理時間を抑制できる。さらに、評価対象とするインター予測モードの個数が削減されるので、符号化装置100におけるインター予測処理に関わる処理量を抑制することが可能となる。これにより、処理性能の低い符号化装置100及び復号装置200でも1ピクチャに割り当てられた処理時間内に全てのブロックの処理を完了させることができる可能性が高くなる。 [Effect of the second example of inter prediction processing]
With the configuration described with reference to FIGS. 18 to 20B, the amount of access to the memory storing the image of the processed area can be limited in the processing of all CUs belonging to the target CTU. Can be suppressed. Furthermore, since the number of inter prediction modes to be evaluated is reduced, it is possible to suppress the amount of processing related to the inter prediction processing in the
以上のように、本実施の形態に係る符号化装置100は、第1処理単位(例えばCTU)で共通に使用する探索範囲を設定し(S201)、第1処理単位に含まれる1又は複数の第2処理単位(例えばCU)のうちインター予測を用いる第2処理単位に対して、探索範囲外の画素の参照を制限し、探索範囲内の画素を参照して符号化処理を行う(S204又はS210)。これにより、処理済み領域の画像を格納しているメモリへのアクセス量を限定できるので、データ転送に関わる処理時間を抑制できるとともに、処理量を低減できる。
As described above, the encoding apparatus 100 according to the present embodiment sets a search range to be commonly used in the first processing unit (for example, CTU) (S201), and one or more included in the first processing unit. For the second processing unit using inter prediction among the second processing units (for example, CU), restrict reference to pixels outside the search range and perform encoding processing with reference to the pixels within the search range (S 204 or S210). Thus, the amount of access to the memory storing the image of the processed area can be limited, so that the processing time related to data transfer can be suppressed and the amount of processing can be reduced.
例えば、第1処理単位は、ピクチャの基本分割単位である1つ或いは複数の第2処理単位から構成されるブロック単位、又は、1つ或いは複数の第2処理単位から構成される予め定義された大きさのブロック単位である。
For example, the first processing unit may be a block unit configured of one or more second processing units, which is a basic division unit of a picture, or a predefined unit configured of one or more second processing units. It is a block unit of size.
例えば、符号化装置100は、第1処理単位に含まれる対象第2処理単位に対して、複数のインター予測モードのうち、選択対象のインター予測モードに割り当てられた動きベクトルを用いた動き補償処理で、探索範囲外の画素を参照するインター予測モードを除外し、除外後のインター予測モードとイントラ予測モードとのなかから1つのモードを選択し、選択したモードを用いて符号化処理を行う。
For example, the coding apparatus 100 performs motion compensation processing using a motion vector assigned to an inter prediction mode to be selected among a plurality of inter prediction modes with respect to a target second processing unit included in the first processing unit. Then, the inter prediction mode that refers to the pixel outside the search range is excluded, one mode is selected from the inter prediction mode after the exclusion and the intra prediction mode, and the encoding process is performed using the selected mode.
例えば、符号化装置100は、インター予測モードの除外(S210)では、さらに、選択対象のインター予測モードにおける、動き補償処理以外に適用される予測画像生成に関わる他の処理において、探索範囲外の画素を必要とするインター予測モードを除外する。
For example, in the inter prediction mode exclusion (S210), the coding apparatus 100 is further out of the search range in another process related to predicted image generation applied to other than the motion compensation process in the inter prediction mode to be selected. Exclude inter prediction modes that require pixels.
例えば、符号化装置100は、選択対象のインター予測モードにおいて、動き補償処理以外に適用される予測画像生成に関わる他の処理であって、探索範囲外の画素を必要とする他の処理があった場合、他の処理を行わずに予測画像を生成する。
For example, in the inter prediction mode to be selected, the encoding apparatus 100 is another process related to predicted image generation applied other than the motion compensation process, and there is another process requiring pixels outside the search range. In this case, the predicted image is generated without performing other processing.
例えば、符号化装置100は、探索範囲の設定(S201)では、参照可能な処理済みピクチャ、処理済みピクチャにおける探索領域の大きさ、及び処理済みピクチャにおける探索領域の中心位置シフト量、を含む情報を用いて探索範囲を設定する。
For example, in the setting of the search range (S201), the encoding apparatus 100 includes information including a processed picture that can be referred to, the size of the search area in the processed picture, and the center position shift amount of the search area in the processed picture. Use to set the search range.
例えば、符号化装置100は、探索領域の大きさを、参照可能な処理済みピクチャの枚数に応じて切替える。
For example, the encoding apparatus 100 switches the size of the search area according to the number of referable processed pictures.
例えば、符号化装置100は、参照可能な処理済みピクチャにおける探索領域の総和が特定の値以下になるように、探索領域の大きさを設定する。
For example, the encoding apparatus 100 sets the size of the search area such that the sum of the search areas in the referenceable processed pictures is equal to or less than a specific value.
例えば、符号化装置100は、参照可能な処理済みピクチャの枚数及び探索領域の大きさ、又は探索領域の総和、の上限値を、プロファイル値又はレベル値に対応付けて規定する。符号化装置100は、対象ストリームに割り当てられたプロファイル値又はレベル値に応じて、上限値以下の値になるように、参照可能な処理済みピクチャの枚数及び探索領域の大きさを設定する。
For example, the encoding apparatus 100 defines the upper limit value of the number of processable pictures that can be referred to and the size of the search area or the total sum of the search areas in association with the profile value or the level value. The encoding apparatus 100 sets the number of referable processed pictures and the size of the search area so as to be a value equal to or less than the upper limit value according to the profile value or the level value assigned to the target stream.
例えば、符号化装置100は、第1処理単位に含まれる全ての第2処理単位で、探索範囲外の画素を必要とするインター予測モードを選択していないことを示す情報を、シーケンスヘッダ領域、ピクチャヘッダ領域、スライスヘッダ領域又は補助情報領域に符号化する。
For example, in the sequence header area, information indicating that the encoding apparatus 100 has not selected the inter prediction mode requiring pixels outside the search range in all the second processing units included in the first processing unit, It is encoded into a picture header area, a slice header area or a side information area.
例えば、符号化装置100は、復号装置200の処理能力に応じて、探索範囲外の画素を参照するインター予測モードを除外するか否かを切替える。
For example, the coding apparatus 100 switches whether to exclude the inter prediction mode that refers to the pixels outside the search range, according to the processing capability of the decoding apparatus 200.
例えば、符号化装置100は、対象ストリームに割り当てられたプロファイル値又はレベル値に応じて、探索範囲外の画素を参照するインター予測モードを除外するか否かを切替える。
For example, the encoding apparatus 100 switches whether to exclude an inter prediction mode that refers to a pixel outside the search range, according to the profile value or the level value assigned to the target stream.
例えば、符号化装置100は、対象ピクチャの大きさに応じて、探索範囲外の画素を参照するインター予測モードを除外するか否かを切替える。
For example, the coding apparatus 100 switches whether to exclude an inter prediction mode that refers to a pixel outside the search range, according to the size of the target picture.
例えば、探索領域の中心位置シフト量は、対象ピクチャにおける対象第1処理単位の位置と、参照する処理済みピクチャにおける探索領域の位置とのシフト量である。
For example, the center position shift amount of the search area is a shift amount between the position of the target first processing unit in the target picture and the position of the search area in the processed picture to be referenced.
例えば、符号化装置100は、探索領域の中心位置シフト量を、第1処理単位毎に導出する。
For example, the encoding apparatus 100 derives the center position shift amount of the search area for each first processing unit.
例えば、符号化装置100は、探索領域の中心位置シフト量を、対象第1処理単位の空間的又は時間的周辺に位置する処理済み第1処理単位に含まれる第2処理単位に割り当てられた動きベクトルを用いて導出する。
For example, the encoding apparatus 100 is a motion assigned to the second processing unit included in the processed first processing unit located in the spatial or temporal periphery of the target first processing unit for the center position shift amount of the search region. Derivate using a vector.
例えば、処理済み第1処理単位は、対象第1処理単位に対して処理順が直前である第1処理単位以外の処理済み第1処理単位である。
For example, the processed first processing unit is a processed first processing unit other than the first processing unit whose processing order is immediately before the target first processing unit.
例えば、符号化装置100は、探索領域の中心位置シフト量として、対象ピクチャ又は対象スライスに含まれる全ての第1処理単位に対して、共通の値を設定する。符号化装置100は、共通の値を特定するための情報を、ピクチャヘッダ領域又はスライスヘッダ領域に符号化する。
For example, the encoding apparatus 100 sets a common value to all first processing units included in the target picture or target slice as the center position shift amount of the search area. Encoding apparatus 100 encodes information for specifying a common value into a picture header area or a slice header area.
例えば、符号化装置100は、共通の値を、中心位置のシフトが0となる値に設定する。
For example, the encoding apparatus 100 sets the common value to a value at which the shift of the center position is zero.
例えば、符号化装置100は、共通の値を、処理済みピクチャに含まれる複数の第2処理単位で導出された複数の動きベクトルの統計量を用いて導出する。
For example, the encoding apparatus 100 derives a common value using statistics of a plurality of motion vectors derived in a plurality of second processing units included in a processed picture.
例えば、符号化装置100は、探索範囲の位置が特定された時点で、処理済みピクチャの画像データを格納しているメモリから、対象第1処理単位に対して設定される探索範囲の参照画素データの転送を開始し、転送が完了してから対象第1処理単位の処理を開始する。
For example, when the position of the search range is specified, the encoding device 100 refers to the reference pixel data of the search range set for the target first processing unit from the memory storing the image data of the processed picture. The transfer of the target first processing unit is started after the transfer is completed.
例えば、符号化装置100は、処理順が直前である第1処理単位の処理を待たずに、処理済みピクチャの画像データを格納しているメモリから、対象第1処理単位に対して設定される探索範囲の参照画素データの転送を開始する。
For example, the encoding apparatus 100 is set for the target first processing unit from the memory storing the image data of the processed picture without waiting for the processing of the first processing unit whose processing order is immediately before. Transfer of reference pixel data in the search range is started.
例えば、符号化装置100は、対象第1処理単位に対して設定された探索範囲の参照画素データのうち、既に処理済みの第1処理単位に対して設定されていた探索範囲と重複する領域の参照画素データを除いて、参照画素データのメモリからの転送を行う。
For example, in the reference pixel data of the search range set for the target first processing unit, the encoding device 100 overlaps the search range set for the already processed first processing unit. The reference pixel data is transferred from the memory except for the reference pixel data.
例えば、符号化装置100は、第1処理単位に含まれる複数の第2処理単位のうち、FRUCモードを用いる第2処理単位に対して、探索範囲外の画素の参照を制限し、探索範囲内の画素を参照して符号化処理を行う(S204)。
For example, the encoding device 100 restricts reference to pixels outside the search range for the second processing unit using the FRUC mode among the plurality of second processing units included in the first processing unit, and The encoding process is performed with reference to the pixel (S204).
例えば、符号化装置100は、FRUCモードにおいて、処理済みブロックの動きベクトルから導出した複数の候補動きベクトルから探索範囲外の画素を参照とする候補動きベクトルを評価対象から除外し(S204)、除外後の候補動きベクトルに対してコスト評価を行う(S205)。
For example, in the FRUC mode, the encoding apparatus 100 excludes candidate motion vectors having a pixel outside the search range as a reference from the plurality of candidate motion vectors derived from the motion vector of the processed block from the evaluation target (S204) Cost evaluation is performed on the subsequent candidate motion vector (S205).
例えば、符号化装置100は、候補動きベクトルの除外(S204)では、さらに、FRUC処理を行った後に適用される予測画像生成に関わる他の処理において、探索範囲外の画素を必要とする候補動きベクトルを評価対象から除外する。
For example, in the candidate motion vector exclusion (S204), the coding apparatus 100 further performs candidate processing that requires pixels outside the search range in other processing related to predicted image generation applied after performing the FRUC processing. Exclude vectors from evaluation.
例えば、符号化装置100は、FRUCモードにおいて、FRUC処理を行った後に適用される予測画像生成に関わる他の処理であって、探索範囲外の画素を必要とする他の処理があった場合、他の処理を行わずに予測画像を生成する。
For example, if the encoding apparatus 100 is another process related to predicted image generation applied after performing the FRUC process in the FRUC mode, there is another process requiring pixels outside the search range, A predicted image is generated without performing any other processing.
例えば、符号化装置100は、探索範囲の設定(S201)では、参照可能である処理済みピクチャを指定するための参照インデックスと、参照インデックスにおける探索領域の大きさと、参照インデックスにおける探索領域の中心位置シフト量と、を含む情報を用いて探索範囲を設定する。
For example, in the setting of the search range (S201), the encoding apparatus 100 uses a reference index for specifying a processed picture that can be referred to, the size of the search area in the reference index, and the center position of the search area in the reference index. The search range is set using information including the shift amount.
例えば、符号化装置100は、探索領域の大きさを、参照インデックスの総数に応じて切替える。
For example, the encoding apparatus 100 switches the size of the search area according to the total number of reference indexes.
例えば、符号化装置100は、参照インデックスにおける探索領域の総和が特定の値以下になるように、探索領域の大きさを設定する。
For example, the encoding apparatus 100 sets the size of the search area such that the sum of the search areas in the reference index is equal to or less than a specific value.
例えば、符号化装置100は、参照インデックスの総数及び探索領域の大きさ、又は探索領域の総和、の上限値を、プロファイル値又はレベル値に対応付けて規定する。符号化装置100は、対象ストリームに割り当てられたプロファイル値又はレベル値に応じて、上限値以下の値になるように、参照インデックスの総数及び探索領域の大きさを設定する。
For example, the encoding apparatus 100 defines the upper limit value of the total number of reference indexes and the size of the search area or the total sum of the search areas in association with the profile value or the level value. The encoding apparatus 100 sets the total number of reference indexes and the size of the search area so as to be a value less than or equal to the upper limit value, according to the profile value or level value assigned to the target stream.
例えば、符号化装置100は、1つの参照可能な処理済みピクチャに対して、複数の参照インデックスを対応付ける。
For example, the encoding device 100 associates a plurality of reference indices with one referenceable processed picture.
例えば、符号化装置100は、参照可能な処理済みピクチャを指定するための参照インデックス及び探索領域の大きさ特定するための情報を、シーケンスヘッダ領域、ピクチャヘッダ領域、スライスヘッダ領域又は補助情報領域に符号化する。
For example, the coding apparatus 100 may set a reference index for specifying a referenceable processed picture and information for specifying the size of a search area in a sequence header area, a picture header area, a slice header area, or an auxiliary information area. Encode.
例えば、符号化装置100は、復号装置200の処理能力に応じて、参照インデックスの総数及び探索領域の大きさを切替える。
For example, the encoding device 100 switches the total number of reference indexes and the size of the search region according to the processing capability of the decoding device 200.
例えば、符号化装置100は、対象ストリームに割り当てられたプロファイル値又はレベル値に応じて、参照インデックスの総数及び探索領域の大きさを切替える。
For example, the encoding apparatus 100 switches the total number of reference indexes and the size of the search area according to the profile value or the level value assigned to the target stream.
例えば、符号化装置100は、対象ピクチャの大きさに応じて、参照インデックスの総数及び探索領域の大きさを切替える。
For example, the encoding apparatus 100 switches the total number of reference indexes and the size of the search area according to the size of the target picture.
例えば、符号化装置100は、探索領域の中心位置シフト量を、第1処理単位毎に導出する方法と、対象ピクチャ又は対象スライスに属する全ての第1処理単位に対して共通の値を設定する方法との、2つの方法を対象ピクチャ毎に切り替える。
For example, the encoding apparatus 100 sets a common value for all first processing units belonging to the target picture or target slice, and a method of deriving the center position shift amount of the search area for each first processing unit. The two methods, method and method, are switched for each target picture.
例えば、符号化装置100は、2つの方法のどちらを使用するかを特定するための情報を、ピクチャヘッダ領域又はスライスヘッダ領域に符号化する。
For example, the encoding apparatus 100 encodes information for specifying which of the two methods is to be used, in a picture header area or a slice header area.
また、本開示の一態様に係る復号装置200は、第1処理単位(例えばCTU)で共通に使用する探索範囲を設定し(S201)、第1処理単位に含まれる複数の第2処理単位のうちインター予測を用いる第2処理単位に対して、探索範囲外の画素の参照を制限し、探索範囲内の画素を用いて復号処理を行う(S204又はS210)。これにより、処理済み領域の画像を格納しているメモリへのアクセス量を限定できるので、データ転送に関わる処理時間を抑制できるとともに、処理量を低減できる。
In addition, the decoding apparatus 200 according to an aspect of the present disclosure sets a search range to be commonly used in the first processing unit (for example, CTU) (S201), and the plurality of second processing units included in the first processing unit. In the second processing unit using inter prediction, reference to pixels outside the search range is restricted, and decoding processing is performed using pixels within the search range (S204 or S210). Thus, the amount of access to the memory storing the image of the processed area can be limited, so that the processing time related to data transfer can be suppressed and the amount of processing can be reduced.
例えば、第1処理単位は、ピクチャの基本分割単位である1つ或いは複数の第2処理単位から構成されるブロック単位、又は、1つ或いは複数の第2処理単位から構成される予め定義された大きさのブロック単位である。
For example, the first processing unit may be a block unit configured of one or more second processing units, which is a basic division unit of a picture, or a predefined unit configured of one or more second processing units. It is a block unit of size.
例えば、復号装置200は、探索範囲の設定(S201)では、参照可能な処理済みピクチャ、処理済みピクチャにおける探索領域の大きさ、及び処理済みピクチャにおける探索領域の中心位置シフト量、を含む情報を用いて探索範囲を設定する。
For example, in the setting of the search range (S201), the decoding device 200 includes information including a processable reference picture, the size of the search area in the processed picture, and the center position shift amount of the search area in the processed picture. Use to set the search range.
例えば、復号装置200は、探索領域の大きさを、参照可能な処理済みピクチャの枚数に応じて切替える。
For example, the decoding apparatus 200 switches the size of the search area in accordance with the number of referable processed pictures.
例えば、復号装置200は、参照可能な処理済みピクチャにおける探索領域の総和が特定の値以下になるように、探索領域の大きさを設定する。
For example, the decoding device 200 sets the size of the search area such that the sum of the search areas in the referenceable processed pictures is equal to or less than a specific value.
例えば、復号装置200は、参照可能な処理済みピクチャの枚数及び探索領域の大きさ、又は探索領域の総和、の上限値を、プロファイル値又はレベル値に対応付けて規定する。復号装置200は、対象ストリームに割り当てられたプロファイル値又はレベル値に応じて、上限値以下の値になるように、参照可能な処理済みピクチャの枚数及び探索領域の大きさを設定する。
For example, the decoding device 200 specifies the upper limit value of the number of processable pictures that can be referred to and the size of the search area, or the total of the search areas in association with the profile value or the level value. The decoding apparatus 200 sets the number of referable processed pictures and the size of the search area so that the value becomes equal to or less than the upper limit value according to the profile value or the level value assigned to the target stream.
例えば、復号装置200は、第1処理単位に含まれる全ての第2処理単位で、探索範囲外の画素を必要とするインター予測モードを選択していないことを示す情報を、シーケンスヘッダ領域、ピクチャヘッダ領域、スライスヘッダ領域又は補助情報領域から復号する。
For example, the information indicating that the decoding apparatus 200 has not selected the inter prediction mode requiring pixels outside the search range in all the second processing units included in the first processing unit is a sequence header area, a picture Decode from the header area, slice header area or auxiliary information area.
例えば、探索領域の中心位置シフト量は、対象ピクチャにおける対象第1処理単位の位置と、参照する処理済みピクチャにおける探索領域の位置とのシフト量である。
For example, the center position shift amount of the search area is a shift amount between the position of the target first processing unit in the target picture and the position of the search area in the processed picture to be referenced.
例えば、復号装置200は、探索領域の中心位置シフト量を、第1処理単位毎に導出する。
For example, the decoding device 200 derives the center position shift amount of the search area for each first processing unit.
例えば、復号装置200は、探索領域の中心位置シフト量を、対象第1処理単位の空間的又は時間的周辺に位置する処理済み第1処理単位に含まれる第2処理単位に割り当てられた動きベクトルを用いて導出する。
For example, the decoding device 200 is a motion vector assigned to the second processing unit included in the processed first processing unit located in the spatial or temporal periphery of the target first processing unit, as the center position shift amount of the search area. It derives using.
例えば、処理済み第1処理単位は、対象第1処理単位に対して処理順が直前である第1処理単位以外の処理済み第1処理単位である。
For example, the processed first processing unit is a processed first processing unit other than the first processing unit whose processing order is immediately before the target first processing unit.
例えば、探索領域の中心位置シフト量として、対象ピクチャ又は対象スライスに含まれる全ての第1処理単位に対して、共通の値が設定され、復号装置200は、共通の値を特定するための情報を、ピクチャヘッダ領域又はスライスヘッダ領域から復号し、共通の値を特定する。
For example, as the central position shift amount of the search area, a common value is set to all the first processing units included in the target picture or the target slice, and the decoding apparatus 200 is information for specifying the common value. Are decoded from the picture header area or slice header area to identify a common value.
例えば、復号装置200は、探索範囲の位置が特定された時点で、処理済みピクチャの画像データを格納しているメモリから、対象第1処理単位に対して設定される探索範囲の参照画素データの転送を開始し、転送が完了してから対象第1処理単位の処理を開始する。
For example, when the position of the search range is specified, the decoding device 200 uses the memory storing the image data of the processed picture to set the reference pixel data of the search range set for the target first processing unit. The transfer is started, and after the transfer is completed, processing of the target first processing unit is started.
例えば、復号装置200は、処理順が直前である第1処理単位の処理を待たずに、処理済みピクチャの画像データを格納しているメモリから、対象第1処理単位に対して設定される探索範囲の参照画素データの転送を開始する。
For example, the decoding apparatus 200 does not wait for the processing of the first processing unit whose processing order is immediately before, but the search set for the target first processing unit from the memory storing the image data of the processed picture. Start transferring range reference pixel data.
例えば、復号装置200は、対象第1処理単位に対して設定された探索範囲の参照画素データのうち、既に処理済みの第1処理単位に対して設定されていた探索範囲と重複する領域の参照画素データを除いて、参照画素データのメモリからの転送を行う。
For example, the decoding apparatus 200 refers to a region overlapping the search range set for the already processed first processing unit among the reference pixel data of the search range set for the target first processing unit. The reference pixel data is transferred from the memory except for the pixel data.
例えば、復号装置200は、第1処理単位に含まれる1又は複数の第2処理単位のうち、FRUCモードを用いる第2処理単位に対して、探索範囲外の画素の参照を制限し、探索範囲内の画素を用いて復号処理を行う(S204)。
For example, the decoding device 200 restricts reference to pixels outside the search range for the second processing unit using the FRUC mode among the one or more second processing units included in the first processing unit, and the search range Decoding processing is performed using the pixels in (S204).
例えば、復号装置200は、FRUCモードにおいて、処理済みブロックの動きベクトルから導出した複数の候補動きベクトルから探索範囲外の画素を参照とする候補動きベクトルを評価対象から除外し(S204)、除外後の候補動きベクトルに対してコスト評価を行う(S205)。
For example, in the FRUC mode, the decoding apparatus 200 excludes candidate motion vectors having a pixel outside the search range as a reference from the plurality of candidate motion vectors derived from the motion vector of the processed block from the evaluation target (S204). The cost evaluation is performed on the candidate motion vector of (S205).
例えば、復号装置200は、候補動きベクトルの除外(S204)では、さらに、FRUC処理を行った後に適用される予測画像生成に関わる他の処理において、探索範囲外の画素を必要とする候補動きベクトルを評価対象から除外する。
For example, in the candidate motion vector exclusion (S204), the decoding apparatus 200 further requires a pixel outside the search range in another process related to predicted image generation applied after performing the FRUC process. Exclude from the evaluation.
例えば、復号装置200は、FRUCモードにおいて、FRUC処理を行った後に適用される予測画像生成に関わる他の処理であって、探索範囲外の画素を必要とする他の処理があった場合、他の処理を行わずに予測画像を生成する。
For example, the decoding apparatus 200 is another process related to predicted image generation applied after performing the FRUC process in the FRUC mode, and there is another process that requires a pixel outside the search range. The predicted image is generated without performing the processing of
例えば、復号装置200は、探索範囲の設定(S201)では、参照可能である処理済みピクチャを指定するための参照インデックスと、参照インデックスにおける探索領域の大きさと、参照インデックスにおける探索領域の中心位置シフト量と、を含む情報を用いて探索範囲を設定する。
For example, in the setting of the search range (S201), the decoding device 200 refers to a reference index for specifying a processed picture that can be referred to, the size of the search area in the reference index, and the center position shift of the search area in the reference index The search range is set using information including:
例えば、復号装置200は、探索領域の大きさを、参照インデックスの総数に応じて切替える。
For example, the decoding device 200 switches the size of the search area according to the total number of reference indexes.
例えば、復号装置200は、参照インデックスにおける探索領域の総和が特定の値以下になるように、探索領域の大きさを設定する。
For example, the decoding device 200 sets the size of the search area such that the sum of the search areas in the reference index is less than or equal to a specific value.
例えば、復号装置200は、参照インデックスの総数及び探索領域の大きさ、又は探索領域の総和、の上限値を、プロファイル値又はレベル値に対応付けて規定する。復号装置200は、対象ストリームに割り当てられたプロファイル値又はレベル値に応じて、上限値以下の値になるように、参照インデックスの総数及び探索領域の大きさを設定する。
For example, the decoding device 200 specifies the upper limit value of the total number of reference indexes and the size of the search area or the total of the search areas in association with the profile value or the level value. The decoding apparatus 200 sets the total number of reference indexes and the size of the search area so as to be a value less than or equal to the upper limit value, according to the profile value or level value assigned to the target stream.
例えば、復号装置200は、参照可能な処理済みピクチャを指定するための参照インデックス及び探索領域の大きさ特定するための情報を、シーケンスヘッダ領域、ピクチャヘッダ領域、スライスヘッダ領域又は補助情報領域から復号し、参照インデックス及び探索領域の大きさを特定する。
For example, the decoding apparatus 200 decodes a reference index for specifying a referenceable processed picture and information for specifying the size of a search area from a sequence header area, a picture header area, a slice header area, or an auxiliary information area. And specify the size of the reference index and the search area.
例えば、復号装置200は、探索領域の中心位置シフト量を、第1処理単位毎に導出する方法と、対象ピクチャ又は対象スライスに属する全ての第1処理単位に対して共通の値を設定する方法との、2つの方法を対象ピクチャ毎に切り替える。
For example, the decoding device 200 derives the center position shift amount of the search area for each first processing unit, and sets the common value to all the first processing units belonging to the target picture or the target slice. And switch the two methods for each target picture.
例えば、復号装置200は、2つの方法のどちらを使用するかを特定するための情報を、ピクチャヘッダ領域又はスライスヘッダ領域から復号し、2つの方法のどちらを使用するかを特定する。
For example, the decoding apparatus 200 decodes information for specifying which of the two methods is to be used from the picture header area or the slice header area, and specifies which of the two methods is to be used.
また、本実施の形態に係る符号化装置100は、画像を複数のブロックに分割する分割部102と、前記画像に含まれる参照ピクチャを用いて前記画像に含まれるブロックを予測するイントラ予測部124と、前記画像とは異なる他の画像に含まれる参照ブロックを用いて前記画像に含まれるブロックを予測するインター予測部126と、前記画像に含まれるブロックにフィルタを適用するループフィルタ部120と、前記イントラ予測部124または前記インター予測部126により生成された予測信号と原信号との予測誤差を変換して変換係数を生成する変換部106と、前記変換係数を量子化して量子化係数を生成する量子化部108と、前記量子化係数を可変長符号化することにより符号化ビットストリームを生成するエントロピー符号化部110と、を備える。インター予測部126は、第1処理単位(例えばCTU)で共通に使用する探索範囲を設定し(S201)、第1処理単位に含まれる1又は複数の第2処理単位(例えばCU)のうちインター予測を用いる第2処理単位に対して、探索範囲外の画素の参照を制限し、探索範囲内の画素を参照して符号化処理を行う(S204又はS210)。
In addition, encoding apparatus 100 according to the present embodiment divides image into a plurality of blocks, and intra prediction unit 124 that predicts a block included in the image using a reference picture included in the image. An inter prediction unit 126 that predicts a block included in the image using a reference block included in another image different from the image; a loop filter unit 120 that applies a filter to the block included in the image; A conversion unit 106 that converts a prediction error between the prediction signal generated by the intra prediction unit 124 or the inter prediction unit 126 and the original signal to generate a conversion coefficient, and quantizes the conversion coefficient to generate a quantization coefficient Quantization unit 108, and entropy that generates a coded bit stream by variable-length coding the quantization coefficient. It includes an encoding unit 110, a. The inter prediction unit 126 sets a search range to be commonly used in the first processing unit (for example, CTU) (S201), and the inter prediction unit among the one or more second processing units (for example, CU) included in the first processing unit For the second processing unit using prediction, reference to pixels outside the search range is restricted, and coding processing is performed with reference to pixels within the search range (S204 or S210).
また、本実施の形態に係る復号装置200は、符号化ビットストリームを復号して量子化係数を出力する復号部(エントロピー復号部202)と、前記量子化係数を逆量子化して変換係数を出力する逆量子化部204と、前記変換係数を逆変換して予測誤差を出力する逆変換部206と、画像に含まれる参照ピクチャを用いて前記画像に含まれるブロックを予測するイントラ予測部216と、前記画像とは異なる他の画像に含まれる参照ブロックを用いて前記画像に含まれるブロックを予測するインター予測部218と、前記画像に含まれるブロックにフィルタを適用するループフィルタ部212と、を備える。インター予測部218は、第1処理単位(例えばCTU)で共通に使用する探索範囲を設定し(S201)、第1処理単位に含まれる1又は複数の第2処理単位(例えばCU)のうちインター予測を用いる第2処理単位に対して、探索範囲外の画素の参照を制限し、探索範囲内の画素を参照して復号処理を行う(S204又はS210)。
In addition, the decoding apparatus 200 according to the present embodiment decodes a coded bit stream and outputs a quantization coefficient (entropy decoding unit 202), and inversely quantizes the quantization coefficient to output a transform coefficient. An inverse quantization unit 204 for performing inverse transform, an inverse transform unit 206 for inversely transforming the transform coefficient and outputting a prediction error, and an intra prediction unit 216 for predicting a block included in the image using a reference picture included in the image An inter prediction unit 218 that predicts a block included in the image using a reference block included in another image different from the image; and a loop filter unit 212 that applies a filter to the block included in the image Prepare. The inter prediction unit 218 sets a search range to be commonly used in the first processing unit (for example, CTU) (S201), and the inter prediction unit among the one or more second processing units (for example, CU) included in the first processing unit For the second processing unit using prediction, reference to pixels outside the search range is restricted, and decoding processing is performed with reference to pixels within the search range (S204 or S210).
[符号化装置の実装例]
図21は、実施の形態1に係る符号化装置100の実装例を示すブロック図である。符号化装置100は、回路160及びメモリ162を備える。例えば、図1に示された符号化装置100の複数の構成要素は、図21に示された回路160及びメモリ162によって実装される。 [Implementation example of encoding device]
FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing an implementation example of thecoding apparatus 100 according to Embodiment 1. The coding apparatus 100 includes a circuit 160 and a memory 162. For example, the components of the coding apparatus 100 shown in FIG. 1 are implemented by the circuit 160 and the memory 162 shown in FIG.
図21は、実施の形態1に係る符号化装置100の実装例を示すブロック図である。符号化装置100は、回路160及びメモリ162を備える。例えば、図1に示された符号化装置100の複数の構成要素は、図21に示された回路160及びメモリ162によって実装される。 [Implementation example of encoding device]
FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing an implementation example of the
回路160は、情報処理を行う回路であり、メモリ162にアクセス可能な回路である。例えば、回路160は、動画像を符号化する専用又は汎用の電子回路である。回路160は、CPUのようなプロセッサであってもよい。また、回路160は、複数の電子回路の集合体であってもよい。また、例えば、回路160は、図1等に示された符号化装置100の複数の構成要素のうち、情報を記憶するための構成要素を除く、複数の構成要素の役割を果たしてもよい。
The circuit 160 is a circuit that performs information processing and can access the memory 162. For example, the circuit 160 is a dedicated or general-purpose electronic circuit that encodes a moving image. The circuit 160 may be a processor such as a CPU. The circuit 160 may also be an assembly of a plurality of electronic circuits. Also, for example, the circuit 160 may play a role of a plurality of components excluding the component for storing information among the plurality of components of the encoding device 100 illustrated in FIG. 1 and the like.
メモリ162は、回路160が動画像を符号化するための情報が記憶される専用又は汎用のメモリである。メモリ162は、電子回路であってもよく、回路160に接続されていてもよい。また、メモリ162は、回路160に含まれていてもよい。また、メモリ162は、複数の電子回路の集合体であってもよい。また、メモリ162は、磁気ディスク又は光ディスク等であってもよいし、ストレージ又は記録媒体等と表現されてもよい。また、メモリ162は、不揮発性メモリでもよいし、揮発性メモリでもよい。
The memory 162 is a dedicated or general-purpose memory in which information for the circuit 160 to encode moving pictures is stored. The memory 162 may be an electronic circuit or may be connected to the circuit 160. The memory 162 may also be included in the circuit 160. Also, the memory 162 may be a collection of a plurality of electronic circuits. In addition, the memory 162 may be a magnetic disk or an optical disk, or may be expressed as a storage or a recording medium. The memory 162 may be a non-volatile memory or a volatile memory.
例えば、メモリ162には、符号化される動画像が記憶されてもよいし、符号化された動画像に対応するビット列が記憶されてもよい。また、メモリ162には、回路160が動画像を符号化するためのプログラムが記憶されていてもよい。
For example, the moving image to be encoded may be stored in the memory 162, or a bit string corresponding to the encoded moving image may be stored. The memory 162 may also store a program for the circuit 160 to encode a moving image.
また、例えば、メモリ162は、図1等に示された符号化装置100の複数の構成要素のうち、情報を記憶するための構成要素の役割を果たしてもよい。具体的には、メモリ162は、図1に示されたブロックメモリ118及びフレームメモリ122の役割を果たしてもよい。より具体的には、メモリ162には、再構成済みブロック及び再構成済みピクチャ等が記憶されてもよい。
Also, for example, the memory 162 may play a role of a component for storing information among the plurality of components of the encoding device 100 illustrated in FIG. 1 and the like. Specifically, the memory 162 may play the role of the block memory 118 and the frame memory 122 shown in FIG. More specifically, the memory 162 may store reconstructed blocks, reconstructed pictures, and the like.
なお、符号化装置100において、図1等に示された複数の構成要素の全てが実装されなくてもよいし、上述された複数の処理の全てが行われなくてもよい。図1等に示された複数の構成要素の一部は、他の装置に含まれていてもよいし、上述された複数の処理の一部は、他の装置によって実行されてもよい。そして、符号化装置100において、図1等に示された複数の構成要素のうちの一部が実装され、上述された複数の処理の一部が行われることによって、動き補償が効率的に行われる。
In the coding apparatus 100, all of the plurality of components shown in FIG. 1 and the like may not be mounted, or all of the plurality of processes described above may not be performed. Some of the plurality of components shown in FIG. 1 and the like may be included in another device, and some of the plurality of processes described above may be performed by another device. Then, in the encoding apparatus 100, part of the plurality of components shown in FIG. 1 and the like is implemented, and part of the plurality of processes described above is performed, whereby motion compensation is efficiently performed. It will be.
[復号装置の実装例]
図22は、実施の形態1に係る復号装置200の実装例を示すブロック図である。復号装置200は、回路260及びメモリ262を備える。例えば、図10に示された復号装置200の複数の構成要素は、図22に示された回路260及びメモリ262によって実装される。 [Implementation example of decryption device]
FIG. 22 is a block diagram showing an implementation example of thedecoding device 200 according to Embodiment 1. The decoding device 200 includes a circuit 260 and a memory 262. For example, the plurality of components of the decoding apparatus 200 shown in FIG. 10 are implemented by the circuit 260 and the memory 262 shown in FIG.
図22は、実施の形態1に係る復号装置200の実装例を示すブロック図である。復号装置200は、回路260及びメモリ262を備える。例えば、図10に示された復号装置200の複数の構成要素は、図22に示された回路260及びメモリ262によって実装される。 [Implementation example of decryption device]
FIG. 22 is a block diagram showing an implementation example of the
回路260は、情報処理を行う回路であり、メモリ262にアクセス可能な回路である。例えば、回路260は、動画像を復号する専用又は汎用の電子回路である。回路260は、CPUのようなプロセッサであってもよい。また、回路260は、複数の電子回路の集合体であってもよい。また、例えば、回路260は、図10等に示された復号装置200の複数の構成要素のうち、情報を記憶するための構成要素を除く、複数の構成要素の役割を果たしてもよい。
The circuit 260 is a circuit that performs information processing and can access the memory 262. For example, the circuit 260 is a dedicated or general-purpose electronic circuit that decodes a moving image. The circuit 260 may be a processor such as a CPU. Also, the circuit 260 may be a collection of a plurality of electronic circuits. Also, for example, the circuit 260 may play the role of a plurality of components excluding the component for storing information among the plurality of components of the decoding device 200 illustrated in FIG. 10 and the like.
メモリ262は、回路260が動画像を復号するための情報が記憶される専用又は汎用のメモリである。メモリ262は、電子回路であってもよく、回路260に接続されていてもよい。また、メモリ262は、回路260に含まれていてもよい。また、メモリ262は、複数の電子回路の集合体であってもよい。また、メモリ262は、磁気ディスク又は光ディスク等であってもよいし、ストレージ又は記録媒体等と表現されてもよい。また、メモリ262は、不揮発性メモリでもよいし、揮発性メモリでもよい。
The memory 262 is a dedicated or general-purpose memory in which information for the circuit 260 to decode a moving image is stored. The memory 262 may be an electronic circuit or may be connected to the circuit 260. Also, the memory 262 may be included in the circuit 260. Further, the memory 262 may be a collection of a plurality of electronic circuits. Also, the memory 262 may be a magnetic disk or an optical disk, or may be expressed as a storage or a recording medium. The memory 262 may be either a non-volatile memory or a volatile memory.
例えば、メモリ262には、符号化された動画像に対応するビット列が記憶されてもよいし、復号されたビット列に対応する動画像が記憶されてもよい。また、メモリ262には、回路260が動画像を復号するためのプログラムが記憶されていてもよい。
For example, in the memory 262, a bit string corresponding to a coded moving image may be stored, or a moving image corresponding to a decoded bit string may be stored. Also, the memory 262 may store a program for the circuit 260 to decode a moving image.
また、例えば、メモリ262は、図10等に示された復号装置200の複数の構成要素のうち、情報を記憶するための構成要素の役割を果たしてもよい。具体的には、メモリ262は、図10に示されたブロックメモリ210及びフレームメモリ214の役割を果たしてもよい。より具体的には、メモリ262には、再構成済みブロック及び再構成済みピクチャ等が記憶されてもよい。
Also, for example, the memory 262 may play the role of a component for storing information among the plurality of components of the decoding device 200 illustrated in FIG. 10 and the like. Specifically, the memory 262 may play the role of the block memory 210 and the frame memory 214 shown in FIG. More specifically, the memory 262 may store reconstructed blocks, reconstructed pictures, and the like.
なお、復号装置200において、図10等に示された複数の構成要素の全てが実装されなくてもよいし、上述された複数の処理の全てが行われなくてもよい。図10等に示された複数の構成要素の一部は、他の装置に含まれていてもよいし、上述された複数の処理の一部は、他の装置によって実行されてもよい。そして、復号装置200において、図10等に示された複数の構成要素のうちの一部が実装され、上述された複数の処理の一部が行われることによって、動き補償が効率的に行われる。
In the decoding apparatus 200, all of the plurality of components shown in FIG. 10 and the like may not be mounted, or all of the plurality of processes described above may not be performed. Some of the plurality of components shown in FIG. 10 and the like may be included in another device, and some of the plurality of processes described above may be performed by another device. Then, in the decoding device 200, part of the plurality of components shown in FIG. 10 and the like is implemented, and part of the plurality of processes described above is performed, whereby motion compensation is efficiently performed. .
[補足]
また、本実施の形態における符号化装置100及び復号装置200は、それぞれ、画像符号化装置及び画像復号装置として利用されてもよいし、動画像符号化装置及び動画像復号装置として利用されてもよい。あるいは、符号化装置100及び復号装置200は、それぞれ、インター予測装置(画面間予測装置)として利用され得る。 [Supplement]
In addition,coding apparatus 100 and decoding apparatus 200 in the present embodiment may be used as an image coding apparatus and an image decoding apparatus, respectively, and may be used as a moving image coding apparatus and a moving image decoding apparatus. Good. Alternatively, the encoding device 100 and the decoding device 200 may each be used as an inter prediction device (inter-screen prediction device).
また、本実施の形態における符号化装置100及び復号装置200は、それぞれ、画像符号化装置及び画像復号装置として利用されてもよいし、動画像符号化装置及び動画像復号装置として利用されてもよい。あるいは、符号化装置100及び復号装置200は、それぞれ、インター予測装置(画面間予測装置)として利用され得る。 [Supplement]
In addition,
すなわち、符号化装置100及び復号装置200は、それぞれ、インター予測部(画面間予測部)126及びインター予測部(画面間予測部)218のみに対応していてもよい。そして、変換部106及び逆変換部206等の他の構成要素は、他の装置に含まれていてもよい。
That is, encoding apparatus 100 and decoding apparatus 200 may correspond to only inter prediction unit (inter-screen prediction unit) 126 and inter prediction unit (inter-screen prediction unit) 218, respectively. Then, other components such as the conversion unit 106 and the inverse conversion unit 206 may be included in other devices.
また、本実施の形態において、各構成要素は、専用のハードウェアで構成されるか、各構成要素に適したソフトウェアプログラムを実行することによって実現されてもよい。各構成要素は、CPU又はプロセッサなどのプログラム実行部が、ハードディスク又は半導体メモリなどの記録媒体に記録されたソフトウェアプログラムを読み出して実行することによって実現されてもよい。
Further, in the present embodiment, each component may be configured by dedicated hardware or implemented by executing a software program suitable for each component. Each component may be realized by a program execution unit such as a CPU or a processor reading and executing a software program recorded on a recording medium such as a hard disk or a semiconductor memory.
具体的には、符号化装置100及び復号装置200のそれぞれは、処理回路(Processing Circuitry)と、当該処理回路に電気的に接続された、当該処理回路からアクセス可能な記憶装置(Storage)とを備えていてもよい。例えば、処理回路は回路160又は260に対応し、記憶装置はメモリ162又は262に対応する。
Specifically, each of the encoding device 100 and the decoding device 200 includes a processing circuit (Processing Circuitry) and a storage device (Storage) electrically connected to the processing circuit and accessible to the processing circuit. You may have. For example, processing circuitry may correspond to circuitry 160 or 260 and storage may correspond to memory 162 or 262.
処理回路は、専用のハードウェア及びプログラム実行部の少なくとも一方を含み、記憶装置を用いて処理を実行する。また、記憶装置は、処理回路がプログラム実行部を含む場合には、当該プログラム実行部により実行されるソフトウェアプログラムを記憶する。
The processing circuit includes at least one of dedicated hardware and a program execution unit, and executes processing using a storage device. In addition, when the processing circuit includes a program execution unit, the storage device stores a software program executed by the program execution unit.
ここで、本実施の形態の符号化装置100又は復号装置200などを実現するソフトウェアは、次のようなプログラムである。
Here, software for realizing the encoding apparatus 100 or the decoding apparatus 200 of the present embodiment is a program as follows.
また、各構成要素は、上述の通り、回路であってもよい。これらの回路は、全体として1つの回路を構成してもよいし、それぞれ別々の回路であってもよい。また、各構成要素は、汎用的なプロセッサで実現されてもよいし、専用のプロセッサで実現されてもよい。
Also, each component may be a circuit as described above. These circuits may constitute one circuit as a whole or may be separate circuits. Each component may be realized by a general purpose processor or a dedicated processor.
また、特定の構成要素が実行する処理を別の構成要素が実行してもよい。また、処理を実行する順番が変更されてもよいし、複数の処理が並行して実行されてもよい。また、符号化復号装置が、符号化装置100及び復号装置200を備えていてもよい。
Also, another component may execute the processing that a particular component performs. Further, the order of executing the processing may be changed, or a plurality of processing may be executed in parallel. Further, the coding and decoding apparatus may include the coding apparatus 100 and the decoding apparatus 200.
以上、符号化装置100及び復号装置200の態様について、実施の形態に基づいて説明したが、符号化装置100及び復号装置200の態様は、この実施の形態に限定されるものではない。本開示の趣旨を逸脱しない限り、当業者が思いつく各種変形を本実施の形態に施したものや、異なる実施の形態における構成要素を組み合わせて構築される形態も、符号化装置100及び復号装置200の態様の範囲内に含まれてもよい。
As mentioned above, although the aspect of the encoding apparatus 100 and the decoding apparatus 200 was demonstrated based on embodiment, the aspect of the encoding apparatus 100 and the decoding apparatus 200 is not limited to this embodiment. The encoding apparatus 100 and the decoding apparatus 200 may be configured by combining various modifications in the present embodiment that may occur to those skilled in the art without departing from the spirit of the present disclosure, or by combining components in different embodiments. It may be included within the scope of the aspect of.
本態様を本開示における他の態様の少なくとも一部と組み合わせて実施してもよい。また、本態様のフローチャートに記載の一部の処理、装置の一部の構成、シンタックスの一部などを他の態様と組み合わせて実施してもよい。
This aspect may be practiced in combination with at least some of the other aspects in the present disclosure. In addition, part of the processing described in the flowchart of this aspect, part of the configuration of the apparatus, part of the syntax, and the like may be implemented in combination with other aspects.
(実施の形態2)
以上の各実施の形態において、機能ブロックの各々は、通常、MPU及びメモリ等によって実現可能である。また、機能ブロックの各々による処理は、通常、プロセッサなどのプログラム実行部が、ROM等の記録媒体に記録されたソフトウェア(プログラム)を読み出して実行することで実現される。当該ソフトウェアはダウンロード等により配布されてもよいし、半導体メモリなどの記録媒体に記録して配布されてもよい。なお、各機能ブロックをハードウェア(専用回路)によって実現することも、当然、可能である。 Second Embodiment
In each of the above embodiments, each of the functional blocks can usually be realized by an MPU, a memory, and the like. Further, the processing by each of the functional blocks is usually realized by a program execution unit such as a processor reading and executing software (program) recorded in a recording medium such as a ROM. The software may be distributed by downloading or the like, or may be distributed by being recorded in a recording medium such as a semiconductor memory. Of course, it is also possible to realize each functional block by hardware (dedicated circuit).
以上の各実施の形態において、機能ブロックの各々は、通常、MPU及びメモリ等によって実現可能である。また、機能ブロックの各々による処理は、通常、プロセッサなどのプログラム実行部が、ROM等の記録媒体に記録されたソフトウェア(プログラム)を読み出して実行することで実現される。当該ソフトウェアはダウンロード等により配布されてもよいし、半導体メモリなどの記録媒体に記録して配布されてもよい。なお、各機能ブロックをハードウェア(専用回路)によって実現することも、当然、可能である。 Second Embodiment
In each of the above embodiments, each of the functional blocks can usually be realized by an MPU, a memory, and the like. Further, the processing by each of the functional blocks is usually realized by a program execution unit such as a processor reading and executing software (program) recorded in a recording medium such as a ROM. The software may be distributed by downloading or the like, or may be distributed by being recorded in a recording medium such as a semiconductor memory. Of course, it is also possible to realize each functional block by hardware (dedicated circuit).
また、各実施の形態において説明した処理は、単一の装置(システム)を用いて集中処理することによって実現してもよく、又は、複数の装置を用いて分散処理することによって実現してもよい。また、上記プログラムを実行するプロセッサは、単数であってもよく、複数であってもよい。すなわち、集中処理を行ってもよく、又は分散処理を行ってもよい。
Also, the processing described in each embodiment may be realized by centralized processing using a single device (system), or may be realized by distributed processing using a plurality of devices. Good. Moreover, the processor that executes the program may be singular or plural. That is, centralized processing may be performed, or distributed processing may be performed.
本開示の態様は、以上の実施例に限定されることなく、種々の変更が可能であり、それらも本開示の態様の範囲内に包含される。
The aspects of the present disclosure are not limited to the above examples, and various modifications are possible, which are also included in the scope of the aspects of the present disclosure.
さらにここで、上記各実施の形態で示した動画像符号化方法(画像符号化方法)又は動画像復号化方法(画像復号方法)の応用例とそれを用いたシステムを説明する。当該システムは、画像符号化方法を用いた画像符号化装置、画像復号方法を用いた画像復号装置、及び両方を備える画像符号化復号装置を有することを特徴とする。システムにおける他の構成について、場合に応じて適切に変更することができる。
Furthermore, an application example of the moving picture coding method (image coding method) or the moving picture decoding method (image decoding method) shown in each of the above-described embodiments and a system using the same will be described. The system is characterized by having an image coding apparatus using an image coding method, an image decoding apparatus using an image decoding method, and an image coding / decoding apparatus provided with both. Other configurations in the system can be suitably modified as the case may be.
[使用例]
図23は、コンテンツ配信サービスを実現するコンテンツ供給システムex100の全体構成を示す図である。通信サービスの提供エリアを所望の大きさに分割し、各セル内にそれぞれ固定無線局である基地局ex106、ex107、ex108、ex109、ex110が設置されている。 [Example of use]
FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an overall configuration of a content supply system ex100 for realizing content distribution service. The area for providing communication service is divided into desired sizes, and base stations ex106, ex107, ex108, ex109 and ex110, which are fixed wireless stations, are installed in each cell.
図23は、コンテンツ配信サービスを実現するコンテンツ供給システムex100の全体構成を示す図である。通信サービスの提供エリアを所望の大きさに分割し、各セル内にそれぞれ固定無線局である基地局ex106、ex107、ex108、ex109、ex110が設置されている。 [Example of use]
FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an overall configuration of a content supply system ex100 for realizing content distribution service. The area for providing communication service is divided into desired sizes, and base stations ex106, ex107, ex108, ex109 and ex110, which are fixed wireless stations, are installed in each cell.
このコンテンツ供給システムex100では、インターネットex101に、インターネットサービスプロバイダex102又は通信網ex104、及び基地局ex106~ex110を介して、コンピュータex111、ゲーム機ex112、カメラex113、家電ex114、及びスマートフォンex115などの各機器が接続される。当該コンテンツ供給システムex100は、上記のいずれかの要素を組合せて接続するようにしてもよい。固定無線局である基地局ex106~ex110を介さずに、各機器が電話網又は近距離無線等を介して直接的又は間接的に相互に接続されていてもよい。また、ストリーミングサーバex103は、インターネットex101等を介して、コンピュータex111、ゲーム機ex112、カメラex113、家電ex114、及びスマートフォンex115などの各機器と接続される。また、ストリーミングサーバex103は、衛星ex116を介して、飛行機ex117内のホットスポット内の端末等と接続される。
In this content supply system ex100, each device such as a computer ex111, a game machine ex112, a camera ex113, a home appliance ex114, and a smartphone ex115 via the Internet service provider ex102 or the communication network ex104 and the base stations ex106 to ex110 on the Internet ex101 Is connected. The content supply system ex100 may connect any of the above-described elements in combination. The respective devices may be connected to each other directly or indirectly via a telephone network, near-field radio, etc., not via the base stations ex106 to ex110 which are fixed wireless stations. Also, the streaming server ex103 is connected to each device such as the computer ex111, the game machine ex112, the camera ex113, the home appliance ex114, and the smartphone ex115 via the Internet ex101 or the like. Also, the streaming server ex103 is connected to a terminal or the like in a hotspot in the aircraft ex117 via the satellite ex116.
なお、基地局ex106~ex110の代わりに、無線アクセスポイント又はホットスポット等が用いられてもよい。また、ストリーミングサーバex103は、インターネットex101又はインターネットサービスプロバイダex102を介さずに直接通信網ex104と接続されてもよいし、衛星ex116を介さず直接飛行機ex117と接続されてもよい。
A radio access point or a hotspot may be used instead of base stations ex106 to ex110. Also, the streaming server ex103 may be directly connected to the communication network ex104 without the internet ex101 or the internet service provider ex102, or may be directly connected with the airplane ex117 without the satellite ex116.
カメラex113はデジタルカメラ等の静止画撮影、及び動画撮影が可能な機器である。また、スマートフォンex115は、一般に2G、3G、3.9G、4G、そして今後は5Gと呼ばれる移動通信システムの方式に対応したスマートフォン機、携帯電話機、又はPHS(Personal Handyphone System)等である。
The camera ex113 is a device capable of shooting a still image such as a digital camera and shooting a moving image. The smartphone ex115 is a smartphone, a mobile phone, a PHS (Personal Handyphone System), or the like compatible with a mobile communication system generally called 2G, 3G, 3.9G, 4G, and 5G in the future.
家電ex118は、冷蔵庫、又は家庭用燃料電池コージェネレーションシステムに含まれる機器等である。
The home appliance ex118 is a refrigerator or a device included in a home fuel cell cogeneration system.
コンテンツ供給システムex100では、撮影機能を有する端末が基地局ex106等を通じてストリーミングサーバex103に接続されることで、ライブ配信等が可能になる。ライブ配信では、端末(コンピュータex111、ゲーム機ex112、カメラex113、家電ex114、スマートフォンex115、及び飛行機ex117内の端末等)は、ユーザが当該端末を用いて撮影した静止画又は動画コンテンツに対して上記各実施の形態で説明した符号化処理を行い、符号化により得られた映像データと、映像に対応する音を符号化した音データと多重化し、得られたデータをストリーミングサーバex103に送信する。即ち、各端末は、本開示の一態様に係る画像符号化装置として機能する。
In the content supply system ex100, when a terminal having a photographing function is connected to the streaming server ex103 through the base station ex106 or the like, live distribution and the like become possible. In live distribution, a terminal (a computer ex111, a game machine ex112, a camera ex113, a home appliance ex114, a smartphone ex115, a terminal in an airplane ex117, etc.) transmits the still image or moving image content captured by the user using the terminal. The encoding process described in each embodiment is performed, and video data obtained by the encoding and sound data obtained by encoding a sound corresponding to the video are multiplexed, and the obtained data is transmitted to the streaming server ex103. That is, each terminal functions as an image coding apparatus according to an aspect of the present disclosure.
一方、ストリーミングサーバex103は要求のあったクライアントに対して送信されたコンテンツデータをストリーム配信する。クライアントは、上記符号化処理されたデータを復号化することが可能な、コンピュータex111、ゲーム機ex112、カメラex113、家電ex114、スマートフォンex115、又は飛行機ex117内の端末等である。配信されたデータを受信した各機器は、受信したデータを復号化処理して再生する。即ち、各機器は、本開示の一態様に係る画像復号装置として機能する。
On the other hand, the streaming server ex 103 streams the content data transmitted to the requested client. The client is a computer ex111, a game machine ex112, a camera ex113, a home appliance ex114, a smartphone ex115, a terminal in the airplane ex117 or the like capable of decoding the above-mentioned encoded data. Each device that receives the distributed data decrypts and reproduces the received data. That is, each device functions as an image decoding device according to an aspect of the present disclosure.
[分散処理]
また、ストリーミングサーバex103は複数のサーバ又は複数のコンピュータであって、データを分散して処理したり記録したり配信するものであってもよい。例えば、ストリーミングサーバex103は、CDN(Contents Delivery Network)により実現され、世界中に分散された多数のエッジサーバとエッジサーバ間をつなぐネットワークによりコンテンツ配信が実現されていてもよい。CDNでは、クライアントに応じて物理的に近いエッジサーバが動的に割り当てられる。そして、当該エッジサーバにコンテンツがキャッシュ及び配信されることで遅延を減らすことができる。また、何らかのエラーが発生した場合又はトラフィックの増加などにより通信状態が変わる場合に複数のエッジサーバで処理を分散したり、他のエッジサーバに配信主体を切り替えたり、障害が生じたネットワークの部分を迂回して配信を続けることができるので、高速かつ安定した配信が実現できる。 [Distributed processing]
Also, the streaming server ex103 may be a plurality of servers or a plurality of computers, and may process, record, or distribute data in a distributed manner. For example, the streaming server ex103 may be realized by a CDN (Contents Delivery Network), and content delivery may be realized by a network connecting a large number of edge servers distributed around the world and the edge servers. In the CDN, physically close edge servers are dynamically assigned according to clients. The delay can be reduced by caching and distributing the content to the edge server. In addition, when there is an error or when the communication status changes due to an increase in traffic etc., processing is distributed among multiple edge servers, or the distribution subject is switched to another edge server, or a portion of the network where a failure has occurred. Since the delivery can be continued bypassing, high-speed and stable delivery can be realized.
また、ストリーミングサーバex103は複数のサーバ又は複数のコンピュータであって、データを分散して処理したり記録したり配信するものであってもよい。例えば、ストリーミングサーバex103は、CDN(Contents Delivery Network)により実現され、世界中に分散された多数のエッジサーバとエッジサーバ間をつなぐネットワークによりコンテンツ配信が実現されていてもよい。CDNでは、クライアントに応じて物理的に近いエッジサーバが動的に割り当てられる。そして、当該エッジサーバにコンテンツがキャッシュ及び配信されることで遅延を減らすことができる。また、何らかのエラーが発生した場合又はトラフィックの増加などにより通信状態が変わる場合に複数のエッジサーバで処理を分散したり、他のエッジサーバに配信主体を切り替えたり、障害が生じたネットワークの部分を迂回して配信を続けることができるので、高速かつ安定した配信が実現できる。 [Distributed processing]
Also, the streaming server ex103 may be a plurality of servers or a plurality of computers, and may process, record, or distribute data in a distributed manner. For example, the streaming server ex103 may be realized by a CDN (Contents Delivery Network), and content delivery may be realized by a network connecting a large number of edge servers distributed around the world and the edge servers. In the CDN, physically close edge servers are dynamically assigned according to clients. The delay can be reduced by caching and distributing the content to the edge server. In addition, when there is an error or when the communication status changes due to an increase in traffic etc., processing is distributed among multiple edge servers, or the distribution subject is switched to another edge server, or a portion of the network where a failure has occurred. Since the delivery can be continued bypassing, high-speed and stable delivery can be realized.
また、配信自体の分散処理にとどまらず、撮影したデータの符号化処理を各端末で行ってもよいし、サーバ側で行ってもよいし、互いに分担して行ってもよい。一例として、一般に符号化処理では、処理ループが2度行われる。1度目のループでフレーム又はシーン単位での画像の複雑さ、又は、符号量が検出される。また、2度目のループでは画質を維持して符号化効率を向上させる処理が行われる。例えば、端末が1度目の符号化処理を行い、コンテンツを受け取ったサーバ側が2度目の符号化処理を行うことで、各端末での処理負荷を減らしつつもコンテンツの質と効率を向上させることができる。この場合、ほぼリアルタイムで受信して復号する要求があれば、端末が行った一度目の符号化済みデータを他の端末で受信して再生することもできるので、より柔軟なリアルタイム配信も可能になる。
In addition to the distributed processing of distribution itself, each terminal may perform encoding processing of captured data, or may perform processing on the server side, or may share processing with each other. As an example, generally in the encoding process, a processing loop is performed twice. In the first loop, the complexity or code amount of the image in frame or scene units is detected. In the second loop, processing is performed to maintain the image quality and improve the coding efficiency. For example, the terminal performs a first encoding process, and the server receiving the content performs a second encoding process, thereby improving the quality and efficiency of the content while reducing the processing load on each terminal. it can. In this case, if there is a request to receive and decode in substantially real time, the first encoded data made by the terminal can also be received and reproduced by another terminal, enabling more flexible real time delivery Become.
他の例として、カメラex113等は、画像から特徴量抽出を行い、特徴量に関するデータをメタデータとして圧縮してサーバに送信する。サーバは、例えば特徴量からオブジェクトの重要性を判断して量子化精度を切り替えるなど、画像の意味に応じた圧縮を行う。特徴量データはサーバでの再度の圧縮時の動きベクトル予測の精度及び効率向上に特に有効である。また、端末でVLC(可変長符号化)などの簡易的な符号化を行い、サーバでCABAC(コンテキスト適応型二値算術符号化方式)など処理負荷の大きな符号化を行ってもよい。
As another example, the camera ex 113 or the like extracts a feature amount from an image, compresses data relating to the feature amount as metadata, and transmits the data to the server. The server performs compression according to the meaning of the image, for example, determining the importance of the object from the feature amount and switching the quantization accuracy. Feature amount data is particularly effective in improving the accuracy and efficiency of motion vector prediction at the time of second compression in the server. Also, the terminal may perform simple coding such as VLC (variable length coding) and the server may perform coding with a large processing load such as CABAC (context adaptive binary arithmetic coding method).
さらに他の例として、スタジアム、ショッピングモール、又は工場などにおいては、複数の端末によりほぼ同一のシーンが撮影された複数の映像データが存在する場合がある。この場合には、撮影を行った複数の端末と、必要に応じて撮影をしていない他の端末及びサーバを用いて、例えばGOP(Group of Picture)単位、ピクチャ単位、又はピクチャを分割したタイル単位などで符号化処理をそれぞれ割り当てて分散処理を行う。これにより、遅延を減らし、よりリアルタイム性を実現できる。
As still another example, in a stadium, a shopping mall, or a factory, there may be a plurality of video data in which substantially the same scenes are shot by a plurality of terminals. In this case, for example, a unit of GOP (Group of Picture), a unit of picture, or a tile into which a picture is divided, using a plurality of terminals for which photographing was performed and other terminals and servers which are not photographing as necessary. The encoding process is allocated in units, etc., and distributed processing is performed. This reduces delay and can realize more real time performance.
また、複数の映像データはほぼ同一シーンであるため、各端末で撮影された映像データを互いに参照し合えるように、サーバで管理及び/又は指示をしてもよい。または、各端末からの符号化済みデータを、サーバが受信し複数のデータ間で参照関係を変更、又はピクチャ自体を補正或いは差し替えて符号化しなおしてもよい。これにより、一つ一つのデータの質と効率を高めたストリームを生成できる。
Further, since a plurality of video data are substantially the same scene, the server may manage and / or instruct the video data captured by each terminal to be mutually referred to. Alternatively, the server may receive the encoded data from each terminal and change the reference relationship among a plurality of data, or may correct or replace the picture itself and re-encode it. This makes it possible to generate streams with enhanced quality and efficiency of each piece of data.
また、サーバは、映像データの符号化方式を変更するトランスコードを行ったうえで映像データを配信してもよい。例えば、サーバは、MPEG系の符号化方式をVP系に変換してもよいし、H.264をH.265に変換してもよい。
Also, the server may deliver the video data after performing transcoding for changing the coding method of the video data. For example, the server may convert the encoding system of the MPEG system into the VP system, or the H.264 system. H.264. It may be converted to 265.
このように、符号化処理は、端末、又は1以上のサーバにより行うことが可能である。よって、以下では、処理を行う主体として「サーバ」又は「端末」等の記載を用いるが、サーバで行われる処理の一部又は全てが端末で行われてもよいし、端末で行われる処理の一部又は全てがサーバで行われてもよい。また、これらに関しては、復号処理についても同様である。
Thus, the encoding process can be performed by the terminal or one or more servers. Therefore, in the following, although the description such as "server" or "terminal" is used as the subject of processing, part or all of the processing performed by the server may be performed by the terminal, or the processing performed by the terminal Some or all may be performed on the server. In addition, with regard to these, the same applies to the decoding process.
[3D、マルチアングル]
近年では、互いにほぼ同期した複数のカメラex113及び/又はスマートフォンex115などの端末により撮影された異なるシーン、又は、同一シーンを異なるアングルから撮影した画像或いは映像を統合して利用することも増えてきている。各端末で撮影した映像は、別途取得した端末間の相対的な位置関係、又は、映像に含まれる特徴点が一致する領域などに基づいて統合される。 [3D, multi-angle]
In recent years, it has been increasingly used to integrate and use different scenes captured by terminals such as a plurality of cameras ex113 and / or smartphone ex115 which are substantially synchronized with each other, or images or videos of the same scene captured from different angles. There is. The images captured by each terminal are integrated based on the relative positional relationship between the terminals acquired separately, or an area where the feature points included in the image coincide with each other.
近年では、互いにほぼ同期した複数のカメラex113及び/又はスマートフォンex115などの端末により撮影された異なるシーン、又は、同一シーンを異なるアングルから撮影した画像或いは映像を統合して利用することも増えてきている。各端末で撮影した映像は、別途取得した端末間の相対的な位置関係、又は、映像に含まれる特徴点が一致する領域などに基づいて統合される。 [3D, multi-angle]
In recent years, it has been increasingly used to integrate and use different scenes captured by terminals such as a plurality of cameras ex113 and / or smartphone ex115 which are substantially synchronized with each other, or images or videos of the same scene captured from different angles. There is. The images captured by each terminal are integrated based on the relative positional relationship between the terminals acquired separately, or an area where the feature points included in the image coincide with each other.
サーバは、2次元の動画像を符号化するだけでなく、動画像のシーン解析などに基づいて自動的に、又は、ユーザが指定した時刻において、静止画を符号化し、受信端末に送信してもよい。サーバは、さらに、撮影端末間の相対的な位置関係を取得できる場合には、2次元の動画像だけでなく、同一シーンが異なるアングルから撮影された映像に基づき、当該シーンの3次元形状を生成できる。なお、サーバは、ポイントクラウドなどにより生成した3次元のデータを別途符号化してもよいし、3次元データを用いて人物又はオブジェクトを認識或いは追跡した結果に基づいて、受信端末に送信する映像を、複数の端末で撮影した映像から選択、又は、再構成して生成してもよい。
The server not only encodes a two-dimensional moving image, but also automatically encodes a still image based on scene analysis of the moving image or at a time designated by the user and transmits it to the receiving terminal. It is also good. Furthermore, if the server can acquire relative positional relationship between the imaging terminals, the three-dimensional shape of the scene is not only determined based on the two-dimensional moving image but also the video of the same scene captured from different angles. Can be generated. Note that the server may separately encode three-dimensional data generated by a point cloud or the like, or an image to be transmitted to the receiving terminal based on a result of recognizing or tracking a person or an object using the three-dimensional data. Alternatively, it may be generated by selecting or reconfiguring from videos taken by a plurality of terminals.
このようにして、ユーザは、各撮影端末に対応する各映像を任意に選択してシーンを楽しむこともできるし、複数画像又は映像を用いて再構成された3次元データから任意視点の映像を切り出したコンテンツを楽しむこともできる。さらに、映像と同様に音も複数の相異なるアングルから収音され、サーバは、映像に合わせて特定のアングル又は空間からの音を映像と多重化して送信してもよい。
In this way, the user can enjoy the scene by arbitrarily selecting each video corresponding to each photographing terminal, or from the three-dimensional data reconstructed using a plurality of images or videos, the video of the arbitrary viewpoint You can also enjoy the extracted content. Furthermore, the sound may be picked up from a plurality of different angles as well as the video, and the server may multiplex the sound from a specific angle or space with the video and transmit it according to the video.
また、近年ではVirtual Reality(VR)及びAugmented Reality(AR)など、現実世界と仮想世界とを対応付けたコンテンツも普及してきている。VRの画像の場合、サーバは、右目用及び左目用の視点画像をそれぞれ作成し、Multi-View Coding(MVC)などにより各視点映像間で参照を許容する符号化を行ってもよいし、互いに参照せずに別ストリームとして符号化してもよい。別ストリームの復号時には、ユーザの視点に応じて仮想的な3次元空間が再現されるように互いに同期させて再生するとよい。
Also, in recent years, content in which the real world and the virtual world are associated, such as Virtual Reality (VR) and Augmented Reality (AR), has also become widespread. In the case of VR images, the server may create viewpoint images for the right eye and for the left eye, respectively, and may perform coding to allow reference between each viewpoint video using Multi-View Coding (MVC) or the like. It may be encoded as another stream without reference. At the time of decoding of another stream, reproduction may be performed in synchronization with each other so that a virtual three-dimensional space is reproduced according to the viewpoint of the user.
ARの画像の場合には、サーバは、現実空間のカメラ情報に、仮想空間上の仮想物体情報を、3次元的位置又はユーザの視点の動きに基づいて重畳する。復号装置は、仮想物体情報及び3次元データを取得又は保持し、ユーザの視点の動きに応じて2次元画像を生成し、スムーズにつなげることで重畳データを作成してもよい。または、復号装置は仮想物体情報の依頼に加えてユーザの視点の動きをサーバに送信し、サーバは、サーバに保持される3次元データから受信した視点の動きに合わせて重畳データを作成し、重畳データを符号化して復号装置に配信してもよい。なお、重畳データは、RGB以外に透過度を示すα値を有し、サーバは、3次元データから作成されたオブジェクト以外の部分のα値が0などに設定し、当該部分が透過する状態で、符号化してもよい。もしくは、サーバは、クロマキーのように所定の値のRGB値を背景に設定し、オブジェクト以外の部分は背景色にしたデータを生成してもよい。
In the case of an AR image, the server superimposes virtual object information in the virtual space on camera information in the real space based on the three-dimensional position or the movement of the user's viewpoint. The decoding apparatus may acquire or hold virtual object information and three-dimensional data, generate a two-dimensional image according to the movement of the user's viewpoint, and create superimposed data by smoothly connecting. Alternatively, the decoding device transmits the motion of the user's viewpoint to the server in addition to the request for virtual object information, and the server creates superimposed data in accordance with the motion of the viewpoint received from the three-dimensional data held in the server. The superimposed data may be encoded and distributed to the decoding device. Note that the superimposed data has an α value indicating transparency as well as RGB, and the server sets the α value of a portion other than the object created from the three-dimensional data to 0 etc., and the portion is transparent , May be encoded. Alternatively, the server may set RGB values of predetermined values as a background, such as chroma key, and generate data in which the portion other than the object has a background color.
同様に配信されたデータの復号処理はクライアントである各端末で行っても、サーバ側で行ってもよいし、互いに分担して行ってもよい。一例として、ある端末が、一旦サーバに受信リクエストを送り、そのリクエストに応じたコンテンツを他の端末で受信し復号処理を行い、ディスプレイを有する装置に復号済みの信号が送信されてもよい。通信可能な端末自体の性能によらず処理を分散して適切なコンテンツを選択することで画質のよいデータを再生することができる。また、他の例として大きなサイズの画像データをTV等で受信しつつ、鑑賞者の個人端末にピクチャが分割されたタイルなど一部の領域が復号されて表示されてもよい。これにより、全体像を共有化しつつ、自身の担当分野又はより詳細に確認したい領域を手元で確認することができる。
Similarly, the decryption processing of the distributed data may be performed by each terminal which is a client, may be performed by the server side, or may be performed sharing each other. As one example, one terminal may send a reception request to the server once, the content corresponding to the request may be received by another terminal and decoded, and the decoded signal may be transmitted to a device having a display. Data of high image quality can be reproduced by distributing processing and selecting appropriate content regardless of the performance of the communicable terminal itself. As another example, while receiving image data of a large size by a TV or the like, a viewer's personal terminal may decode and display a partial area such as a tile in which a picture is divided. Thereby, it is possible to confirm at hand the area in which the user is in charge or the area to be checked in more detail while sharing the whole image.
また今後は、屋内外にかかわらず近距離、中距離、又は長距離の無線通信が複数使用可能な状況下で、MPEG-DASHなどの配信システム規格を利用して、接続中の通信に対して適切なデータを切り替えながらシームレスにコンテンツを受信することが予想される。これにより、ユーザは、自身の端末のみならず屋内外に設置されたディスプレイなどの復号装置又は表示装置を自由に選択しながらリアルタイムで切り替えられる。また、自身の位置情報などに基づいて、復号する端末及び表示する端末を切り替えながら復号を行うことができる。これにより、目的地への移動中に、表示可能なデバイスが埋め込まれた隣の建物の壁面又は地面の一部に地図情報を表示させながら移動することも可能になる。また、符号化データが受信端末から短時間でアクセスできるサーバにキャッシュされている、又は、コンテンツ・デリバリー・サービスにおけるエッジサーバにコピーされている、などの、ネットワーク上での符号化データへのアクセス容易性に基づいて、受信データのビットレートを切り替えることも可能である。
Also, from now on, for communication under connection using a delivery system standard such as MPEG-DASH under a situation where multiple short distance, middle distance or long distance wireless communication can be used regardless of indoor or outdoor. It is expected to receive content seamlessly while switching the appropriate data. As a result, the user can switch in real time while freely selecting not only his own terminal but also a decoding apparatus or display apparatus such as a display installed indoors and outdoors. In addition, decoding can be performed while switching between a terminal to be decoded and a terminal to be displayed, based on own position information and the like. This makes it possible to move while displaying map information on the wall surface or part of the ground of the next building in which the displayable device is embedded while moving to the destination. Also, access to encoded data over the network, such as encoded data being cached on a server that can be accessed in a short time from a receiving terminal, or copied to an edge server in a content delivery service, etc. It is also possible to switch the bit rate of the received data based on ease.
[スケーラブル符号化]
コンテンツの切り替えに関して、図24に示す、上記各実施の形態で示した動画像符号化方法を応用して圧縮符号化されたスケーラブルなストリームを用いて説明する。サーバは、個別のストリームとして内容は同じで質の異なるストリームを複数有していても構わないが、図示するようにレイヤに分けて符号化を行うことで実現される時間的/空間的スケーラブルなストリームの特徴を活かして、コンテンツを切り替える構成であってもよい。つまり、復号側が性能という内的要因と通信帯域の状態などの外的要因とに応じてどのレイヤまで復号するかを決定することで、復号側は、低解像度のコンテンツと高解像度のコンテンツとを自由に切り替えて復号できる。例えば移動中にスマートフォンex115で視聴していた映像の続きを、帰宅後にインターネットTV等の機器で視聴したい場合には、当該機器は、同じストリームを異なるレイヤまで復号すればよいので、サーバ側の負担を軽減できる。 [Scalable coding]
Content switching will be described using a scalable stream compression-coded by applying the moving picture coding method shown in each of the above-described embodiments shown in FIG. The server may have a plurality of streams with the same content but different qualities as individual streams, but is temporally / spatial scalable which is realized by coding into layers as shown in the figure. The configuration may be such that the content is switched using the feature of the stream. That is, the decoding side determines low-resolution content and high-resolution content by determining which layer to decode depending on the internal factor of performance and external factors such as the state of the communication band. It can be switched freely and decoded. For example, when it is desired to view the continuation of the video being watched by the smartphone ex115 while moving on a device such as the Internet TV after returning home, the device only has to decode the same stream to different layers, so the burden on the server side Can be reduced.
コンテンツの切り替えに関して、図24に示す、上記各実施の形態で示した動画像符号化方法を応用して圧縮符号化されたスケーラブルなストリームを用いて説明する。サーバは、個別のストリームとして内容は同じで質の異なるストリームを複数有していても構わないが、図示するようにレイヤに分けて符号化を行うことで実現される時間的/空間的スケーラブルなストリームの特徴を活かして、コンテンツを切り替える構成であってもよい。つまり、復号側が性能という内的要因と通信帯域の状態などの外的要因とに応じてどのレイヤまで復号するかを決定することで、復号側は、低解像度のコンテンツと高解像度のコンテンツとを自由に切り替えて復号できる。例えば移動中にスマートフォンex115で視聴していた映像の続きを、帰宅後にインターネットTV等の機器で視聴したい場合には、当該機器は、同じストリームを異なるレイヤまで復号すればよいので、サーバ側の負担を軽減できる。 [Scalable coding]
Content switching will be described using a scalable stream compression-coded by applying the moving picture coding method shown in each of the above-described embodiments shown in FIG. The server may have a plurality of streams with the same content but different qualities as individual streams, but is temporally / spatial scalable which is realized by coding into layers as shown in the figure. The configuration may be such that the content is switched using the feature of the stream. That is, the decoding side determines low-resolution content and high-resolution content by determining which layer to decode depending on the internal factor of performance and external factors such as the state of the communication band. It can be switched freely and decoded. For example, when it is desired to view the continuation of the video being watched by the smartphone ex115 while moving on a device such as the Internet TV after returning home, the device only has to decode the same stream to different layers, so the burden on the server side Can be reduced.
さらに、上記のように、レイヤ毎にピクチャが符号化されており、ベースレイヤの上位にエンハンスメントレイヤが存在するスケーラビリティを実現する構成以外に、エンハンスメントレイヤが画像の統計情報などに基づくメタ情報を含み、復号側が、メタ情報に基づきベースレイヤのピクチャを超解像することで高画質化したコンテンツを生成してもよい。超解像とは、同一解像度におけるSN比の向上、及び、解像度の拡大のいずれであってもよい。メタ情報は、超解像処理に用いる線形或いは非線形のフィルタ係数を特定するため情報、又は、超解像処理に用いるフィルタ処理、機械学習或いは最小2乗演算におけるパラメータ値を特定する情報などを含む。
Furthermore, as described above, the picture is encoded for each layer, and the enhancement layer includes meta information based on statistical information of the image, etc., in addition to the configuration for realizing the scalability in which the enhancement layer exists above the base layer. The decoding side may generate high-quality content by super-resolving a picture of the base layer based on the meta information. The super resolution may be either an improvement in the SN ratio at the same resolution or an expansion of the resolution. Meta information includes information for identifying linear or non-linear filter coefficients used for super-resolution processing, or information for identifying parameter values in filter processing used for super-resolution processing, machine learning or least squares operation, etc. .
または、画像内のオブジェクトなどの意味合いに応じてピクチャがタイル等に分割されており、復号側が、復号するタイルを選択することで一部の領域だけを復号する構成であってもよい。また、オブジェクトの属性(人物、車、ボールなど)と映像内の位置(同一画像における座標位置など)とをメタ情報として格納することで、復号側は、メタ情報に基づいて所望のオブジェクトの位置を特定し、そのオブジェクトを含むタイルを決定できる。例えば、図25に示すように、メタ情報は、HEVCにおけるSEIメッセージなど画素データとは異なるデータ格納構造を用いて格納される。このメタ情報は、例えば、メインオブジェクトの位置、サイズ、又は色彩などを示す。
Alternatively, the picture may be divided into tiles or the like according to the meaning of an object or the like in the image, and the decoding side may be configured to decode only a part of the area by selecting the tile to be decoded. Also, by storing the attribute of the object (person, car, ball, etc.) and the position in the image (coordinate position in the same image, etc.) as meta information, the decoding side can position the desired object based on the meta information And determine the tile that contains the object. For example, as shown in FIG. 25, meta-information is stored using a data storage structure different from pixel data, such as SEI message in HEVC. This meta information indicates, for example, the position, size, or color of the main object.
また、ストリーム、シーケンス又はランダムアクセス単位など、複数のピクチャから構成される単位でメタ情報が格納されてもよい。これにより、復号側は、特定人物が映像内に出現する時刻などが取得でき、ピクチャ単位の情報と合わせることで、オブジェクトが存在するピクチャ、及び、ピクチャ内でのオブジェクトの位置を特定できる。
Also, meta information may be stored in units of a plurality of pictures, such as streams, sequences, or random access units. As a result, the decoding side can acquire the time when a specific person appears in the video and the like, and can identify the picture in which the object exists and the position of the object in the picture by combining the information with the picture unit.
[Webページの最適化]
図26は、コンピュータex111等におけるwebページの表示画面例を示す図である。図27は、スマートフォンex115等におけるwebページの表示画面例を示す図である。図26及び図27に示すようにwebページが、画像コンテンツへのリンクであるリンク画像を複数含む場合があり、閲覧するデバイスによってその見え方は異なる。画面上に複数のリンク画像が見える場合には、ユーザが明示的にリンク画像を選択するまで、又は画面の中央付近にリンク画像が近付く或いはリンク画像の全体が画面内に入るまでは、表示装置(復号装置)は、リンク画像として各コンテンツが有する静止画又はIピクチャを表示したり、複数の静止画又はIピクチャ等でgifアニメのような映像を表示したり、ベースレイヤのみ受信して映像を復号及び表示したりする。 Web Page Optimization
FIG. 26 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of a web page in the computer ex111 and the like. FIG. 27 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of a web page in the smartphone ex115 and the like. As shown in FIGS. 26 and 27, the web page may include a plurality of link images which are links to image content, and the appearance differs depending on the browsing device. When multiple link images are visible on the screen, the display device until the user explicitly selects the link image, or until the link image approaches near the center of the screen or the entire link image falls within the screen The (decoding device) displays still images or I pictures of each content as link images, displays images such as gif animation with a plurality of still images or I pictures, etc., receives only the base layer Decode and display.
図26は、コンピュータex111等におけるwebページの表示画面例を示す図である。図27は、スマートフォンex115等におけるwebページの表示画面例を示す図である。図26及び図27に示すようにwebページが、画像コンテンツへのリンクであるリンク画像を複数含む場合があり、閲覧するデバイスによってその見え方は異なる。画面上に複数のリンク画像が見える場合には、ユーザが明示的にリンク画像を選択するまで、又は画面の中央付近にリンク画像が近付く或いはリンク画像の全体が画面内に入るまでは、表示装置(復号装置)は、リンク画像として各コンテンツが有する静止画又はIピクチャを表示したり、複数の静止画又はIピクチャ等でgifアニメのような映像を表示したり、ベースレイヤのみ受信して映像を復号及び表示したりする。 Web Page Optimization
FIG. 26 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of a web page in the computer ex111 and the like. FIG. 27 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of a web page in the smartphone ex115 and the like. As shown in FIGS. 26 and 27, the web page may include a plurality of link images which are links to image content, and the appearance differs depending on the browsing device. When multiple link images are visible on the screen, the display device until the user explicitly selects the link image, or until the link image approaches near the center of the screen or the entire link image falls within the screen The (decoding device) displays still images or I pictures of each content as link images, displays images such as gif animation with a plurality of still images or I pictures, etc., receives only the base layer Decode and display.
ユーザによりリンク画像が選択された場合、表示装置は、ベースレイヤを最優先にして復号する。なお、webページを構成するHTMLにスケーラブルなコンテンツであることを示す情報があれば、表示装置は、エンハンスメントレイヤまで復号してもよい。また、リアルタイム性を担保するために、選択される前又は通信帯域が非常に厳しい場合には、表示装置は、前方参照のピクチャ(Iピクチャ、Pピクチャ、前方参照のみのBピクチャ)のみを復号及び表示することで、先頭ピクチャの復号時刻と表示時刻との間の遅延(コンテンツの復号開始から表示開始までの遅延)を低減できる。また、表示装置は、ピクチャの参照関係を敢えて無視して全てのBピクチャ及びPピクチャを前方参照にして粗く復号し、時間が経ち受信したピクチャが増えるにつれて正常の復号を行ってもよい。
When the link image is selected by the user, the display device decodes the base layer with the highest priority. Note that the display device may decode up to the enhancement layer if there is information indicating that the content is scalable in the HTML configuring the web page. Also, in order to secure real-time capability, the display device decodes only forward referenced pictures (I picture, P picture, forward referenced only B picture) before the selection or when the communication band is very strict. And, by displaying, it is possible to reduce the delay between the decoding time of the leading picture and the display time (delay from the start of decoding of the content to the start of display). In addition, the display device may roughly ignore the reference relationship of pictures and roughly decode all B pictures and P pictures with forward reference, and may perform normal decoding as time passes and the number of received pictures increases.
[自動走行]
また、車の自動走行又は走行支援のため2次元又は3次元の地図情報などの静止画又は映像データを送受信する場合、受信端末は、1以上のレイヤに属する画像データに加えて、メタ情報として天候又は工事の情報なども受信し、これらを対応付けて復号してもよい。なお、メタ情報は、レイヤに属してもよいし、単に画像データと多重化されてもよい。 [Auto run]
In addition, when transmitting or receiving still image or video data such as two-dimensional or three-dimensional map information for automatic traveling or driving assistance of a car, the receiving terminal is added as image information belonging to one or more layers as meta information Information on weather or construction may also be received, and these may be correlated and decoded. The meta information may belong to the layer or may be simply multiplexed with the image data.
また、車の自動走行又は走行支援のため2次元又は3次元の地図情報などの静止画又は映像データを送受信する場合、受信端末は、1以上のレイヤに属する画像データに加えて、メタ情報として天候又は工事の情報なども受信し、これらを対応付けて復号してもよい。なお、メタ情報は、レイヤに属してもよいし、単に画像データと多重化されてもよい。 [Auto run]
In addition, when transmitting or receiving still image or video data such as two-dimensional or three-dimensional map information for automatic traveling or driving assistance of a car, the receiving terminal is added as image information belonging to one or more layers as meta information Information on weather or construction may also be received, and these may be correlated and decoded. The meta information may belong to the layer or may be simply multiplexed with the image data.
この場合、受信端末を含む車、ドローン又は飛行機などが移動するため、受信端末は、当該受信端末の位置情報を受信要求時に送信することで、基地局ex106~ex110を切り替えながらシームレスな受信及び復号を実現できる。また、受信端末は、ユーザの選択、ユーザの状況又は通信帯域の状態に応じて、メタ情報をどの程度受信するか、又は地図情報をどの程度更新していくかを動的に切り替えることが可能になる。
In this case, since a car including a receiving terminal, a drone or an airplane moves, the receiving terminal transmits the position information of the receiving terminal at the time of reception request to seamlessly receive and decode while switching the base stations ex106 to ex110. Can be realized. In addition, the receiving terminal can dynamically switch how much meta information is received or how much map information is updated according to the user's selection, the user's situation or the state of the communication band. become.
以上のようにして、コンテンツ供給システムex100では、ユーザが送信した符号化された情報をリアルタイムでクライアントが受信して復号し、再生することができる。
As described above, in the content providing system ex100, the client can receive, decode, and reproduce the encoded information transmitted by the user in real time.
[個人コンテンツの配信]
また、コンテンツ供給システムex100では、映像配信業者による高画質で長時間のコンテンツのみならず、個人による低画質で短時間のコンテンツのユニキャスト、又はマルチキャスト配信が可能である。また、このような個人のコンテンツは今後も増加していくと考えられる。個人コンテンツをより優れたコンテンツにするために、サーバは、編集処理を行ってから符号化処理を行ってもよい。これは例えば、以下のような構成で実現できる。 [Distribution of personal content]
Further, in the content supply system ex100, not only high-quality and long-time content by a video distribution company but also unicast or multicast distribution of low-quality and short-time content by an individual is possible. In addition, such personal content is expected to increase in the future. In order to make the personal content more excellent, the server may perform the encoding process after performing the editing process. This can be realized, for example, with the following configuration.
また、コンテンツ供給システムex100では、映像配信業者による高画質で長時間のコンテンツのみならず、個人による低画質で短時間のコンテンツのユニキャスト、又はマルチキャスト配信が可能である。また、このような個人のコンテンツは今後も増加していくと考えられる。個人コンテンツをより優れたコンテンツにするために、サーバは、編集処理を行ってから符号化処理を行ってもよい。これは例えば、以下のような構成で実現できる。 [Distribution of personal content]
Further, in the content supply system ex100, not only high-quality and long-time content by a video distribution company but also unicast or multicast distribution of low-quality and short-time content by an individual is possible. In addition, such personal content is expected to increase in the future. In order to make the personal content more excellent, the server may perform the encoding process after performing the editing process. This can be realized, for example, with the following configuration.
撮影時にリアルタイム又は蓄積して撮影後に、サーバは、原画又は符号化済みデータから撮影エラー、シーン探索、意味の解析、及びオブジェクト検出などの認識処理を行う。そして、サーバは、認識結果に基いて手動又は自動で、ピントずれ又は手ブレなどを補正したり、明度が他のピクチャに比べて低い又は焦点が合っていないシーンなどの重要性の低いシーンを削除したり、オブジェクトのエッジを強調したり、色合いを変化させるなどの編集を行う。サーバは、編集結果に基いて編集後のデータを符号化する。また撮影時刻が長すぎると視聴率が下がることも知られており、サーバは、撮影時間に応じて特定の時間範囲内のコンテンツになるように上記のように重要性が低いシーンのみならず動きが少ないシーンなどを、画像処理結果に基き自動でクリップしてもよい。または、サーバは、シーンの意味解析の結果に基づいてダイジェストを生成して符号化してもよい。
At the time of shooting, the server performs recognition processing such as shooting error, scene search, meaning analysis, and object detection from the original image or encoded data after shooting in real time or by accumulation. Then, the server manually or automatically corrects out-of-focus or camera shake, etc. based on the recognition result, or a scene with low importance such as a scene whose brightness is low or out of focus compared with other pictures. Make edits such as deleting, emphasizing the edge of an object, or changing the color. The server encodes the edited data based on the edited result. It is also known that the audience rating drops when the shooting time is too long, and the server works not only with scenes with low importance as described above, but also moves as content becomes within a specific time range according to the shooting time. Scenes with a small amount of motion may be clipped automatically based on the image processing result. Alternatively, the server may generate and encode a digest based on the result of semantic analysis of the scene.
なお、個人コンテンツには、そのままでは著作権、著作者人格権、又は肖像権等の侵害となるものが写り込んでいるケースもあり、共有する範囲が意図した範囲を超えてしまうなど個人にとって不都合な場合もある。よって、例えば、サーバは、画面の周辺部の人の顔、又は家の中などを敢えて焦点が合わない画像に変更して符号化してもよい。また、サーバは、符号化対象画像内に、予め登録した人物とは異なる人物の顔が映っているかどうかを認識し、映っている場合には、顔の部分にモザイクをかけるなどの処理を行ってもよい。または、符号化の前処理又は後処理として、著作権などの観点からユーザが画像を加工したい人物又は背景領域を指定し、サーバは、指定された領域を別の映像に置き換える、又は焦点をぼかすなどの処理を行うことも可能である。人物であれば、動画像において人物をトラッキングしながら、顔の部分の映像を置き換えることができる。
In some cases, there are cases where personal content may infringe copyright, author's personality right, portrait right, etc. as it is, and it is inconvenient for the individual, such as the range of sharing exceeds the intended range. There are also cases. Thus, for example, the server may change and encode the face of a person at the periphery of the screen, or the inside of a house, etc. into an image out of focus. In addition, the server recognizes whether or not the face of a person different from the person registered in advance appears in the image to be encoded, and if so, performs processing such as mosaicing the face portion. May be Alternatively, the user designates a person or background area desired to process an image from the viewpoint of copyright etc. as preprocessing or post-processing of encoding, and the server replaces the designated area with another video or blurs the focus. It is also possible to perform such processing. If it is a person, it is possible to replace the image of the face part while tracking the person in the moving image.
また、データ量の小さい個人コンテンツの視聴はリアルタイム性の要求が強いため、帯域幅にもよるが、復号装置は、まずベースレイヤを最優先で受信して復号及び再生を行う。復号装置は、この間にエンハンスメントレイヤを受信し、再生がループされる場合など2回以上再生される場合に、エンハンスメントレイヤも含めて高画質の映像を再生してもよい。このようにスケーラブルな符号化が行われているストリームであれば、未選択時又は見始めた段階では粗い動画だが、徐々にストリームがスマートになり画像がよくなるような体験を提供することができる。スケーラブル符号化以外にも、1回目に再生される粗いストリームと、1回目の動画を参照して符号化される2回目のストリームとが1つのストリームとして構成されていても同様の体験を提供できる。
Also, since viewing of personal content with a small amount of data has a strong demand for real-time performance, the decoding apparatus first receives the base layer with the highest priority, and performs decoding and reproduction, although it depends on the bandwidth. The decoding device may receive the enhancement layer during this period, and may play back high-quality video including the enhancement layer if it is played back more than once, such as when playback is looped. In the case of a stream in which scalable coding is performed as described above, it is possible to provide an experience in which the stream gradually becomes smart and the image becomes better although it is a rough moving image when it is not selected or when it starts watching. Besides scalable coding, the same experience can be provided even if the coarse stream played back first and the second stream coded with reference to the first moving image are configured as one stream .
[その他の使用例]
また、これらの符号化又は復号処理は、一般的に各端末が有するLSIex500において処理される。LSIex500は、ワンチップであっても複数チップからなる構成であってもよい。なお、動画像符号化又は復号用のソフトウェアをコンピュータex111等で読み取り可能な何らかの記録メディア(CD-ROM、フレキシブルディスク、又はハードディスクなど)に組み込み、そのソフトウェアを用いて符号化又は復号処理を行ってもよい。さらに、スマートフォンex115がカメラ付きである場合には、そのカメラで取得した動画データを送信してもよい。このときの動画データはスマートフォンex115が有するLSIex500で符号化処理されたデータである。 [Other use cases]
Also, these encoding or decoding processes are generally processed in an LSI ex 500 that each terminal has. The LSI ex 500 may be a single chip or a plurality of chips. Software for moving image encoding or decoding is incorporated in any recording medium (CD-ROM, flexible disk, hard disk, etc.) readable by computer ex111 or the like, and encoding or decoding is performed using the software. It is also good. Furthermore, when the smartphone ex115 is equipped with a camera, moving image data acquired by the camera may be transmitted. The moving image data at this time is data encoded by the LSI ex 500 included in the smartphone ex 115.
また、これらの符号化又は復号処理は、一般的に各端末が有するLSIex500において処理される。LSIex500は、ワンチップであっても複数チップからなる構成であってもよい。なお、動画像符号化又は復号用のソフトウェアをコンピュータex111等で読み取り可能な何らかの記録メディア(CD-ROM、フレキシブルディスク、又はハードディスクなど)に組み込み、そのソフトウェアを用いて符号化又は復号処理を行ってもよい。さらに、スマートフォンex115がカメラ付きである場合には、そのカメラで取得した動画データを送信してもよい。このときの動画データはスマートフォンex115が有するLSIex500で符号化処理されたデータである。 [Other use cases]
Also, these encoding or decoding processes are generally processed in an LSI ex 500 that each terminal has. The LSI ex 500 may be a single chip or a plurality of chips. Software for moving image encoding or decoding is incorporated in any recording medium (CD-ROM, flexible disk, hard disk, etc.) readable by computer ex111 or the like, and encoding or decoding is performed using the software. It is also good. Furthermore, when the smartphone ex115 is equipped with a camera, moving image data acquired by the camera may be transmitted. The moving image data at this time is data encoded by the LSI ex 500 included in the smartphone ex 115.
なお、LSIex500は、アプリケーションソフトをダウンロードしてアクティベートする構成であってもよい。この場合、端末は、まず、当該端末がコンテンツの符号化方式に対応しているか、又は、特定サービスの実行能力を有するかを判定する。端末がコンテンツの符号化方式に対応していない場合、又は、特定サービスの実行能力を有さない場合、端末は、コーデック又はアプリケーションソフトをダウンロードし、その後、コンテンツ取得及び再生する。
The LSI ex 500 may be configured to download and activate application software. In this case, the terminal first determines whether the terminal corresponds to the content coding scheme or has the ability to execute a specific service. If the terminal does not support the content encoding method or does not have the ability to execute a specific service, the terminal downloads the codec or application software, and then acquires and reproduces the content.
また、インターネットex101を介したコンテンツ供給システムex100に限らず、デジタル放送用システムにも上記各実施の形態の少なくとも動画像符号化装置(画像符号化装置)又は動画像復号化装置(画像復号装置)のいずれかを組み込むことができる。衛星などを利用して放送用の電波に映像と音が多重化された多重化データを載せて送受信するため、コンテンツ供給システムex100のユニキャストがし易い構成に対してマルチキャスト向きであるという違いがあるが符号化処理及び復号処理に関しては同様の応用が可能である。
Further, the present invention is not limited to the content supply system ex100 via the Internet ex101, but also to a system for digital broadcasting at least a moving picture coding apparatus (image coding apparatus) or a moving picture decoding apparatus (image decoding apparatus) of the above embodiments. Can be incorporated. There is a difference in that it is multicast-oriented with respect to the configuration in which the content supply system ex100 can be easily unicasted, since multiplexed data in which video and sound are multiplexed is transmitted on broadcast radio waves using satellites etc. Similar applications are possible for the encoding process and the decoding process.
[ハードウェア構成]
図28は、スマートフォンex115を示す図である。また、図29は、スマートフォンex115の構成例を示す図である。スマートフォンex115は、基地局ex110との間で電波を送受信するためのアンテナex450と、映像及び静止画を撮ることが可能なカメラ部ex465と、カメラ部ex465で撮像した映像、及びアンテナex450で受信した映像等が復号されたデータを表示する表示部ex458とを備える。スマートフォンex115は、さらに、タッチパネル等である操作部ex466と、音声又は音響を出力するためのスピーカ等である音声出力部ex457と、音声を入力するためのマイク等である音声入力部ex456と、撮影した映像或いは静止画、録音した音声、受信した映像或いは静止画、メール等の符号化されたデータ、又は、復号化されたデータを保存可能なメモリ部ex467と、ユーザを特定し、ネットワークをはじめ各種データへのアクセスの認証をするためのSIMex468とのインタフェース部であるスロット部ex464とを備える。なお、メモリ部ex467の代わりに外付けメモリが用いられてもよい。 [Hardware configuration]
FIG. 28 is a diagram showing the smartphone ex115. FIG. 29 is a diagram showing an example configuration of the smartphone ex115. The smartphone ex115 receives an antenna ex450 for transmitting and receiving radio waves to and from the base station ex110, a camera unit ex465 capable of taking video and still images, a video taken by the camera unit ex465, and the antenna ex450 And a display unit ex <b> 458 for displaying data obtained by decoding an image or the like. The smartphone ex115 further includes an operation unit ex466 that is a touch panel or the like, a voice output unit ex457 that is a speaker or the like for outputting voice or sound, a voice input unit ex456 that is a microphone or the like for inputting voice, Identify the user, the memory unit ex 467 capable of storing encoded video or still image, recorded voice, received video or still image, encoded data such as mail, or decoded data, and specify a network, etc. And a slot unit ex464 that is an interface unit with the SIM ex 468 for authenticating access to various data. Note that an external memory may be used instead of the memory unit ex467.
図28は、スマートフォンex115を示す図である。また、図29は、スマートフォンex115の構成例を示す図である。スマートフォンex115は、基地局ex110との間で電波を送受信するためのアンテナex450と、映像及び静止画を撮ることが可能なカメラ部ex465と、カメラ部ex465で撮像した映像、及びアンテナex450で受信した映像等が復号されたデータを表示する表示部ex458とを備える。スマートフォンex115は、さらに、タッチパネル等である操作部ex466と、音声又は音響を出力するためのスピーカ等である音声出力部ex457と、音声を入力するためのマイク等である音声入力部ex456と、撮影した映像或いは静止画、録音した音声、受信した映像或いは静止画、メール等の符号化されたデータ、又は、復号化されたデータを保存可能なメモリ部ex467と、ユーザを特定し、ネットワークをはじめ各種データへのアクセスの認証をするためのSIMex468とのインタフェース部であるスロット部ex464とを備える。なお、メモリ部ex467の代わりに外付けメモリが用いられてもよい。 [Hardware configuration]
FIG. 28 is a diagram showing the smartphone ex115. FIG. 29 is a diagram showing an example configuration of the smartphone ex115. The smartphone ex115 receives an antenna ex450 for transmitting and receiving radio waves to and from the base station ex110, a camera unit ex465 capable of taking video and still images, a video taken by the camera unit ex465, and the antenna ex450 And a display unit ex <b> 458 for displaying data obtained by decoding an image or the like. The smartphone ex115 further includes an operation unit ex466 that is a touch panel or the like, a voice output unit ex457 that is a speaker or the like for outputting voice or sound, a voice input unit ex456 that is a microphone or the like for inputting voice, Identify the user, the memory unit ex 467 capable of storing encoded video or still image, recorded voice, received video or still image, encoded data such as mail, or decoded data, and specify a network, etc. And a slot unit ex464 that is an interface unit with the SIM ex 468 for authenticating access to various data. Note that an external memory may be used instead of the memory unit ex467.
また、表示部ex458及び操作部ex466等を統括的に制御する主制御部ex460と、電源回路部ex461、操作入力制御部ex462、映像信号処理部ex455、カメラインタフェース部ex463、ディスプレイ制御部ex459、変調/復調部ex452、多重/分離部ex453、音声信号処理部ex454、スロット部ex464、及びメモリ部ex467とがバスex470を介して接続されている。
Further, a main control unit ex460 that integrally controls the display unit ex458 and the operation unit ex466, a power supply circuit unit ex461, an operation input control unit ex462, a video signal processing unit ex455, a camera interface unit ex463, a display control unit ex459, / Demodulation unit ex452, multiplexing / demultiplexing unit ex453, audio signal processing unit ex454, slot unit ex464, and memory unit ex467 are connected via a bus ex470.
電源回路部ex461は、ユーザの操作により電源キーがオン状態にされると、バッテリパックから各部に対して電力を供給することによりスマートフォンex115を動作可能な状態に起動する。
When the power supply key is turned on by the user's operation, the power supply circuit unit ex461 activates the smartphone ex115 to an operable state by supplying power from the battery pack to each unit.
スマートフォンex115は、CPU、ROM及びRAM等を有する主制御部ex460の制御に基づいて、通話及データ通信等の処理を行う。通話時は、音声入力部ex456で収音した音声信号を音声信号処理部ex454でデジタル音声信号に変換し、これを変調/復調部ex452でスペクトラム拡散処理し、送信/受信部ex451でデジタルアナログ変換処理及び周波数変換処理を施した後にアンテナex450を介して送信する。また受信データを増幅して周波数変換処理及びアナログデジタル変換処理を施し、変調/復調部ex452でスペクトラム逆拡散処理し、音声信号処理部ex454でアナログ音声信号に変換した後、これを音声出力部ex457から出力する。データ通信モード時は、本体部の操作部ex466等の操作によってテキスト、静止画、又は映像データが操作入力制御部ex462を介して主制御部ex460に送出され、同様に送受信処理が行われる。データ通信モード時に映像、静止画、又は映像と音声を送信する場合、映像信号処理部ex455は、メモリ部ex467に保存されている映像信号又はカメラ部ex465から入力された映像信号を上記各実施の形態で示した動画像符号化方法によって圧縮符号化し、符号化された映像データを多重/分離部ex453に送出する。また、音声信号処理部ex454は、映像又は静止画等をカメラ部ex465で撮像中に音声入力部ex456で収音した音声信号を符号化し、符号化された音声データを多重/分離部ex453に送出する。多重/分離部ex453は、符号化済み映像データと符号化済み音声データを所定の方式で多重化し、変調/復調部(変調/復調回路部)ex452、及び送信/受信部ex451で変調処理及び変換処理を施してアンテナex450を介して送信する。
The smartphone ex115 performs processing such as call and data communication based on control of the main control unit ex460 having a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, and the like. At the time of a call, the audio signal collected by the audio input unit ex456 is converted to a digital audio signal by the audio signal processing unit ex454, spread spectrum processing is performed by the modulation / demodulation unit ex452, and digital analog conversion is performed by the transmission / reception unit ex451. After processing and frequency conversion processing, transmission is performed via the antenna ex450. Further, the received data is amplified and subjected to frequency conversion processing and analog-to-digital conversion processing, subjected to spectrum despreading processing by modulation / demodulation unit ex452, and converted to an analog sound signal by sound signal processing unit ex454. Output from In the data communication mode, text, still images, or video data are sent to the main control unit ex460 via the operation input control unit ex462 by the operation of the operation unit ex466 or the like of the main unit, and transmission and reception processing is similarly performed. In the case of transmitting video, still images, or video and audio in the data communication mode, the video signal processing unit ex 455 executes the video signal stored in the memory unit ex 467 or the video signal input from the camera unit ex 465 as described above. The video data is compressed and encoded by the moving picture encoding method shown in the form, and the encoded video data is sent to the multiplexing / demultiplexing unit ex453. Further, the audio signal processing unit ex454 encodes an audio signal collected by the audio input unit ex456 while capturing a video or a still image with the camera unit ex465, and sends the encoded audio data to the multiplexing / demultiplexing unit ex453. Do. The multiplexing / demultiplexing unit ex453 multiplexes the encoded video data and the encoded audio data according to a predetermined method, and performs modulation processing and conversion by the modulation / demodulation unit (modulation / demodulation circuit unit) ex452 and the transmission / reception unit ex451. It processes and transmits via antenna ex450.
電子メール又はチャットに添付された映像、又はウェブページ等にリンクされた映像を受信した場合、アンテナex450を介して受信された多重化データを復号するために、多重/分離部ex453は、多重化データを分離することにより、多重化データを映像データのビットストリームと音声データのビットストリームとに分け、同期バスex470を介して符号化された映像データを映像信号処理部ex455に供給するとともに、符号化された音声データを音声信号処理部ex454に供給する。映像信号処理部ex455は、上記各実施の形態で示した動画像符号化方法に対応した動画像復号化方法によって映像信号を復号し、ディスプレイ制御部ex459を介して表示部ex458から、リンクされた動画像ファイルに含まれる映像又は静止画が表示される。また音声信号処理部ex454は、音声信号を復号し、音声出力部ex457から音声が出力される。なおリアルタイムストリーミングが普及しているため、ユーザの状況によっては音声の再生が社会的にふさわしくない場も起こりえる。そのため、初期値としては、音声信号は再生せず映像データのみを再生する構成の方が望ましい。ユーザが映像データをクリックするなど操作を行った場合にのみ音声を同期して再生してもよい。
When a video attached to an e-mail or a chat or a video linked to a web page or the like is received, the multiplexing / demultiplexing unit ex453 multiplexes in order to decode multiplexed data received via the antenna ex450. By separating the data, the multiplexed data is divided into a bit stream of video data and a bit stream of audio data, and the encoded video data is supplied to the video signal processing unit ex455 via the synchronization bus ex470, and The converted audio data is supplied to the audio signal processing unit ex 454. The video signal processing unit ex 455 decodes the video signal by the moving picture decoding method corresponding to the moving picture coding method described in each of the above embodiments, and is linked from the display unit ex 458 via the display control unit ex 459. An image or a still image included in the moving image file is displayed. The audio signal processing unit ex 454 decodes the audio signal, and the audio output unit ex 457 outputs the audio. Furthermore, since real-time streaming is widespread, depending on the user's situation, it may happen that sound reproduction is not socially appropriate. Therefore, as an initial value, it is preferable to have a configuration in which only the video data is reproduced without reproducing the audio signal. Audio may be synchronized and played back only when the user performs an operation such as clicking on video data.
またここではスマートフォンex115を例に説明したが、端末としては符号化器及び復号化器を両方持つ送受信型端末の他に、符号化器のみを有する送信端末、及び、復号化器のみを有する受信端末という3通りの実装形式が考えられる。さらに、デジタル放送用システムにおいて、映像データに音声データなどが多重化された多重化データを受信又は送信するとして説明したが、多重化データには、音声データ以外に映像に関連する文字データなどが多重化されてもよいし、多重化データではなく映像データ自体が受信又は送信されてもよい。
Also, although the smartphone ex115 has been described as an example, in addition to a transceiving terminal having both an encoder and a decoder as a terminal, a transmitting terminal having only the encoder and a receiver having only the decoder There are three possible implementation forms: terminals. Furthermore, in the digital broadcasting system, it has been described that multiplexed data in which audio data is multiplexed with video data is received or transmitted, but in multiplexed data, character data related to video other than audio data is also described. It may be multiplexed, or video data itself may be received or transmitted, not multiplexed data.
なお、CPUを含む主制御部ex460が符号化又は復号処理を制御するとして説明したが、端末はGPUを備えることも多い。よって、CPUとGPUで共通化されたメモリ、又は共通に使用できるようにアドレスが管理されているメモリにより、GPUの性能を活かして広い領域を一括して処理する構成でもよい。これにより符号化時間を短縮でき、リアルタイム性を確保し、低遅延を実現できる。特に動き探索、デブロックフィルタ、SAO(Sample Adaptive Offset)、及び変換・量子化の処理を、CPUではなく、GPUでピクチャなどの単位で一括して行うと効率的である。
Although the main control unit ex 460 including the CPU is described as controlling the encoding or decoding process, the terminal often includes a GPU. Therefore, a configuration in which a large area is collectively processed using the performance of the GPU may be performed using a memory shared by the CPU and the GPU, or a memory whose address is managed so as to be commonly used. As a result, coding time can be shortened, real time property can be secured, and low delay can be realized. In particular, it is efficient to perform processing of motion search, deblock filter, sample adaptive offset (SAO), and transform / quantization collectively in units of pictures or the like on the GPU instead of the CPU.
本態様を本開示における他の態様の少なくとも一部と組み合わせて実施してもよい。また、本態様のフローチャートに記載の一部の処理、装置の一部の構成、シンタックスの一部などを他の態様と組み合わせて実施してもよい。
This aspect may be practiced in combination with at least some of the other aspects in the present disclosure. In addition, part of the processing described in the flowchart of this aspect, part of the configuration of the apparatus, part of the syntax, and the like may be implemented in combination with other aspects.
本開示は、例えば、テレビジョン受像機、デジタルビデオレコーダー、カーナビゲーション、携帯電話、デジタルカメラ、デジタルビデオカメラ、テレビ会議システム、又は、電子ミラー等に利用可能である。
The present disclosure is applicable to, for example, a television receiver, a digital video recorder, a car navigation system, a mobile phone, a digital camera, a digital video camera, a video conference system, an electronic mirror, and the like.
100 符号化装置
102 分割部
104 減算部
106 変換部
108 量子化部
110 エントロピー符号化部
112、204 逆量子化部
114、206 逆変換部
116、208 加算部
118、210 ブロックメモリ
120、212 ループフィルタ部
122、214 フレームメモリ
124、216 イントラ予測部
126、218 インター予測部
128、220 予測制御部
160、260 回路
162、262 メモリ
200 復号装置
202 エントロピー復号部Reference Signs List 100 encoder 102 division unit 104 subtraction unit 106 transformation unit 108 quantization unit 110 entropy encoding unit 112, 204 inverse quantization unit 114, 206 inverse transformation unit 116, 208 addition unit 118, 210 block memory 120, 212 loop filter Unit 122, 214 Frame memory 124, 216 Intra prediction unit 126, 218 Inter prediction unit 128, 220 Prediction control unit 160, 260 Circuit 162, 262 Memory 200 Decoding device 202 Entropy decoding unit
102 分割部
104 減算部
106 変換部
108 量子化部
110 エントロピー符号化部
112、204 逆量子化部
114、206 逆変換部
116、208 加算部
118、210 ブロックメモリ
120、212 ループフィルタ部
122、214 フレームメモリ
124、216 イントラ予測部
126、218 インター予測部
128、220 予測制御部
160、260 回路
162、262 メモリ
200 復号装置
202 エントロピー復号部
Claims (66)
- 回路と、
メモリと、を備え、
前記回路は、前記メモリを用いて、
第1処理単位で共通に使用する探索範囲を設定し、
前記第1処理単位に含まれる1又は複数の第2処理単位のうちインター予測を用いる第2処理単位に対して、前記探索範囲外の画素の参照を制限し、前記探索範囲内の画素を参照して符号化処理を行う
符号化装置。 Circuit,
With memory,
The circuit uses the memory to
Set a search range commonly used in the first processing unit,
For the second processing unit using inter prediction among the one or more second processing units included in the first processing unit, the reference of the pixels outside the search range is restricted, and the pixels in the search range are referred to Coding device that performs coding processing. - 前記第1処理単位は、ピクチャの基本分割単位である1つ或いは複数の第2処理単位から構成されるブロック単位、又は、1つ或いは複数の第2処理単位から構成される予め定義された大きさのブロック単位である
請求項1記載の符号化装置。 The first processing unit is a block unit composed of one or more second processing units which is a basic division unit of a picture, or a predefined size composed of one or more second processing units The encoding device according to claim 1, wherein the encoding unit is a block unit of - 前記第1処理単位に含まれる対象第2処理単位に対して、
複数のインター予測モードのうち、選択対象のインター予測モードに割り当てられた動きベクトルを用いた動き補償処理で、前記探索範囲外の画素を参照するインター予測モードを除外し、
除外後のインター予測モードとイントラ予測モードとのなかから1つのモードを選択し、
選択したモードを用いて符号化処理を行う
請求項1又は2記載の符号化装置。 With respect to the target second processing unit included in the first processing unit,
Among the plurality of inter prediction modes, motion compensation processing using a motion vector assigned to the inter prediction mode to be selected excludes the inter prediction mode that refers to pixels outside the search range,
Select one mode from inter prediction mode and intra prediction mode after exclusion,
The encoding apparatus according to claim 1, wherein the encoding process is performed using the selected mode. - 前記インター予測モードの除外では、さらに、前記選択対象のインター予測モードにおける、前記動き補償処理以外に適用される予測画像生成に関わる他の処理において、前記探索範囲外の画素を必要とするインター予測モードを除外する
請求項3記載の符号化装置。 In the exclusion of the inter prediction mode, inter prediction which requires a pixel outside the search range in another process related to predicted image generation applied to the selection target inter prediction mode other than the motion compensation process is further performed. The encoding device according to claim 3, wherein the mode is excluded. - 前記選択対象のインター予測モードにおいて、動き補償処理以外に適用される予測画像生成に関わる他の処理であって、前記探索範囲外の画素を必要とする前記他の処理があった場合、前記他の処理を行わずに予測画像を生成する
請求項3記載の符号化装置。 In the inter prediction mode to be selected, there is another process related to prediction image generation to be applied other than the motion compensation process, and there is the other process requiring a pixel outside the search range, the other process The encoding apparatus according to claim 3, wherein the prediction image is generated without performing the process of (4). - 前記探索範囲の設定では、参照可能な処理済みピクチャ、前記処理済みピクチャにおける探索領域の大きさ、及び前記処理済みピクチャにおける探索領域の中心位置シフト量、を含む情報を用いて前記探索範囲を設定する
請求項1記載の符号化装置。 In the setting of the search range, the search range is set using information including a processed picture to which reference can be made, a size of a search area in the processed picture, and a center position shift amount of the search area in the processed picture. The encoding device according to claim 1. - 前記探索領域の大きさを、前記参照可能な処理済みピクチャの枚数に応じて切替える
請求項6記載の符号化装置。 The encoding device according to claim 6, wherein the size of the search area is switched according to the number of the reference-processed processed pictures. - 前記参照可能な処理済みピクチャにおける前記探索領域の総和が特定の値以下になるように、前記探索領域の大きさを設定する
請求項6記載の符号化装置。 The encoding apparatus according to claim 6, wherein the size of the search area is set such that the sum of the search areas in the referenceable processed picture is equal to or less than a specific value. - 前記参照可能な処理済みピクチャの枚数及び前記探索領域の大きさ、又は前記探索領域の総和、の上限値を、プロファイル値又はレベル値に対応付けて規定し、
対象ストリームに割り当てられたプロファイル値又はレベル値に応じて、前記上限値以下の値になるように、前記参照可能な処理済みピクチャの枚数及び前記探索領域の大きさを設定する
請求項6記載の符号化装置。 An upper limit value of the number of referable processed pictures and the size of the search area or the sum of the search areas is defined in association with a profile value or a level value.
The number of the referable processed pictures and the size of the search area are set according to the profile value or the level value assigned to the target stream so that the value becomes equal to or less than the upper limit value. Encoding device. - 前記第1処理単位に含まれる全ての第2処理単位で、前記探索範囲外の画素を必要とするインター予測モードを選択していないことを示す情報を、シーケンスヘッダ領域、ピクチャヘッダ領域、スライスヘッダ領域又は補助情報領域に符号化する
請求項1記載の符号化装置。 Information indicating that the inter prediction mode requiring the pixels outside the search range is not selected in all the second processing units included in the first processing unit, a sequence header area, a picture header area, and a slice header The encoding apparatus according to claim 1, wherein the encoding is performed in an area or an auxiliary information area. - 復号装置の処理能力に応じて、前記探索範囲外の画素を参照するインター予測モードを除外するか否かを切替える
請求項3記載の符号化装置。 The encoding apparatus according to claim 3, wherein whether to exclude an inter prediction mode that refers to a pixel outside the search range is switched according to the processing capability of the decoding apparatus. - 対象ストリームに割り当てられたプロファイル値又はレベル値に応じて、前記探索範囲外の画素を参照するインター予測モードを除外するか否かを切替える
請求項3記載の符号化装置。 The encoding apparatus according to claim 3, wherein whether to exclude an inter prediction mode that refers to a pixel outside the search range is switched according to a profile value or a level value assigned to a target stream. - 対象ピクチャの大きさに応じて、前記探索範囲外の画素を参照するインター予測モードを除外するか否かを切替える
請求項3記載の符号化装置。 The encoding apparatus according to claim 3, wherein whether to exclude an inter prediction mode that refers to a pixel outside the search range is switched according to the size of the target picture. - 前記探索領域の中心位置シフト量は、対象ピクチャにおける対象第1処理単位の位置と、参照する処理済みピクチャにおける前記探索領域の位置とのシフト量である
請求項6記載の符号化装置。 The encoding apparatus according to claim 6, wherein the center position shift amount of the search area is a shift amount between a position of a target first processing unit in a target picture and a position of the search area in a processed picture to be referred to. - 前記探索領域の中心位置シフト量を、第1処理単位毎に導出する
請求項6記載の符号化装置。 The encoding apparatus according to claim 6, wherein the center position shift amount of the search area is derived for each first processing unit. - 前記探索領域の中心位置シフト量を、対象第1処理単位の空間的又は時間的周辺に位置する処理済み第1処理単位に含まれる第2処理単位に割り当てられた動きベクトルを用いて導出する
請求項6記載の符号化装置。 The center position shift amount of the search area is derived using a motion vector assigned to a second processing unit included in a processed first processing unit located in the spatial or temporal periphery of the target first processing unit. Item 7. The encoding device according to Item 6. - 前記処理済み第1処理単位は、対象第1処理単位に対して処理順が直前である第1処理単位以外の処理済み第1処理単位である
請求項16記載の符号化装置。 17. The encoding device according to claim 16, wherein the processed first processing unit is a processed first processing unit other than the first processing unit in which the processing order is immediately before the target first processing unit. - 前記探索領域の中心位置シフト量として、対象ピクチャ又は対象スライスに含まれる全ての第1処理単位に対して、共通の値を設定し、
前記共通の値を特定するための情報を、ピクチャヘッダ領域又はスライスヘッダ領域に符号化する
請求項6記載の符号化装置。 As the center position shift amount of the search area, a common value is set for all first processing units included in the target picture or target slice,
The encoding apparatus according to claim 6, wherein the information for identifying the common value is encoded in a picture header area or a slice header area. - 前記共通の値を、中心位置のシフトが0となる値に設定する
請求項18記載の符号化装置。 The encoding apparatus according to claim 18, wherein the common value is set to a value at which the shift of the center position is zero. - 前記共通の値を、処理済みピクチャに含まれる複数の第2処理単位で導出された複数の動きベクトルの統計量を用いて導出する
請求項18記載の符号化装置。 The encoding apparatus according to claim 18, wherein the common value is derived using statistics of a plurality of motion vectors derived in a plurality of second processing units included in a processed picture. - 前記探索範囲の位置が特定された時点で、処理済みピクチャの画像データを格納しているメモリから、対象第1処理単位に対して設定される前記探索範囲の参照画素データの転送を開始し、転送が完了してから前記対象第1処理単位の処理を開始する
請求項1記載の符号化装置。 When the position of the search range is specified, transfer of reference pixel data of the search range set for the target first processing unit is started from a memory storing image data of a processed picture, The encoding device according to claim 1, wherein processing of the target first processing unit is started after transfer is completed. - 前記処理順が直前である第1処理単位の処理を待たずに、処理済みピクチャの画像データを格納しているメモリから、対象第1処理単位に対して設定される前記探索範囲の参照画素データの転送を開始する
請求項17記載の符号化装置。 Reference pixel data of the search range set for a target first processing unit from a memory storing image data of a processed picture without waiting for processing of the first processing unit whose processing order is immediately before The encoding apparatus according to claim 17, wherein transfer of is started. - 対象第1処理単位に対して設定された前記探索範囲の参照画素データのうち、既に処理済みの第1処理単位に対して設定されていた前記探索範囲と重複する領域の参照画素データを除いて、前記参照画素データのメモリからの転送を行う
請求項1記載の符号化装置。 Among reference pixel data of the search range set for the target first processing unit, except for reference pixel data of an area overlapping the search range set for the already processed first processing unit The encoding device according to claim 1, wherein the reference pixel data is transferred from a memory. - 前記第1処理単位に含まれる前記複数の第2処理単位のうち、FRUCモードを用いる第2処理単位に対して、前記探索範囲外の画素の参照を制限し、前記探索範囲内の画素を参照して符号化処理を行う
請求項1記載の符号化装置。 For the second processing unit using the FRUC mode among the plurality of second processing units included in the first processing unit, reference to pixels outside the search range is restricted, and pixels within the search range are referred to The encoding apparatus according to claim 1, wherein the encoding process is performed. - 前記FRUCモードにおいて、
処理済みブロックの動きベクトルから導出した複数の候補動きベクトルから前記探索範囲外の画素を参照とする候補動きベクトルを評価対象から除外し、
除外後の候補動きベクトルに対してコスト評価を行う
請求項24記載の符号化装置。 In the FRUC mode,
The candidate motion vectors with reference to the pixels outside the search range are excluded from evaluation targets from a plurality of candidate motion vectors derived from the motion vector of the processed block,
The coding apparatus according to claim 24, wherein cost evaluation is performed on candidate motion vectors after exclusion. - 前記候補動きベクトルの除外では、さらに、FRUC処理を行った後に適用される予測画像生成に関わる他の処理において、前記探索範囲外の画素を必要とする候補動きベクトルを評価対象から除外する
請求項25記載の符号化装置。 In the removal of the candidate motion vector, a candidate motion vector requiring a pixel outside the search range is further excluded from the evaluation target in another process related to prediction image generation applied after performing the FRUC process. 25. The encoding device according to 25. - 前記FRUCモードにおいて、FRUC処理を行った後に適用される予測画像生成に関わる他の処理であって、前記探索範囲外の画素を必要とする前記他の処理があった場合、前記他の処理を行わずに予測画像を生成する
請求項25記載の符号化装置。 In the FRUC mode, another process related to predicted image generation applied after the FRUC process is performed, and there is the other process requiring a pixel outside the search range, the other process is performed. The encoding apparatus according to claim 25, wherein the prediction image is generated without performing. - 前記探索範囲の設定では、参照可能である処理済みピクチャを指定するための参照インデックスと、前記参照インデックスにおける探索領域の大きさと、前記参照インデックスにおける探索領域の中心位置シフト量と、を含む情報を用いて前記探索範囲を設定する
請求項24記載の符号化装置。 The setting of the search range includes information including a reference index for specifying a processed picture that can be referred to, the size of the search area in the reference index, and the center position shift amount of the search area in the reference index. The encoding apparatus according to claim 24, wherein the search range is set using. - 前記探索領域の大きさを、前記参照インデックスの総数に応じて切替える
請求項28記載の符号化装置。 The coding apparatus according to claim 28, wherein the size of the search area is switched according to the total number of the reference indexes. - 前記参照インデックスにおける前記探索領域の総和が特定の値以下になるように、前記探索領域の大きさを設定する
請求項28記載の符号化装置。 The encoding apparatus according to claim 28, wherein the size of the search area is set such that the sum of the search areas in the reference index is equal to or less than a specific value. - 前記参照インデックスの総数及び探索領域の大きさ、又は前記探索領域の総和、の上限値を、プロファイル値又はレベル値に対応付けて規定し、
対象ストリームに割り当てられたプロファイル値又はレベル値に応じて、前記上限値以下の値になるように、前記参照インデックスの総数及び前記探索領域の大きさを設定する
請求項28記載の符号化装置。 An upper limit value of the total number of the reference index and the size of the search area or the total sum of the search area is defined in association with the profile value or the level value,
The encoding apparatus according to claim 28, wherein the total number of reference indexes and the size of the search area are set so as to be a value equal to or less than the upper limit value according to a profile value or a level value assigned to a target stream. - 1つの前記参照可能な処理済みピクチャに対して、複数の前記参照インデックスを対応付ける
請求項28記載の符号化装置。 The coding apparatus according to claim 28, wherein a plurality of the reference indexes are associated with one referenceable processed picture. - 前記参照可能な処理済みピクチャを指定するための参照インデックス及び前記探索領域の大きさ特定するための情報を、シーケンスヘッダ領域、ピクチャヘッダ領域、スライスヘッダ領域又は補助情報領域に符号化する
請求項28記載の符号化装置。 The reference index for specifying the referable processed picture and the information for specifying the size of the search area are encoded in a sequence header area, a picture header area, a slice header area, or a side information area. Coding device as described. - 復号装置の処理能力に応じて、前記参照インデックスの総数及び前記探索領域の大きさを切替える
請求項28記載の符号化装置。 The coding device according to claim 28, wherein the total number of reference indexes and the size of the search area are switched according to the processing capability of the decoding device. - 対象ストリームに割り当てられたプロファイル値又はレベル値に応じて、前記参照インデックスの総数及び前記探索領域の大きさを切替える
請求項28記載の符号化装置。 The coding apparatus according to claim 28, wherein the total number of reference indexes and the size of the search area are switched according to a profile value or a level value assigned to a target stream. - 対象ピクチャの大きさに応じて、前記参照インデックスの総数及び前記探索領域の大きさを切替える
請求項28記載の符号化装置。 The coding apparatus according to claim 28, wherein the total number of reference indexes and the size of the search area are switched according to the size of a target picture. - 前記探索領域の中心位置シフト量を、第1処理単位毎に導出する方法と、対象ピクチャ又は対象スライスに属する全ての第1処理単位に対して共通の値を設定する方法との、2つの方法を対象ピクチャ毎に切り替える
請求項28記載の符号化装置。 Two methods, a method of deriving the center position shift amount of the search area for each first processing unit, and a method of setting a common value to all first processing units belonging to the target picture or target slice The coding apparatus according to claim 28, wherein the coding unit is switched for each target picture. - 前記2つの方法のどちらを使用するかを特定するための情報を、ピクチャヘッダ領域又はスライスヘッダ領域に符号化する
請求項37記載の符号化装置。 The encoding apparatus according to claim 37, wherein information for specifying which of the two methods is used is encoded in a picture header area or a slice header area. - 回路と、
メモリと、を備え、
前記回路は、前記メモリを用いて、
第1処理単位で共通に使用する探索範囲を設定し、
前記第1処理単位に含まれる複数の第2処理単位のうちインター予測を用いる第2処理単位に対して、前記探索範囲外の画素の参照を制限し、前記探索範囲内の画素を用いて復号処理を行う
復号装置。 Circuit,
With memory,
The circuit uses the memory to
Set a search range commonly used in the first processing unit,
For the second processing unit using inter prediction among the plurality of second processing units included in the first processing unit, reference to pixels outside the search range is restricted, and decoding is performed using pixels within the search range Decoding device that performs processing. - 前記第1処理単位は、ピクチャの基本分割単位である1つ或いは複数の第2処理単位から構成されるブロック単位、又は、1つ或いは複数の第2処理単位から構成される予め定義された大きさのブロック単位である
請求項39記載の復号装置。 The first processing unit is a block unit composed of one or more second processing units which is a basic division unit of a picture, or a predefined size composed of one or more second processing units 40. The decoding apparatus according to claim 39, wherein the unit is a block unit of a unit. - 前記探索範囲の設定では、参照可能な処理済みピクチャ、前記処理済みピクチャにおける探索領域の大きさ、及び前記処理済みピクチャにおける探索領域の中心位置シフト量、を含む情報を用いて前記探索範囲を設定する
請求項39記載の復号装置。 In the setting of the search range, the search range is set using information including a processed picture to which reference can be made, a size of a search area in the processed picture, and a center position shift amount of the search area in the processed picture. The decoding device according to claim 39. - 前記探索領域の大きさを、前記参照可能な処理済みピクチャの枚数に応じて切替える
請求項41記載の復号装置。 42. The decoding device according to claim 41, wherein the size of the search area is switched according to the number of the reference-processed processed pictures. - 前記参照可能な処理済みピクチャにおける前記探索領域の総和が特定の値以下になるように、前記探索領域の大きさを設定する
請求項41記載の復号装置。 42. The decoding apparatus according to claim 41, wherein the size of the search area is set such that the sum of the search areas in the referenceable processed picture is less than or equal to a specific value. - 前記参照可能な処理済みピクチャの枚数及び前記探索領域の大きさ、又は前記探索領域の総和、の上限値を、プロファイル値又はレベル値に対応付けて規定し、
対象ストリームに割り当てられたプロファイル値又はレベル値に応じて、前記上限値以下の値になるように、前記参照可能な処理済みピクチャの枚数及び前記探索領域の大きさを設定する
請求項41記載の復号装置。 An upper limit value of the number of referable processed pictures and the size of the search area or the sum of the search areas is defined in association with a profile value or a level value.
42. The number of referable processed pictures and the size of the search area are set so as to be a value equal to or less than the upper limit value according to a profile value or a level value assigned to a target stream. Decoding device. - 前記第1処理単位に含まれる全ての第2処理単位で、前記探索範囲外の画素を必要とするインター予測モードを選択していないことを示す情報を、シーケンスヘッダ領域、ピクチャヘッダ領域、スライスヘッダ領域又は補助情報領域から復号する
請求項39記載の復号装置。 Information indicating that the inter prediction mode requiring the pixels outside the search range is not selected in all the second processing units included in the first processing unit, a sequence header area, a picture header area, and a slice header The decoding apparatus according to claim 39, wherein the decoding is performed from the area or the auxiliary information area. - 前記探索領域の中心位置シフト量は、対象ピクチャにおける対象第1処理単位の位置と、参照する処理済みピクチャにおける前記探索領域の位置とのシフト量である
請求項41記載の復号装置。 The decoding device according to claim 41, wherein the center position shift amount of the search area is a shift amount between a position of a target first processing unit in a target picture and a position of the search area in a processed picture to be referred to. - 前記探索領域の中心位置シフト量を、第1処理単位毎に導出する
請求項41記載の復号装置。 42. The decoding apparatus according to claim 41, wherein the shift amount of the center position of the search area is derived for each first processing unit. - 前記探索領域の中心位置シフト量を、対象第1処理単位の空間的又は時間的周辺に位置する処理済み第1処理単位に含まれる第2処理単位に割り当てられた動きベクトルを用いて導出する
請求項41記載の復号装置。 The center position shift amount of the search area is derived using a motion vector assigned to a second processing unit included in a processed first processing unit located in the spatial or temporal periphery of the target first processing unit. The decryption device according to Item 41. - 前記処理済み第1処理単位は、対象第1処理単位に対して処理順が直前である第1処理単位以外の処理済み第1処理単位である
請求項48記載の復号装置。 The decoding device according to claim 48, wherein the processed first processing unit is a processed first processing unit other than the first processing unit in which the processing order is immediately before the target first processing unit. - 前記探索領域の中心位置シフト量として、対象ピクチャ又は対象スライスに含まれる全ての第1処理単位に対して、共通の値が設定され、
前記共通の値を特定するための情報を、ピクチャヘッダ領域又はスライスヘッダ領域から復号し、前記共通の値を特定する
請求項41記載の復号装置。 As the center position shift amount of the search area, a common value is set to all the first processing units included in the target picture or target slice,
42. The decoding apparatus according to claim 41, wherein the information for specifying the common value is decoded from a picture header area or a slice header area, and the common value is specified. - 前記探索範囲の位置が特定された時点で、処理済みピクチャの画像データを格納しているメモリから、対象第1処理単位に対して設定される前記探索範囲の参照画素データの転送を開始し、転送が完了してから前記対象第1処理単位の処理を開始する
請求項39記載の復号装置。 When the position of the search range is specified, transfer of reference pixel data of the search range set for the target first processing unit is started from a memory storing image data of a processed picture, 40. The decryption apparatus according to claim 39, wherein processing of the target first processing unit is started after transfer is completed. - 前記処理順が直前である第1処理単位の処理を待たずに、処理済みピクチャの画像データを格納しているメモリから、対象第1処理単位に対して設定される前記探索範囲の参照画素データの転送を開始する
請求項49記載の復号装置。 Reference pixel data of the search range set for a target first processing unit from a memory storing image data of a processed picture without waiting for processing of the first processing unit whose processing order is immediately before 50. The decryption apparatus according to claim 49, wherein transfer of is started. - 対象第1処理単位に対して設定された前記探索範囲の参照画素データのうち、既に処理済みの第1処理単位に対して設定されていた前記探索範囲と重複する領域の参照画素データを除いて、前記参照画素データのメモリからの転送を行う
請求項39記載の復号装置。 Among reference pixel data of the search range set for the target first processing unit, except for reference pixel data of an area overlapping the search range set for the already processed first processing unit The decoding apparatus according to claim 39, wherein the reference pixel data is transferred from a memory. - 前記第1処理単位に含まれる1又は複数の第2処理単位のうち、FRUCモードを用いる第2処理単位に対して、前記探索範囲外の画素の参照を制限し、前記探索範囲内の画素を用いて復号処理を行う
請求項39記載の復号装置。 Among the one or more second processing units included in the first processing unit, reference to pixels outside the search range is restricted with respect to the second processing unit using the FRUC mode, and pixels within the search range are selected. 40. The decoding apparatus according to claim 39, wherein the decoding process is performed. - 前記FRUCモードにおいて、
処理済みブロックの動きベクトルから導出した複数の候補動きベクトルから前記探索範囲外の画素を参照とする候補動きベクトルを評価対象から除外し、
除外後の候補動きベクトルに対してコスト評価を行う
請求項54記載の復号装置。 In the FRUC mode,
The candidate motion vectors with reference to the pixels outside the search range are excluded from evaluation targets from a plurality of candidate motion vectors derived from the motion vector of the processed block,
The decoding apparatus according to claim 54, wherein cost evaluation is performed on candidate motion vectors after exclusion. - 前記候補動きベクトルの除外では、さらに、FRUC処理を行った後に適用される予測画像生成に関わる他の処理において、前記探索範囲外の画素を必要とする候補動きベクトルを評価対象から除外する
請求項55記載の復号装置。 In the removal of the candidate motion vector, a candidate motion vector requiring a pixel outside the search range is further excluded from the evaluation target in another process related to prediction image generation applied after performing the FRUC process. 55. The decoding device according to 55. - 前記FRUCモードにおいて、FRUC処理を行った後に適用される予測画像生成に関わる他の処理であって、前記探索範囲外の画素を必要とする前記他の処理があった場合、前記他の処理を行わずに予測画像を生成する
請求項55記載の復号装置。 In the FRUC mode, another process related to predicted image generation applied after the FRUC process is performed, and there is the other process requiring a pixel outside the search range, the other process is performed. The decoding device according to claim 55, wherein the prediction image is generated without performing. - 前記探索範囲の設定では、参照可能である処理済みピクチャを指定するための参照インデックスと、前記参照インデックスにおける探索領域の大きさと、前記参照インデックスにおける探索領域の中心位置シフト量と、を含む情報を用いて前記探索範囲を設定する
請求項54記載の復号装置。 The setting of the search range includes information including a reference index for specifying a processed picture that can be referred to, the size of the search area in the reference index, and the center position shift amount of the search area in the reference index. The decoding device according to claim 54, wherein the search range is set using. - 前記探索領域の大きさを、前記参照インデックスの総数に応じて切替える
請求項58記載の復号装置。 The decoding device according to claim 58, wherein the size of the search area is switched according to the total number of the reference indexes. - 前記参照インデックスにおける前記探索領域の総和が特定の値以下になるように、前記探索領域の大きさを設定する
請求項58記載の復号装置。 The decoding device according to Claim 58, wherein the size of the search area is set such that the sum of the search areas in the reference index is less than or equal to a specific value. - 前記参照インデックスの総数及び探索領域の大きさ、又は前記探索領域の総和、の上限値を、プロファイル値又はレベル値に対応付けて規定し、
対象ストリームに割り当てられたプロファイル値又はレベル値に応じて、前記上限値以下の値になるように、前記参照インデックスの総数及び前記探索領域の大きさを設定する
請求項58記載の復号装置。 An upper limit value of the total number of the reference index and the size of the search area or the total sum of the search area is defined in association with the profile value or the level value,
The decoding apparatus according to claim 58, wherein the total number of the reference indexes and the size of the search area are set so as to be a value equal to or less than the upper limit value according to a profile value or a level value assigned to a target stream. - 前記参照可能な処理済みピクチャを指定するための参照インデックス及び前記探索領域の大きさ特定するための情報を、シーケンスヘッダ領域、ピクチャヘッダ領域、スライスヘッダ領域又は補助情報領域から復号し、前記参照インデックス及び前記探索領域の大きさを特定する
請求項58記載の復号装置。 The reference index for specifying the referenceable processed picture and the information for specifying the size of the search area are decoded from the sequence header area, the picture header area, the slice header area or the auxiliary information area, and the reference index The decoding apparatus according to claim 58, wherein the size of the search area is specified. - 前記探索領域の中心位置シフト量を、第1処理単位毎に導出する方法と、対象ピクチャ又は対象スライスに属する全ての第1処理単位に対して共通の値を設定する方法との、2つの方法を対象ピクチャ毎に切り替える
請求項58記載の復号装置。 Two methods, a method of deriving the center position shift amount of the search area for each first processing unit, and a method of setting a common value to all first processing units belonging to the target picture or target slice The decoding device according to claim 58, wherein: - 前記2つの方法のどちらを使用するかを特定するための情報を、ピクチャヘッダ領域又はスライスヘッダ領域から復号し、前記2つの方法のどちらを使用するかを特定する
請求項63記載の復号装置。 The decoding apparatus according to claim 63, wherein information for specifying which of the two methods is to be used is decoded from a picture header area or a slice header area, and which of the two methods is to be used. - 第1処理単位で共通に使用する探索範囲を設定し、
前記第1処理単位に含まれる1又は複数の第2処理単位のうちインター予測を用いる第2処理単位に対して、前記探索範囲外の画素の参照を制限し、前記探索範囲内の画素を参照して符号化処理を行う
符号化方法。 Set a search range commonly used in the first processing unit,
For the second processing unit using inter prediction among the one or more second processing units included in the first processing unit, the reference of the pixels outside the search range is restricted, and the pixels in the search range are referred to Coding method to perform coding processing. - 第1処理単位で共通に使用する探索範囲を設定し、
前記第1処理単位に含まれる複数の第2処理単位のうちインター予測を用いる第2処理単位に対して、前記探索範囲外の画素の参照を制限し、前記探索範囲内の画素を用いて復号処理を行う
復号方法。 Set a search range commonly used in the first processing unit,
For the second processing unit using inter prediction among the plurality of second processing units included in the first processing unit, reference to pixels outside the search range is restricted, and decoding is performed using pixels within the search range Decryption method to process.
Applications Claiming Priority (6)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US201762578808P | 2017-10-30 | 2017-10-30 | |
US201762578846P | 2017-10-30 | 2017-10-30 | |
US62/578,808 | 2017-10-30 | ||
US62/578,846 | 2017-10-30 | ||
US201762609715P | 2017-12-22 | 2017-12-22 | |
US62/609,715 | 2017-12-22 |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
WO2019087978A1 true WO2019087978A1 (en) | 2019-05-09 |
Family
ID=66331438
Family Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
PCT/JP2018/039942 WO2019087978A1 (en) | 2017-10-30 | 2018-10-26 | Coding device, decoding device, coding method and decoding method |
Country Status (1)
Country | Link |
---|---|
WO (1) | WO2019087978A1 (en) |
Citations (2)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US20160286229A1 (en) * | 2015-03-27 | 2016-09-29 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Motion vector derivation in video coding |
JP2017505021A (en) * | 2013-12-13 | 2017-02-09 | 華為技術有限公司Huawei Technologies Co.,Ltd. | Image processing method and apparatus |
-
2018
- 2018-10-26 WO PCT/JP2018/039942 patent/WO2019087978A1/en active Application Filing
Patent Citations (2)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JP2017505021A (en) * | 2013-12-13 | 2017-02-09 | 華為技術有限公司Huawei Technologies Co.,Ltd. | Image processing method and apparatus |
US20160286229A1 (en) * | 2015-03-27 | 2016-09-29 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Motion vector derivation in video coding |
Non-Patent Citations (2)
Title |
---|
A. ROBERT ET AL.: "High precision FRUC with additional candidates", JOINT VIDEO EXPLORATION TEAM(JVET) OF ITU-T SG 16 WP 3 AND ISO/IEC JTC 1/SC 29/WG11 4TH MEETING, 5 October 2016 (2016-10-05), Chengdu, CN, pages 1 - 7, XP030150274 * |
CHEN, JIANLE ET AL.: "Algorithm Description of Joint Exploration Test Model 5 (JEM 5", JOINT VIDEO EXPLORATION TEAM(JVET) OF ITUTSG 16 WP 3 AND ISO/IEC JTC 1/SC 29/WG11 5TH MEETING, vol. 2, 12 January 2017 (2017-01-12), Geneva, CH, pages 15 - 16, XP055540446 * |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
JP6765520B2 (en) | Encoding device, decoding device, coding method and decoding method | |
JP6946419B2 (en) | Decoding device, decoding method and program | |
JP7087030B2 (en) | Encoding device, decoding device, coding method and decoding method | |
JP7014881B2 (en) | Coding device and coding method | |
JP2022008413A (en) | Decoding device, encoding device and recording medium | |
JPWO2019155971A1 (en) | Encoding device, decoding device, coding method and decoding method | |
JP2021101576A (en) | Decoding device and storage medium | |
WO2019138998A1 (en) | Encoding device, decoding device, encoding method, and decoding method | |
WO2019098152A1 (en) | Coding device, decoding device, coding method and decoding method | |
WO2019013235A1 (en) | Coding device, coding method, decoding device and decoding method | |
WO2019013236A1 (en) | Coding device, coding method, decoding device and decoding method | |
WO2019069782A1 (en) | Encoding device, decoding device, encoding method and decoding method | |
JP6770192B2 (en) | Encoding device, coding method, decoding device and decoding method | |
JP6767579B2 (en) | Encoding device, coding method, decoding device and decoding method | |
JP2021180494A (en) | Decoding device, decoding method, and non-temporary storage medium | |
WO2019009314A1 (en) | Encoding device, decoding device, encoding method and decoding method | |
WO2019131364A1 (en) | Coding device, decoding device, coding method, and decoding method | |
WO2019124191A1 (en) | Encoding device, decoding device, encoding method, and decoding method | |
WO2019059107A1 (en) | Encoding device, decoding device, encoding method and decoding method | |
WO2019021803A1 (en) | Encoding device, decoding device, encoding method, and decoding method | |
WO2019069902A1 (en) | Encoding device, decoding device, encoding method, and decoding method | |
WO2019065329A1 (en) | Encoding device, decoding device, encoding method and decoding method | |
WO2019031369A1 (en) | Coding device, decoding device, coding method and decoding method | |
WO2019146718A1 (en) | Coding device, decoding device, coding method, and decoding method | |
WO2019244809A1 (en) | Coding device, decoding device, coding method, and decoding method |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
121 | Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application |
Ref document number: 18873928 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |
|
NENP | Non-entry into the national phase |
Ref country code: DE |
|
122 | Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase |
Ref document number: 18873928 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |